Skip to main content

Full text of "The Driffield angler; in two parts: containing, descriptions of the different kinds of fresh water fish, and the best methods of taking them ... To which are added, instructions for shooting; with rules for the breeding, breaking, and management of pointers and spaniels; and the choice of guns for game and wild fowl. With a description of the forest of Blair, in Perthshire ... and the manner of killing the deer. Also, a short treatise on the coursing, and the training of greyhounds"

See other formats


UC-NRLF 


$B    271    Mfifi 


>^ 


M  t^ 


r  >^.^ 


>* 


W:A^- 


'V\. 


rM 


-^m 


\-M-  -r-^- 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/driffieldangleriOOmackrich 


THE 

BJRIJFFIEILB  ANG-JLEjR : 

TO    WHICH   ABE   ADDED, 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SHOOTING, 

RULES  FOR 

TRAINING  AND  MANAGING 

POINTERS;  SPANIELS,  AND^GREYHOUNDS, 

GAINSBOROUGH  : 
FEINTED  FOR  THE  AUTHOR,    AND  SOLD  BY  H.   MOZLEY  : 

SOLD  ALSO  BY  J.  ETHERINGTON, 

BOOKSELLER,  DRIFFIELD  5 

ANI>  THE  BOOKSELLERS  AT  HULL,  YORK,   SCARBOROtJGSy 
/kSALlON,  BEVERLIY,    BURLINGTON, 


THE 

©MFFIEILB  ANGjLEM; 

IN   TWO    PARTS: 

CONTAINING^ 

Defcriptions  of  the  different  kinds  of  FRESH  WATER  FISH, 

and  the  bed  methods  of  taking  them  in  rivers,  lakes,  and 

filh-ponds;  with  full  directions  for  BAITS,  and  the 

manner  of  making  ARTIFICIAL   FLIES 

for  every  month  in  the  feafon. 

TO    WHICH    ARE    ADDED, 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SHOOTING : 

With  rules  for  the  breeding,  breaking,  and  management  of 
POINTERS  AND  SPANIELS; 

AND    THE   CHOICE    OF 

GUNS  FOR  GAME  AND  WILD  FOWL. 

With  a  description  of 

THE  FOREST  OF  BLAIR, 

In  Perthshire,  belonging  to  his  Grace  the  Duke  of 
Athol ;   and  the  manner  of  killing  the  Deer. 

ALSO, 

A  SHORT  TREATISE  ON  COURSING, 

AND    THE 

TRAINING  OF  GREYHOUNDS. 


BY  ALEXANDER  MACKINTOSH, 

OF    GREAT-DRIFFIELD,    i^ORKSHIHE. 


GAINSBOROUGH : 


tUlNTED  FOR  THE  AUTHOR,  AND.  SOLD  BY   H.  MOZLEY,  MARKET^ 

fLACE:    SOLD  ALSO  BY  LONGMAN,  HURST,  AND  CO,  AND 

LACKINGTONy  ALLEN,  AND   COt   LONDON. 

( t'f 

V 


TO  * 

HIS  GRACE  THE  DUKE  OF  ATHOL, 
&c.  &c.  &c.  &c. 

My  Lord  Duke, 

With  the  utmost  humility  I 
presume  to  dedicate  to  your  Grace  the  fol- 
lowing sheets. 

Your  Grace's  well  known  liberality,  and  , 
the  protection  you  afford  to  the  fair  sports- 
man, will  plead  in  my  behalf  for  the  liberty 
I  have  taken. 

That  you  may  long  continue  to  enjoy 
those  amusements,  which  you  so  happily 
blend  with  pursuits  far  more  important,  for 
the  good  of  your  country,  and  the  benefit  of 
mankind,  is  the  sincere  wish  of, 

My  Lord  Duke, 

your  Grace's  most 

devoted  and  most 
obedient  servant, 

ALEXANDER  MACKINTOSH, 
A  2 

065 


ADVERTISEMENT. 

A.LTHOUGH  I  have  given  this  work  the 
title  of  the  Driffield  Angler,  the  rules  it  con- 
tains will  equally  apply  to  other  northern 
rivers ;  and  I  apprehend,  with  little  varia- 
tion, to  every  part  of  Great- Britain ;  but  as 
my  own  practice  has  been  confined  to  the 
North,  and  particularly  to  Driffield,  where  I 
have  resided  thirty  years,  I  imagined  it 
could  not  be  rendered  less  acceptable  to  tlie 
reader  for  being  compiled  near  the  banks  of 
one  of  the  finest  trout  streams  in  the  king- 
dom :  I  do  not  deny  that  I  have  sometimes 
quoted  from  other  writers  in  the  descriptive 
parts  of  this  work;  but  the  instructions,  and 
particularly  those  for  making  artificial  flies, 
are  my  own  ;  and  will,  I  hope  and  trust,  be 
found  of  considerable  use. 

A  3 


OBE   TO   MEAJLTM. 


^'^^i^^^'S^I^ 


O  Tttou  !  the  sportsman's  guide  and  frieHd, 
Hygeia,  to  our  plains  descend; 
Inspire  the  theme,  attune  the  voice, 
'Midst  nature's  blessings  to  rejoice  : 
Without  thee  pleasure  turns  to  pain. 
And  the  lark's  matin  song  is  vain. 

Soon  as  the  frozen  earth  unbinds 
Her  loosened  glebe,  when  southern  winds 
On  rippling  streams  begin  to  play, 
Conduct  us  forth  at  early  day  ; 
Whilst  on  fair  Flora's  front  are  set, 
The  primrose  and  the  violet : 
Each  morn  together  let  us  trace 
To  unlock'd  springs  the  Naiad  race  ; 
See  their  rich  urns  the  task  apply 
Our  fruitful  rivers  to  supply ; 
Thence  roving  the  gay  banks  along, 
(Whilst  musing  on  the  silver  song) 
View  the  bright  salmon  swiftly  glide, 
Thii  trout  in  all  his  speckled  pride. 
The  red  finn'd  perch  of  num'rous  breed, 
And  the  bold  tyrant  pike  succeed  i 


vni 

Still  mindful  with  our  line  and  hook, 
To  tempt  the  monarch  of  the  brook. 

Thee,  goddess,  every  month  reveres. 
As  Phoebus  down  the  zodiac  steers, 
But  chiefly  May,  if  blithe  she  comes 
Beneath  thy  smiles,  and  spreads  her  blooms 
O'er  hill  and  dale,  and  grove  and  field, 
Which  then  their  richest  verdure  yield  ^ 
Whilst  odoriferous  sweets  dispense 
Their  choicest  fragrance  to  the  sense : 
But  O  1  conduct  her  by  the  hand. 
Nor  lingering  let  the  virgin  stand  ; 
Haste,  haste,  and'bid  her  quick  display 
Her  bosom  to  the  genial  ray ; 
The  zephyr's  balmy  breath  inhale, 
And  loose  her  tresses  to  the  gale : 
Then  borne  on  joy's  ecstatic  wings 
The  mounting  lark  thro'  ether  sings  ; 
Then  stream  and  forest,  plain  and  grove. 
Rejoicing  in  the  month  of  love. 
Shall  nature's  gifts  profusely  bear. 
The  promise  of  the  ripening  year. 

Thus  bland  and  cheerful,  led  by  you, 
Let  us  our  varied  toils  pursue : 
Protect  us  summer's  heats  along. 
And  ere  rich  autumn  claims  the  song, 
(Waving  on  high  his  crops  of  gold) 
The  furze  clad  heath  to  us  unfold. 


IX 

The  moorland  and  the  mountain's  side, 
Where  numerous  packs  of  grouse  abide. 
Soon  as  the  harviest  rites  are  paid, 
And  safely  stor'd  its  grain  convey'd, 
Our  true  bred  pointers  to  the  mead, 
Or  thick  set  stubble  must  succeed  ; 
Where  (many  coveys  brooding  round) 
Eager  they  snuflf  the  tainted  ground ; 
And  catch  the  gales  that  may  convey 
Unto  their  scent  the  destined  prey. 
With  spaniels  let  us  next  repair. 
And  make  the  woodland  haunts  our  care, 
Whilst  pheasants  mount  on  whirring  wings, 
And  from  his  copse  the  woodcock  springs. 

Now  the  wide  forest's  lengthened  shade. 
Blithe  goddess,  let  our  steps  pervade, 
And  thence  the  Grampian  hills  survey, 
Renown'd  in  many  an  ancient  lay ; 
Whilst  feudal  chiefs  for  empire  sought, 
And  for  the  deers'  dominion  fought ; 
When  seldom  faiPd  the  bugle  horn 
To  rouse  with  valorous  deeds  the  morn : 
In  happier  days  where  peace  resorts 
And  Athol  courts  thee  to  his  sports. 

Then  to  the  uplands  guide  us  on, 
Or  outstretched  wolds  where  glory  won, 


In  many  a  noble  course  his  speed 
Snow-Ball  +  resigns  unto  his  breed; 
Hung  round  with  trophies  of  his  praise^ 
The  prizes  of  his  youthful  days ; 
His  palms  secure  now  yields  the  plain, 
But  dreams  his  conquests  o'er  again ; 
And  still  in  sleqp  (beyond  compare) 
Outstrips  the  field  and  turns  the  hare. 

Thus  joys  on  joys  pursue  their  lead 
Till  winter  comes,  whose  hoary  head, 
And  beard,  whence  icicles  depend, 
At  once  bid  rural  pleasures  end: 
The  honest  sportsman  will  forego 
To  track  the  hare  thro'  depths  of  snow  ; 
Or  cause  the  feather'd  race  to  bleed, 
Tho'  at  his  very  barns  they  feed ; 
But  lifting  up  his  grateful  voice 
To  him  who  bids  all  hearts  rejoice, 
Thanks  heaven  that  thro'  the  circling  year 
Thy  treasures  give  his  heart  to  cheer  ; 
To  sooth  him  'midst  the  winter's  gloom, 
And  bid  the  spring  his  sports  resume. 


t  One  of  the  beft  and  fleeteft  greyhounds  that  ever  run, 
belonging  to  Edward  Topham,  Efquire,  of  the  Wold-cot- 
tage, in  the  Eaft  Ridiug  of  York/hire,  and  his  breed  all 
moil  excellent* 


THE  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

OF  fish ^.... 1 

In  making  fish-ponds - ,  99 

Instructions  and  observations  on  angling 110 

Rules  for  making  flies. « 119 

Description   of  the  artificial  flies   proper  to 
angle  with  in  any  trout  stream  in  the  king. 

dom  -. »  145 

Instructions  for  fly-fishing , 172 

Rules  for  fishing,  and  other  observations. -«.  181 

Laws  as  to  angling,  &c. .  195 

Of  shooting,  coursing,  &c. ..  207 

Instructions  for   the    choice   of  gunpowder, 

shot,  wadding,  &c 216 

Instructions  for  shooting  well ...  227 

A    few   general   instructions    to    the  young 
sportsman,  for  his  conduct  in  the  pursuit 

of  game   234 

Instructions  for  training  pointers . 238 

Of  game 251 

How  to  train  a  water-dog,  and  the  use  thereof  289 

Of  the  forest  of  Blair 295 

Of  the  deer 300 

Of  coursing  with  greyhounds -  320 

Dogs'  diseases  remedied,  and  their  hurts  heal- 
ed, &c.  &c 332 

On  the  election  of  dogs  and  bitches  for  good 

whelps 342 

How  to  take  badgers,  f02.es,  &c.  by  train.  ««  344 


J  i^J^ii^  t 


THE 

JDRIFFIEI^D  ANGLER. 
PART    I. 

OF    FISH, 


CHAPTER    I. 

THE  SALMON. 

jL  HE  Salmon  is  justly  stiled  the  king  of 
fresh  water  fish,  and  has  different  names  ac- 
cording to  its  different  ages ;  those  that  are 
taken  in  the  rivers  Tay  and  Spay  in  Scotland^ 
and  the  Mersey  in  Cheshire,  tlie  first  year  are 
called  Smelts  ;  which  Smelts,  or  Fry,  leave 
these  rivers  towards  the  end  of  May,  and  are, 
then  about  three  ounces  each,  and  retun>  in 
August  and  September,  when  they  are  three 
or  four  pounds  weight.  In  the  second  year 
B 


8  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER., 

they  are  called  Sprods,  in  the  third  Morts,  in 
the  fourth  Fork-Tails,  in  the  fifth  half  Fish, 
and  in  the  sixth  year,  when  they  have  attained 
their  growtlij  are  thought  worthy  of  the  name 
of  Salmon:  their  greatest  magnitude  is 
much  the  same  in  all  parts  of  Europe,  the 
largest  weighing  from  tliirty  to  sixty  pounds. 
I  caught  one  when  angling  with  the  fly  at 
Castle-Menzies  in  the  year  1 765^  that  weigh- 
ed fifty-four  pounds  and  a  half. 

The  Salmon  is  a  beautiful  fish,  and  has 
50  many  excellent  qualities  that  it  is  every 
where  in  the  highest  esteem :  it  has  a  longish 
body  covered  with  small  thin  scales,  a  small 
head,  a  sharp  snout,  and  a  forked  tail,  the 
colour  on  the  back  is  bluish,  on  other  parts 
white  generally  intermixed  with  blackish  or 
reddish  spots  in  a  very  agreeable  manner :  the 
male  is  distinguished  from  the  female  by  a 
longer  and  hooked  nose,  his  scales  are  not  so 
bright,  and  his  body  is  speckled  over  with 
dark  brown  spots ;  his  belly  is  flatter,  his  flesh 
more  dry  and  not  so  red ;  the  excrescence 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  3 

which  grows  out  of  his  lower  jaw,  is  a  ho- 
ney or  gristly  substance  Uke  a  hawk's  beak, 
and  is  a  defence  provided  by  nature  against 
such  enemies  as  would  devour  the  spawn, 
(which  most  fish  search  after  with  eagerness) 
it  grows  to  the  length  of  about  two  inches, 
and  falls  off  when  he  returns  to  the  sea.  The 
teeth  of  this  fish  are  but  small  in  proportion 
to  the  body ;  its  gills  are  quadruple,  with  a 
broad  cover  full  of  red  spots  the  same  as  the 
sides,  and  dusky  towards  the  back  ;  the  flesh 
is  red  if  in  season,  and  is  sweet,  tender,  flaky^ 
and  luscious,  and  of  excellent  flavour.  Those 
who  pretend  to  the  best  judgment  insist,  that 
the  Salmon  cannot  be  too  soon  brought  on  the 
table  after  it  is  caught,  and  whilst  the  flakes 
are  curdled  with  fat;  whilst  others  contend  it 
ought  to  be  kept  a  few  days  before  it  is  dress- 
ed. About  the  time  of  spawning  its  taste  is 
more  insipid,  and  it  loses  its  lively  colour, 
insomuch  that,  when  quite  out  of  season,  the 
fish  appears  almost  of  a  different  species,  and 
are  then  called  Kippers.  The  Scaggers,  or 
young  Fry,  called  in  some  countries  Salmon- 
B  2 


4  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEK; 

Smelts,  leave  those  rivers  as  before  mention- 
ed, and  all  other  rivers  in  May  and  June. 

Sahnon  choose  the  rivers  for  their  abode 
about  seven  months  in  the  year ;  they  gene- 
rally begin  to  enter  the  fresh  water  in  Janu- 
ary, and  sometimes  even  in  December,  and 
abound  in  February  and  March ;  where  they 
continue  till  the  autumnal  season,  at  which 
time  they  cast  their  spawn,  and  soon  after  re- 
turn to  the  sea.  But  directly  the  contrary  is 
reported  of  the  river  Ex  in  Devonshire,  and 
the  Wye  and  Uske  in  Monmouthshire,  where 
it  is  said  they  are  in  season  during  the  other 
six  months ;  and  what  is  more  remarkable, 
(if  true)  they  never  frequent  the  Wye  and 
Uske  in  the  same  year  ;  for  when  the  fish  are 
found  in  one  of  those  rivers  they  are  wanted 
in  the  other,  which  is  probably  the  case  in 
other  parts  of  the  kingdom ;  however  this  may 
be,  it  is  certain  that  the  salt  water  wonderfully 
promotes  their  growth,  and  the  fresh  chiefly 
contributes  to  make  them  fat. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  5 

At  spawning  time  the  female  seeks  a  pro- 
per place  in  a  gravelly  bottom,  where  she  is^ 
observed  to  work  with  her  whole  body  till  she 
has  formed  a  bed  of  the  same  dimensions 
of  herself,  into  which  she  discharges  her 
spawn  and  retires ;  then  the  male,  or  milter, 
advances  and  covers  the  spawn  with  his  belly, 
emitting  at  the  same  time  a  whitish  fluid  like 
milk :  this  is  no  sooner  done  but  the  female 
returns  to  the  male,  when  they  use  their  joint 
endeavours  to  cover  their  brood  with  the  gra- 
vel, in  which  they  work  with  their  noses. — 
They  then  return  to  the  deeps  to  recover  their 
strength,  which  they  do  in  about  a  month. 
At  this  time  the  fish  are  of  small  value,  but 
to  prevent  their  being  destroyed,  the  law  in- 
flicts  a  penalt}^  on  those  that  kill  Salmon  be- 
tween the  nth  of  August  and  the  23rd  of 
November. 

There  is  nothing  relating  to  this  fish  which 
has  been  more  talked  of,  than  its  agility  in  leap- 
ing over  any  obstacle  which  opposes  its  pas- 
sage either  to  or  from  the  sea.   They  are  fre* 
B  5 


0  THK    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

quently  seen  to  throw  themselves  up  cataracts 
and  precipices  from  ten  to  fifteen  feet  high; 
making  at  times  several  essays  before  they  can 
gain  their  point,  and  when  they  have  so  done, 
it  is  often  to  their  own  destruction,  by  leaping 
into  baskets  and  nets  placed  on  purpose  to 
catch  them. 

There  is  a  remarkable  cataract  in  the  river 
Gaerey,  in  the  pass  of  Gillicrankey,  in  Athol, 
Perthshire,  and  one  much  of  the  same  kind 
on  the  river. Tumble,  within  five  miles  of  the 
former  :  there  is  another  at  Old  Aberdeen  in 
Scotland,  and  another  at  Keith,  near  Blair- 
Drummond,  where  sueh  quantities  of  Salmon 
have  been  caught  that  they  constitute  the 
chief  traffic  of  the  place.  I  have  heard  of  a 
cataract  on  the  river  Tivy,  in  Pembrokeshire, 
so  high,  that  people  stand  wondering  at  the 
strength  and  sleight  used  by  the  fish  to  get  out 
of  the  sea  into  the  river.  On  the  river  Wear 
near  Durham  is  another,  but  not  so  high  as 
any  of  the  former.  When  their  passage  to 
the  sea  is  intercepted  by  weirs,  or  any  other 


THE    DRIFPIEXD    ANGLER.  7 

contrivance,  they  soon  grow  sickly,  lean  and 
languid,  and  in  the  second  year  pine  away 
and  die. 

It  is  worth  observation,  that  the  Salmon  is 
not  only  desirous  of  returning  back  to  tlie  ri- 
vers, but  that  very  river  where  it  was  spawn- 
ed ;  as  is  evident  from  experiments  made  by 
fishermen  on  the  river  Tay,  who  have  caught 
them  when  very  small,  and  have  run  a  small 
brass  wire  through  the  tail  fm,  by  which  mark 
they  have  been  certain  that  they  have  taken  the 
same  fish  at  the  same  place  as  they  returned 
from  the  sea ;  by  this  means  they  have  like- 
wise discovered  that  the  Salmon  is  of  very 
quick  growth;  and  much  more  so  than  any 
other  fish. 

The  chief  rivers  in  England  that  yield  this 
excellent  fish,  are  the  Thames,  Severn,  Mer- 
sey, Trent,  Medway,  Dee,  Ex,  Uske,  Wye, 
Don,  Tyne,  W  orkington,  and  Tweed ;  how- 
ever the  London  markets  are  supplied  soonest 
from  the  North,    where  they  are  not  only 


k 


8  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

more  plentiful,  but  earlier  in  season  than 
those  in  the  southern  rivers. 

Thus  having  given  a  general  account  of  the 
nature  of  this  noble  fish,  I  shall  now  proceed 
to  the  method  of  taking  him  with  the  angle, 
and  referring  the  reader  for  the  description 
of  his  rod  and  the  manner  of  making  artifici- 
al flies ;  (see  instructions  and  observations 
under  that  head)  I  shall  only  remark  in  this 
place,  that  every  part  of  his  apparatus  must 
be  proportionably  larger  than  for  Trout; 
the  rod  at  least  eighteen  feet  long,  with  a 
reel  or  winch  capable  of  containing  from  one 
hundred  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  of 
line  ;  for  a  large  fish,  when  first  struck,  will 
sometimes  run  out  an  immense  length  with 
ihcredible  swiftness,  and  however  you  may 
depend  on  the  goodness  of  your  tackle,  if 
you  be  not  also  prepared  with  your  heels  to 
follow  and  keep  him  in  proper  play,  he  will 
very  often  break  your  line. 

And  here  let  me  remark  that  •the  Salmon 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  9 

does  not  lie  long  in  a  place,  but  seems  desi- 
rous of  getting  still  nearer  the  head  of  the 
spring;  he  does  not  lie  near  the  bank  side, 
nor  under  the  roots  of  trees,  but  swims  in  the 
deep  and  broad  parts  of  the  water,  generally 
in  the  middle,  and  near  the  ground.  But  the 
Salmon-Smelts  commonly  lie  in  shallow  and 
rapid  parts  of  the  stream,  and  always  near 
the  middle. 

The  most  alluring  bait  for  the  Salmon  in 
almost  all  the  rivers  in  Scotland,  is  four  or 
five  raw  Cockles,  or  Muscles,  fresh  taken  out 
of  the  shell;  with  this  they  fish  at  bottom, 
using  a  small  running  bullet,  when  the  tide 
flows  into  the  fresh  water :  this  method  is 
practised  with  success — let  the  Cockle  fall  in- 
to a  shallow  from  which  there  is  a  gradual 
descent  into  a  deep  hole,  you  will  generally 
be  sure  of  sport :  other  usual  baits  are  lob- 
worms, small  Dace,  Gudgeons,  Minnows, 
or  two  well  scoured  dew-worms;  which 
should  be  often  varied,  in  order  to  suit  the 
humour  of  this  fickle  fish,  for  what  he  likes 


10  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER* 

one  day  he  will  despise  the  next,  which  it  must 
be  owned  is  a  very  mortifying  circumstance 
to  an  angler.  But  what  often  exercises  his 
patience  is  to  see  the  fish  sporting  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  and  not  be  able  to  tempt 
him  with  any  of  his  baits  :  however  he  gene- 
rally bites  best  from  six  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing till  nine,  and  from  three  to  eight  in  the 
evening  through  the  months  of  May,  June, 
July,  and  August,  especially  if  the  water  hap- 
pens to  be  clear,  and  is  stirred  by  a  good 
breeze  of  wind ;  and  there  will  be  still  greater 
likelihood  of  success  if  the  wind  and  stream 
set  contrary  ways. 

I  shall  here  notice  one  particular  fly  which 
they  are  remarkably  fond  of,  called  the  horse- 
leech fly,  which  although  a  native  of  the  lat- 
ter months  they  will  take  the  resemblance  of 
it  early  in  the  spring ;  they  are  of  various 
colours,  have  great  heads,  large  bodies,  very 
long  tails,  and  two  pair  of  wings  placed  be- 
hind each  other  :  in  preparing  the  artificial 
ones,  however,  you  may  vary  the  colours  ; 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  11 

whip  the  body  about  with  gold  or  silver  twist, 
and  do  the  same  by  the  head,  remembering 
the  hook  must  be  very  strong  and  large ; 
with  this  fly,  fish  at  length  as  for  Trout,  &c. 
See  a  more  mmute  description  of  this  fly  in 
the  twelfth  chapter. 

But  although  this  method  of  angling  be  far 
more  agreeable  than  any  other,  yet  as  the  fish 
are  not  often  in  the  humour  to  rise  at  a  fly, 
I  would  advise  you  to  be  always  provided 
with  some  well  scoured  lob-w  orms,  as  I  have 
found  this  bait  very  successful  in  fishing  at 
the  bottom :  for  this  purpose  let  your  hook 
be  large,  and  tied  upon  small  gimp,  or  three 
strands  of  silk-worm  gut  twisted  together ; 
for  though  a  Salmon  when  struck,  seldom  or 
never  attempts  to  bite  the  line,  yet  as  you 
will  be  obliged  to  play  with  him  some  time,  it 
must  rake  against  his  teeth,  for  without  this 
precaution  you  will  be  in  great  danger  of 
losing  your  prize. 

Whenever  you  see  a  Salmon  leap  out  of 
-the  water,  you  may  conclude  there  is  a  deep 


12  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

hole,  or  large  stones,  not  far  off;  and  if  the 
river  be  too  broad  for  you  to  throw  a  fly,  or 
the  wind  hinders  you,  then  lay  your  ledger- 
bait  as  near  the  hole  as  you  can,  as  he  always 
chooses  such  places  for  his  retirement;  if  you 
bait  with  a  Minnow,  Dace,  Gudgeon,  &c. 
and  cannot  reach  with  trolling,  put  on  your 
baits  alive,  by  hanging  the  hook  through  the 
iipper  jaw,  or  back  fin,  and  with  a  large  cork- 
float,  let  them  swim  down  about  mid-water 
into  the  deep. 

For  the  Salmon-fry,  or  Scagger,  the  pro- 
perest  baits  are  ant-flies,  brandlings,  red 
worms,  gentles,  black  and  dew  gnats,  all- 
coloured  small  hackles,  and  dubbed  flies, 
according  to  the  season  :  when  they  rise  at 
the  fly,  and  a  little  before  they  leave  the  ri- 
ver, they  usually  get  in  large  shoals,  where 
you  will  see  twenty  or  thirty  rise  at  a  time : 
if  you  meet  with  a  shoal,  you  may  use  three 
hooks  on  one  line,  tied  to  single  hairs,  or  very 
fine  gut,  and  as  they  rise  very  freely,  you 
will  be  sure  of  excellent  diversion* 


THE    DRIFFIELD.  ANGLER.  13 

The  chief  Sahnon- fisheries  are  along  the 
coasts  of  England,  Scotland,  and  Ireland, — ■ 
The  fishing  begins  about  the  first  of  January, 
and  ends  the  eleventh  of  August ;  it  is  per- 
formed with  nets,  in  places  where  the  rivers 
empty  themselves  into  the  sea,  and  along  the 
sea-coast  thereabouts,  because  these  fish  are 
seen  to  crowd  thither  from  all  parts  in  search 
of  fresh  water  :  they  also  fish  for  them  high- 
er up  in  the  rivers,  sometimes  wdth  nets, 
and  sometimes  with  locks,  or  weirs,  made 
for  that  purpose  with  gates,  w^hich  are  so 
contrived,  that  the  fish  in  passing  up  the  ri- 
ver can  open  them  with  their  heads,  but  they 
are  no  sooner  entered  than  the  gate  claps  to 
and  prevents  their  return ;  thus  the  Salmon 
are  inclosed  as  in  a  reservoir,  from  whence  it 
is  easy  to  take  them  with  a  click-hook. 

In  some  rivers  in  Scotland  they  fish  for 
Salmon  in  the  night-time,  by  the  light  of  tor- 
ches or  kindled  straw,  which  the  fish  mistak- 
ing for  day-light,  make  towards  and  are 
struck  with  the  spear,  or  click-hook :  it  is 
C 


14  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

also  very  common  to  dart  Salmon  as  they 
are  endeavouring  to  get  over  tlie  weirs. 

When  the  fish  are  caught,  they  open  them, 
take  out  the  guts  and  gills,  and  salt  them 
in  large  tubs  made  for  that  purpose  ;  out  of 
which  they  are  taken  before  October,  when 
they  are  packed  up  in  cases  from  four  hun-^ 
dred  and  fifty  to  five  hundred  pounds  weight, 
and  sent  to  the  London  market. 

Salmon  spawn  is  a  very  good  bait  for 
Trout.  The  common  way  of  using  it  is  to> 
take  the  spaw^n  and  boil  it  so  hard  as  to  stick 
on  tlie  hook,  though  many  people  use  it 
without  boiling ;  others  put  a  great  quantity 
of  salt  to  their  spawn,  and  hang  it  in  a  li- 
nen bag,  in  the  kitchen,  far  from  the  fire, 
and  they  steep  it  the  night  before  it  is  used, 
in  rum,  brandy,  or  geneva,  which  will  give 
it  a  lovely  colour  ;  it  is  the  best  ground  bait 
I  know  for  Trout,  Chub,  &c.  early  in  the 
springs  especially  if  used  near  those  [)kces 
where  Salmon  are  accustomed  to  spawn, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  1$ 

for  thither  the  fish  will  come  ia  expectation 
of  it. 


Another  method  of  preparing,  and  pre- 
serving the  roe  (and  the  best  of  any)  is,  aftei^ 
boiling  it,  to  take  a  glazed  earthen  pot,  and 
sprinkling  a  little  salt  over  the  roe>  put  a 
layer  of  very  fine  wool  at  the  bottom  of  the 
pot,  as  thin  as  possible,  and  then  a  layer  of 
the  roe,  and  so  on  till  the  pot  is  filled :  it  is 
an  excellent  bait,  and  by  these  means  will  be 
preserved  both  for  winter  and  spring  fishing* 
The  night  before  you  use  it,  steep  it  in  rum, 
brandy,  &c. 

Would  fortune  give,  to  close  my  earthly  race 
By  Tay's  or  Tumble's  banks,  a  dwelling-plat^, 
Where  I  might  stray  beside  the  river's  brink. 
And  throw  my  line  for  Salmon,  Trout,   or 

Pink } 
Such  luxury  I  prize,  such  blest  estate, 
Nor  count  the  real,  or  the  seeming  great. 


C  2 


l6  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

There  let  me  range,  where  towVing  to  the 

skies, 
High  mountains  o'er  the  plains  are  seen  to 

rise ; 
The  rivers  clearing  each  opposing  mound 
That  bars  their  passage,  thro'  the  level  ground, 
To  reach  the  distant  main,  whereon  to  look 
Affords  this  lesson  drawn  from  Reason's  book : 
''^  As  constant  flowing  streams  thy  waves  sup- 
ply, 
''  So  rolls  all  nature  thro'  eternity ; 
'*  From  thee  they  draw  their  source,  thy  tem- 
pests rise, 
**  And  fill  the  lofty  sluices  of  the  skies ; 
'MVhence  powerful  rains,   or  gentle  dews 

descend, 
**  Which  still  towards  their  native  centre 
tend." 

Thus  would  I  pass  in  peaceful  sport  my 
days, 
Attentive  to  my  great  Creator's  praise  ; 
That  life  he  gave,  with  cheerfulness  resign. 
And  hope  at  length  in  heavenly  bliss  to  join. 


THE    DRJFFIELD    ANGLER.  1/ 

CHAPTER    IIv 

THE    TROUT. 

jFjFJE  Tr<M4^  may  be  deemed  the  monarch- 
of  the  beek^,  or  rivulets,  and  small  breoks, 
as  the  Salmoii^  fe' of  the  larger  rivers.  This 
feh  i^  of  a  longish  make,  and  resembles  a 
Salmon  more  than  any  other  of  its  species : 
the  head  is  short  and  roundish,  the  nose 
W««%  the  body  thick,,  and  the  tail  broad  ; 
^e  mouth  is  wide,  and  it  haa  teeth  not  only 
iu^itiie  jaws,  but  in  the  palate  and  tongue. 

'Front'  generally  take  delight  in  the  cooler' 
and'  smaller  rivers,  which  descend  from  hills, 
and  rocky  mountains,  and  they  seem  to  take 
a'  pleasure  in  striving  against  the  stream ; 
it'is^  really  wonderful  to  see  with  what  force 
and  agility  they  will  surmount  all  difficulties 
in  travelling  towards  the  source  of  rivers>  tet 

C  3 


18  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

the  ascent  be  ever  so  rapid  :  and  several  au- 
thors tell  us,  that  they  are  found  among  the 
Alps,  in  waters  so  very  cold,  that  no  other 
fish  can  live  therein. 

Their  time  of  spawning  is  in  the  latter  end 
of  October,  November,  and  part  of  Decem- 
ber, when  they  dig  holes  in  gravelly  or  stony 
places,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  Salmon, 
and  deposit  their  spawn  therein ;  but  they 
are  not  in  season  when  full  of  spawn,  for 
they  are  fattest,  and  have  the  most  delicious 
taste  in  June,  July,  and  August;  however, 
they  begin  to  be  in  season  in  April,  and  are 
sooner  so  in  some  rivers  than  others ;  the 
reason  is  hard  to  guess,  for  there  are  variety 
of  small  fish  in  every  river  frequented  by  the 
Trout.  In  the  winter-time  they  are  sickly, 
lean,  and  unwholesome,  breeding  a  kind  of 
w^onn,  with  a  large  head,  w  hich  is  not  unlike 
a  clove  in  shape ;  they  then  appear  to  have 
heads  of  a  larger  size  than  ordinary,  their 
beautiful  spots  disappear,  and  the  lively  co- 
lour of  the  belly  becomes  of  a  dusky  and  dis- 
agreeable hue ;  but  towards  the  latter  end  of 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  IQ 

March,  when  the  sun,  with  genial  warmth, 
begins  to  invigorate  the  earth,  they  then 
make  a  show  of  some  spirit;  and,  rousing  as 
it  were  from  a  sort  of  lethargy,  forsake  the 
deep  still  waters  for  the  more  rapid  streams, 
where  they  rub  off  their  foes  against  the 
gravelly  bottom,  and  soon  after  recover  their 
former  strength  and  vigour.  The  flesh  is  a 
little  drier,  and  not  so  luscious  as  that  of  a 
Salmon  ;  however  it  is  esteemed  the  most 
agreeable  of  all  fish  that  make  their  constant 
abode  in  fresh  water. 

There  are  several  kinds  of  Trout,  but  the 
most  valuable  are  those  of  a  red  or  yellow 
colour ;  and  of  these,  the  female  is  prefer- 
able, she  is  known  by  a  lesser  head,  and  a 
deeper  body  than  that  of  the  male. 

This  fish,  as  before  observed,  delights  in 
the  swiftest  streams  ;  in  spring  at  the  tail,  in 
May  they  keep  the  upper  end,  and  through 
the  summer  they  love  to  frequent  shallows, 
or  the  aprons,  or  tails  of  mills;   they  are 


k 


particularly  fond,  of  a  hole  covered  witlf 
boughSj  and  where  the  roots  shoot  down  to 
the  waters  edge,  if  they  can  find  a  good 
hotd  ;  in  such  places  you  may  find  the  largest 
Trout.  VFhen  they  watch  for  their  prey,, 
tteey  generally  shelter  themselves  under 
a  bank,  or  a  large  stone,  or  in  weeds^, 
where  they  are  often  seen  lurking,  entirely 
covered  except  their  heads;  when  they  are 
cfiscovered  in  this  situation,  go  a  little  up  the 
sti^eam,  and  with  great  care  and  caution 
muddy  the  water,  putting  in  your  bait  im» 
mediately  to  the  troubled  place,  then  keeping 
yourself  as  far  from  the  bank  as  you  can,  to 
be  out  of  sight,  follow  your  float  and  expect 
success  ;  but  I  thinii  it  much  better  to  angle 
without  a  float. 

The  usual  baits  for  Trout,  are  minnows, 
flies,  (either  natural  or  artificial)  worms, 
grubs,  gentles,  cadisses,  &c.  The  proper 
worms  are,  the  brandling,  lob-worm,  dung- 
worm,  &c.  but  especially  the  two  first ;  yet, 
indeed,   for   bottom^-fishino:,    the   lob-worm 


TH£    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  21 

is  preferable,  and  more  generally  used.  Sal- 
mon*-spawn  is  also  an  excellent  bait  in  the 
spring,  as  I  noticed  before. 

There  are  two  methods  of  fishing  with  the 
minnow  for  Trout,   one  of  w^hich  is  called 
the  spinning-minnow;  the  simplest  way  of 
putting  this  on,  is  with  a  large  plain  hook, 
No.  6,    (Salmon-hook)  pretty  long  in   the 
shank ;   draw   your  hook   first  through  the 
mouth   of  the  minnow  and  out  at  the  gill, 
then  turning  it   again  through  the  mouth, 
bring  the  point  of  the  hook  all  the  w^ay  down 
the  side,   rather  nearest  the  belly,  and  quite 
to  the  fork,  drawing  out  the  point  at  the  tail, 
and  leaving  it  somewhat  on  a 'curve,    which 
will  make  it  spin  the  better ;  for  this  purpose 
use  the  strongest  gut  you  can  procure,    of 
which  you  should  have,    at  least,    a  yard  a- 
bove  your  hook  ;   two  swivels  will  also  assist 
the  minnow  in  spinning,     though  one  may 
do  ;  and  I  would  recommend  about  an  inch 
and  an  half  of  strong  silk,  whipped  at  the 
bottom  of  the  gut,  to  fasten  your  hook  on, 


22  THE    DKIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

which  will  make  it  turn  round  much  easier 
in  the  minnow's  mouth,  the  strong  gut  be- 
ing too  stiff  for  that  purpose:  you  must 
have  a  shot  or  two,  of  a  large  size,  on  your 
gut  Une,  to  prevent  the  bait  from  drawing 
too  high,  but  this  will  only  answer  in  sharp 
streams,  of  a  ruffling  wind. 

The  other  may  be  properly  called  fishing 
with  the  trolling  minnow,  and  is  by  far  the 
most  killing  way,  at  least  I  have  found  it  so 
in  all  the  rivers  and  streams  within  my  know- 
ledge, though  I  am  told  the  spinning-min- 
now is  chiefly  used  in  the  south  of  England. 
I  shall  now  describe  the  trolling  method. 

Take  three  hooks,  (No.  5  or  6)  and  a 
good,  round,  and  even  silk-worm  gut,  with 
half  a  yard  of  small  silk,  well  waxed,  wrap^ 
one  of  the  hooks  neatly,  the  same  as  for  a 
worm,  then  lay  the  other  two  hooks  back  to 
back,  and  place  tlie  hook  you  have  wrapped 
with  its  back  to  the  otliers;  wrap  all  three 
together,  tight  and  neatly  up  to  the  top,  mak- 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLERs,  25 

ing  twa  or  three  nooses,  covering  the  top 
G-f  the  hooks  with  your  silk  and  \vax,  make  a 
toop  on  the  length  of  gut,  witliout  a  knot, 
wrapping  it  neatly  and  as  fast  as  yoti  eaa : 
you  must  also  have  a  small  lead  made  in  the 
shape  of  an  egg,  with  a  hole  through  it,  it 
must  be  no  larger  than  the  minnow's  mouth 
will  contain  ;  when  you  bait,  take  a  middle- 
sized  minnow,  put  the  loop  of  the  gut  through 
the  eye  of  a  large  darning  needle,  then  put 
the  needle  in  at  the  vent,  and  as  even  asyoui^ 
can  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  minnow  ;  after- 
wards run  your  lead  down  the  link  of  gut;, 
putting  it  neatly  into  the  minnow's  mouth ; 
thread  your  needle  again,  put  it  through  the 
under  and  upper  lip,  and  draw  the  gut  up 
tight,  the  lead  will  be  sewed  up,  and  not  to 
be  seen ;  have  a  large  loop  at  the  end  of 
your  swivel-line^  which  should  be  two  yards 
long,  that  will  admit  of  the  minnow  going 
tlirough  every  time  you  bait ;  or  you.  may 
have  a  fine  spring  swivel  to  hang  it  on,  the 
same  as  for  Pike,  which  will  be  the  least 
trouble.     When  you  fish,  this  way,  thraw  \his 


S4  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

minnow  across  the  stream,  or  rather  up- 
ward, let  it  sink  to  mid-water,  or  a  little 
more,  before  you  begin  to  draw  it  across ;  do 
not  draw  too  quick  till  it  comes  near  the  side, 
then  turn  the  rod  against  the  stream  and 
draw  smartly,  by  which  means  the  bait  will 
spin  like  lightning,  and  cannot  be  discovered 
from  a  live  minnow. 

When  you  fish  with  worms,  let  your  hook 
be  large,  (No.  3  or  4)  with  about  a  yard  of 
gut  below  your  reel-line,  and  put  two  worms 
on  in  the  following  manner  ;  the  first  on  the 
hook  with  the  head  foremost,  and  then  slip- 
ping it  a  little  up  the  line  to  make  room,  put 
the  other  on  with  the  tail  foremost,  after 
which,  draw  the  first  down  to  it  so  close  that 
they  may  seem  to  be  knotting,  or  engender- 
ing, for  they  often  perform  this  naturally  on 
the  banks  of  rivers,  and  sometimes  fall  into 
the  water,  where  they  become  a  prey  to  hun- 
gry fish :  the  tails  of  mill-pools,  and  deep 
holes,  are  the  best  for  this  kind  of  diversion, 
and  after  rain,  when  the  water  is  discoloured, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    AXGLER.  25 

you  may  fish  all  down  the  sides  of  the  banks, 
taking  care  to  keep  your  worms  a  little  off 
the  ground  that  they  may  glide  down  the 
easier,  and  by  this  method  you  wall  catch  fish 
when  they  are  not  to  be  obtained  by  any 
other  means :  put  two  or  three  shot  upon 
your  line  to  make  it  sink  properly  ;  and  in 
places  where  you  suspect  there  may  lie  any 
large  Pike,  I  w^ould  advise  you  to  use  a  large 
hook  tied  upon  small  white  gimp,  that  he 
cannot  bite  off,  and  which  he  would  infallibly 
do  with  the  gut.  The  lob-w^orm  is  also  an 
excellent  bait  early  in  the  morning,  at  twi- 
light, in  the  dusk  of  the  evening,  or  even  in 
the  night  when  it  is  dark  ;  in  this  case,  you 
must  have  no  lead  on  your  line,  but  throw 
your  bait  as  gently  as  you  can  across  the 
stream,  and  draw  it  softly  to  you  on  the  top 
of  the  water  ;  this  is  the  E^st  method  to  catch 
the  oldest  and  largest  Trouts,  for  they  are 
very  fearful  and  shy  in  the  day-time,  but  in 
the  night  they  are  bold  and  undaunted,  and 
generally  lie  near  the  top  of  the  water  in  exr 
pectation  of  meeting  with  food ;  for  if  they 
D 


26  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLETl. 

see  any  thing  in  motion,  let  it  be  what  it 
will,  they  certainly  follow  if  it  moves  gently 
along.  But  this  kind  of  sport  is  only  to 
be  had  in  very  warm  nights,  and  chiefly  ia 
deep  smooth  waters.  Remember  always  to 
put  two  large  lob-worms  on  your  hook,  in 
the  manner  before  described. 

At  water-clearing,  (as  mentioned  before) 
after  a  flood,  or  in  dark,  cloudy,  and  gloomy 
weather,  when  it  is  windy,  are  the  most  fa- 
vourable times  for  worm  fishing,  in  the 
months  of  March  and  April,  and  the  latter 
end  of  August,  September,  and  October ;  but 
in  hot  months,  the  warmest  sun-shine,  and 
the*middle  of  the  day,  is  the  best. 

N.  B.  Fly-fishing  I  shall  treat  of  more  at 
large  in  a  future  chapter. 

I  have  angled  in  many  parts  of  Scotland, 
and  the  north  of  England,  but  of  all  the  places 
on  this  side  of  Great-Britain,  most  delight- 
ful for  this  charming  recreation,  I  must  prefer 
the  river  at  Driffield.     It  is  fed  by  several 


THE    DRlFfelULD    ANGLER.  27 

small  rivulets,  or  becks,  rising  at  Ivirkburn, 
Emswell,  and  Little-Driffield,  which  falling 
into  one  large  stream  just  below  the  town  of 
Great-Driffield,  is  called  the  west  beck ;  and 
about  three  miles  below,  at.  Wansford,  it  is 
jpined  by  a  small  stream  from  NafFerton ; 
and  two  miles  lower  still,  at  Emmorland- 
Stakes,  by  that  of  Lowthorpe,  from  which, 
place  it  takes  the  name  of  the  river  Hull. 

The  lords  of  the  different  manors  are,  on 
the  north-east  side,  Richard  Langley,  Esquire, 
Wykeham-Abbey,  and  Sir  Mark  Sykes,  Ba- 
ronet, Sledmere ;  on  the  south-west  side,. 
Richard  Arkwright,  Esquire,  Croomford^ 
Derbyshire,  and  Sir  Charles  Hotham,  Ba^- 
ronet.  Souths  Dal  ton ;  to  whom  it  ia  neces- 
sary to  make  application  for  the  liberty  o£ 
angling,,  whiclifor  gentlemen,  and.  fair  aports- 
meiij  will  not  be  very  difficult  to  obtain  ;  and 
iaid^ed  nothing, caxi  more  contribute  tO'  pre- 
vent the  depredations  of  poachers,  than  a 
aumber  of  peraoas,  in  the  fishing  season,  mov- 
ing about  ill  various  directions  near  every 
D2 


28  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

part  of  the  stream,  by  some  of  whom  they 
must  be  detected  in  their  hides  and  lurking- 
places.  All  the  rivers  or  becks  abound  with 
Trout  of  the  finest  flavour,  and  largest  size ; 
and  it  is  reckoned  unfair  to  kill  a  fish  under  the 
weight  of  a  pound,  many  being  caught  from 
two  to  six  pounds,  and  sometimes  even  of 
nine  or  ten  pounds  weight.  The  streams  roll 
through  the  finest  meadows,  and  there  are 
no  trees  or  bushes  to  intercept  the  sports- 
man's diversion ;  but  the  country  round,  par- 
ticularly near  Driffield,  is  beautifully  diversi- 
fied with  picturesque  views  of  hills,  dales, 
and  woodlands,  and  all  the  walks  about  the 
town  are  remarkably  pleasant ;  besides  there 
is  a  navigation-cut,  beginning  at  Driffield, 
which  is  also  well  filled  with  Trout ;  and,  a 
mile  or  two  below  Wansford,  w^ith  numbers 
of  large  Pike  and  Perch,  affording  in  their 
turns  much  amusement :  there  are  also  great 
numbers  of  Eels,  Roach,  Gudgeons,  &c.  and 
in  all  the  streams  innumerable  shoals  of 
minnows  that  feed  and  fatten  the  Trout.  In 
the  church  at  Little-Driffield,   about  a  mile 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  29 

distant,  lie  the  remains  of  Alfred,  one  of  the 
kings  of  Northumberland  during  the  Saxon 
Heptarchy.  Great-Driffield  is  besides  ad- 
mirably situated  for  hunting,  hawking,  cours- 
ing, and  other  field  sports^  from  the  very 
extensive  wolds  lying  behind  the  town. 

There  are  several  good  inns  at  Great- 
Driffield,  and  also  a.  large  room  built  by 
the  gentlemen  of  the  hunt  for  their  own  use, 
left  in  the  care  of  the  master  of  the  Red-Lion; 
their  meetings  for  the  season  begin  in  Octo- 
ber, and  end  in  February,  lasting  a  week 
each  time;  there  arc  several  packs  of 
hounds  in  the  neighbourhood. — N.  B.  There 
is  likewise  an  inn  erected  by  the  late  Sir 
Christopher  Sykes,  Baronet,  at  the  town  of 
of  VV^ansford,  the  sign  of  the  Trout,  a  plea- 
sant situation,  where  gentlemen-anglers  may 
be  accommodated  with  good  beds,  and  o"6od 
stabling;,  &c.  &c.  &c. 


DS 


30  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 


CHAPTER    III. 


GRAYLING,  or  UMBER. 

il  HE  Grayling  is  in  proportion  neither  so 
broad  nor  so  thick  as  a  Trout,  and  in  size  sel- 
dom exceeds  from  fifteen  to  eighteen  inches : 
I  have  taken  them  from  half  a  pound  to  two 
pounds,  in  several  parts  of  Yorkshire.  They 
delight  in  rivers  that  glide  through  mountain- 
ous places,  and  are  to  be  met  with  in  the 
clearest  and  swiftest  of  those  streams  :  this 
fish  may  be  eaten  all  the  year,  but  its  princi- 
pal season  is  November  and  December,  at 
which  time  its  gills,  and  the  list  that  runs 
down  its  back,  are  all  black.  The  time  of 
its  spawning  is  in  May  :  it  is  accounted  by 
some  the  most  delicious  of  all  river  fish  ;  the 
flesh  is  white  and  firm,  in  flakes  like  a  Sal- 
mon, and  is  esteemed  very  wholesome  :  it  is 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  31 

a  brisk  sprightly  fish  when  in  the  water,  and 
remarkably  swift^  but  when  he  feels  the  hook 
he  is  dead-hearted,  and  yields  rather  too 
soon  to  afford  the  angler  much  diversion : 
he  feeds  upon  flies,  grasshoppers,  worms, 
and  such  like  insects  ;  therefore  these  sort 
of  baits  must  always  be  used  for  him ;  but  a 
well-scoured  red  worm  is  preferable  to  any 
other  bait,  if  used  about  two  inches  from 
the  bottom. 

The  same  rules  that  have  been  laid  down  for 
taking  the  Trout,  will  also  serve  for  the  Gray- 
ling, only  let  your  tackle  be  somewhat  finer : 
some  anglers  when  they  make  use  of  a  fly, 
fasten  their  hooks  to  two  or  three  hairs 
twisted,  but  the  smallest  and  finest  silk- 
worm gut  is  far  preferable. 

The  Grayling  has  so  quick  an  eye,  that  he 
has  been  known  to  take  the  bait  four  inches 
or  more  out  of  the  water,  when  the  sports- 
man has  been  angling  for  him  standing  on  a 
bank  or  bridge.    You  may  observe  also  that 


S2  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

he  is  a  rnuGh  simpler  fish  than  a  Trout,  for 
if  you  miss  him  ten  times,  he  will  still  conti- 
nu€  to-  rise  at  your  fly,  and  this  being  Im 
peculiar  property,  that  hie  is-  more  apt  to* 
rise  than  descend,  your  bait  should  never 
drag  on  the  ground,  but  be  three  or  four 
inches  from  the  bottom,  and  for  the  same 
reason  it  will  be  more  proper  to  use  a  float 
than  a  running  line ;  but  should,  you  use  the 
latter,  the  best  ground-baits  are  brandlings, 
gilt-tails,  tag-tails,  meadow-worms  well 
scoured,  cod- bait,  bark-worm,  and  flag- 
worm  ;  and  at  the  top  he  may  be  taken  with 
either  natural  or  artificial  flieSj  or  with  the 
earth-bob,  or  clap-bait. 

The  bull-trout,  SALMON-TROUT, 
SALxMON-PEAL,  ok  SCURF. 

These  are  all  different;  names  for  the  same 
fish)  in  some  places  it  grows  to  the  length  of 
twenty-four  inches,  in  others  it  seldom  ex- 
ceeds sixteen  or  eighteen.  1  have  caught 
them  weighing  from  ten  to  fourteen  pounds. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  3$ 

This  fish  differs  in  shape  from  a  Sahnon  in 
not  having  a  forked  tail ;  its  head  is  shorter, 
and  its  body  adorned  with  a  variety  of  spots, 
the  flesh  is  not  so  red,  and  the  taste  more 
strong  and  rank. 

About  the  beginning  of  May  they  enter 
the  rivers ;  where  they  delight  in  deep  holes, 
and  commonly  shelter  themselves  under  the 
roots  of  trees,  generally  choosing  that  side 
next  the  stream,  the  more  readily  to  catch 
their  food.  They  will  rise  keen  at  the  ar- 
tificial fly,  like  a  Salmon ;  but  the  best  baits 
for  them  are  well-scoured  brandlings,  espe- 
cially those  that  breed  in  a  farmer's  yard. — 
You  may  angle  for  them  any  time  in  the 
morning,  and  in  the  afternoon  from  four  till 
night;  they  are  in  season  all  the  summer: 
when  you  try  to  catch  them,  remember  you 
keep  out  of  sight,  let  your  line  fall  into  the 
stream,  without  any  lead,  except  one  single 
shot,  and  then  it  will  be  carried  gradually 
into  the  hole.     When  you  have  a  bite,  you 


34  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

ought  not  to  strike  too  eagerly ;  they  feed 
freely  enough  and  struggle  hard  for  their 
lives. 

THE  SAMLET,   FINGERING-PARR, 
OR  PINK-TROUT, 

Never  exceeds  three  or  four  inches  in 
length,  and  has  teeth  in  the  jaws,  palate,  and 
tongue ;  the  body  is  covered  with  small  scales 
like  a  Trout,  the  back  full  of  black  spots, 
and  on  the  sides  are  five  or  six  impressions 
of  such  a  form,  as  though  they  had  beea 
made  with  fingers  across  the  fish,  hence  some 
give  them  the  title  of  Fingerings ;  in  every 
one  of  these  pits  thei'e  i&  generally  a  red 
spot ;  their  bellies  are  white,,  and  their  tails 
forked  like  a  Salinaa;,  their  spawning,  time 
is  about  the  beginoiiig  of  November,  at 
which  time  also  Salmon  spawning  is  at  the 
height;  and  they  are  found  only  in  places 
where  these  report,  and  whether  they  waiir 
der  into  the  sea  or  not,  remains  a  doubt ;. 
I  have  taken  them  in  the  Tweed,   the  Tay, 


TflE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  35 

the  Spray,  and  all  other  rivers  where  Salmon 
frequent.  They  delight  in  the  most  swift 
and  rapid  streams,  where  no  other  fish  is 
able  to  abide. 

You  may  angle  for  them  at  any  time  of 
the  year ;  early  in  the  spring  they  bite  in 
sharp  streams,  where  there  is  plenty  of  gra- 
vel, or  wood,  and  very  near  the  sides  of 
rivers:  the  best  baits  are  brandlings,  gilt- 
tails,  earth-bobs,  and  gentles ;  and  from 
the  middle  of  March  to  the  middle  of  Octo- 
ber, for  your  flies  use  the  following,  viz.  the 
black,  dun,  brown,  grey,  and  green  or  yellow 
gnat.  After  a  hot  day  in  summer,  they  al- 
ways make  to  very  shallow  places  in  the  even- 
ing, or  the  sides  of  large  sand  banks,  where, 
with  as  small  a  fly  as  can  be  made,  and 
pointed  with  a  very  small  gentle,  you  may 
have  excellent  sport ;  use  about  two  yards  of 
the  best  single  hair  at  the  bottom  of  your 
line,  and  if  you  fish  at  ground  give  him  time 
and  you  will  be  sure  to  take  him.  When 
you  dress  these  fish,  take  the  guts  out  at  the 


36  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

gills  without  opening  them  :  they  have  a  very 
good  flavour,  and  are  always  in  season. — 
They  are  excellent  baits  for  Salmon  and  large 
Trout,  the  same  as  minnow. 

THE  GUINIAD. 

This  fish  is  only  found  in  a  large  water 
called  Pemble-Meer,  near  Chester ;  but  what 
is  most  remarkable  appears  to  be  this,  that 
the  river  which  runs  by  Chester,  hath  its  head 
or  fountain  in  Merionethshire,  and,  in  its 
course,  runs  through  this  Pemble-Meer, 
which  abounds  as  much  with  Guiniads  as 
the  river  Dee  does  with  Salmon ;  and  yet  it 
was  never  known  that  any  Salmon  were 
caught  in  the  Meer,  or  Guiniads  taken  in  the 
river.  I  should  imagine  the  same  means 
must  answer  in  angling  for  this  fish,  as  for 
others  of  the  truttaceous  kind :  but  it  is  so 
little  known,  even  by  report,  that  I  can  only 
hazard  the  conjecture  ;  it  is  however  said  to 
be  good  food,  of  rather  an  insipid  taste. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  37 

THE  CHAR, 

In  this  kingdom,  is  chiefly  found  in  Win^- 
dermere  lake,  in  Westmoreland,  which  is 
from  eleven  to  twelve  miles  in  length ;  and 
it  is  said,  perfectly  smooth  at  the  bottom. 

The  Char  is  spotted  like  the  Trout,  and  its 
length  seldom  exceeds  from  fifteen  to  sixteen 
inches.  They  are  reckoned  very  delicate 
food,  and  have  scarce  a  bone  except  on  the 
back ;  they  swim  together  in  shoals,  and 
tliough  they  appear  on  the  surface  of  the 
water  in  the  summer,  they  will  not  suffer 
themselves  to  be  taken  either  with  the  ano;le 
or  nets.  But  when  they  resort  to  the  shallow 
part  of  the  lake  in  order  to  spawn,  about 
Michaelmas,  they  set  trammel-nets  baited, 
and  leave  them  for  a  whole  day  and  night, 
into  which  the  fish  enter  of  their  own  accord. 
I  apprehend  also,  that  at  this  season  the  Char 
are  to  be  caught  by  the  angle,  with  the  same 
kind  of  ground-baits  as  are  before  recom- 
mended for  other  fish  of  this  species. 
E 


38  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

I  have  now  described  such  fish  of  the  trut- 
taceous  kind  as  are  known  in  England  ;  but 
there  are  others  which  will  give  sport  to  the 
angler,  both  with  flies  and  ground-baits, 
which  are  the  Chub  or  Chevin,  the  Dace  or 
Dare,  the  Roach,  and  the  Bleak ;  the  ac- 
count of  which  will  follow  in  the  next  chap- 
ter. I  might  add  to  these,  the  Smelt,  which 
is  to  be  met  with  in  rivers  near  the  sea ;  and 
the  Flounder,  which  is  to  be  taken  with  min* 
nows,  worms,  &c.  but  being  generally  esteem- 
ed inhabitants  of  the  salt  water,  and  univer^ 
sally  known,  I  shall  omit  giving  a  particular 
account  of  them. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

THE  CHUB,  OR  CHEVIN, 

Jl  HE  Chub  is  of  a  longer  make  than  the 
Carp,  and  has  a  larger  and  flatter  head  than 
a  I)ace;  the  back  is  of  an  obscure  green,  lik^ 
an  unripe  olive.     It  is  bred  in  rivers,  and 


tHE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  39 

delights  to  abscond  in  holes,  and  under  the 
shade  of  trees,  in  a  sandy  bottom,  where 
cattle  come  to  dung  in  the  fords ;  in  hot 
weather  they  generally  swim  in  droves,  and 
keep  to  one  residence  like  the  Barbie ;  in  a 
Chub-hole  I  have  met  with  many  that  have 
weighed  from  six  to  eight  pounds.  They 
spawn  in  May,  in  sandy  or  gravelly  places,, 
and  in  the  very  midst  of  the  stream :  they 
are  best  in  season  in  the  spring,  when  they 
are  full  of  spawn. 

Of  all  fish  this  is  the  best  to  enter  a  young 
angler,  for  it  is  very  easily  taken :  however 
let  me  prescribe  some  rules  for  that  purpose. 
You  must  find  out  some  hole  where  you  can 
meet  with  twenty  or  thirty  of  them  together, 
in  a  hot  day,  floating  almost  on  the  surface 
of  the  water ;  then  bait  your  hook  with  a 
grasshopper,  but  be  sure  to  keep  out  of  his 
sight,  for  he  is  a  very  fearful  fish,  and  there- 
fore the  least  shadow  will  make  him  sink  to 
the  bottom  of  the  water,  but  he  will  rise  again 
suddenly :  having  baited  your  hook,  drop  it 
E  2 


40     •        THE    PRIFFIELD    ANGLER* 

gently  before  the  Chub  which  you  have  se- 
lected by  your  eye  to  be  the  fairest  and  best ; 
he  will  instantly  bite  greedily,  and  be  held  so 
fast  by  means  of  his  leather  mouth  that  he 
can  seldom  break  hold ;  and  therefore  you 
will  do  well  to  give  him  play  enough,  and  so 
tire  him,  otherwise  you  may  endanger  your 
line  :  if  you  cannot  find  a  grasshopper,  bait 
your  hook  with  a  fly  or  beetle,  cod  or  case- 
worm. 

In  March  or  April  angle  with  worms,  or, 
if  3^ou  have  it  properly  prepared,  with  Sal- 
mon-spawn, which  is  a  most  excellent  killing 
bait :  in  May,  June,  or  July,  you  may  chuse 
flies,  snails,  or  cherries;  the  may-bug,  or 
flying-beetle,  is  also  an  admirable  thing  in  a 
hot  evening  under  the  boughs ;  but  note,  they 
will  seldom  refuse  a  grasshopper  on  the  top 
of  swift  streams,  or  at  the  bottom,  a  young 
humble-bee. 

In  August  and  September,  &c.  make  use  of 
a  paste  of  cheese  pounded  with  saffron  in  a 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  41 

mortar,  adding  thereto  a  little  butter. — 
Make  a  paste  of  Holland  cheese  and  turpen- 
tine, for  the  winter  season,  at  which  time  the 
Chub  is  in  his  prime ;  for  then  his  forked 
bones  are  either  lost  or  converted  into  gris- 
tle>  and  is  excellent  meat  baked  or  stewed, 
with  rich  sauce,  in  the  manner  you  w^ould 
dress  a  Carp. 

There  is  another  method  I  am  told  much 
practised  in  the  Thames,  and  other  wdde  and 
deep  rivers,  with  a  verj^  strong  rod  or  long 
»tafF  from  a  tree,  and  a  line  about  twice  the 
length,  they  whip  with  a  black  snail  under 
liie  boughs,  the  boat  moving  gently  down  the 
stream ;  the  snail  must  be  opened,  and  will 
then  shew  a  white  inside  :  in  this  manner 
they  catch  the  lai'gest  and  strongest  Chubs, 

THE  DACE,  OR  DARE. 

The  Dace  is  not  unlike  a  Chub,  but  far 
less  ;  his  body  is  whiter  and  flatter  and  his 
tail  more  forked,  he  is  not  so  broad  as  a 

^3 


k 


42  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

Roach,  and  is  a  leather-mouthed  fish.     He 
breeds  almost  in  all  rivers,  and  generally  lies 
near  the  top  of  the  water ;  he  is  a  very  brisk 
and  lively  fish,  and  swims  swiftly,  like  a  dart, 
from  whence  he  derives  his  name.     These 
fish  spawn  in  February  and  March,  and  are 
fit  to  eat  by  April  or  May,  but  their  highest 
season  is  in  September.     They   delight  in 
gravelly  or  sandy  bottoms,   and  the  deepest 
parts  of  rivers,  under  tlie  shade  of  trees,  or 
dock  leaves  :    they  are  a  very  simple  breed, 
and  will  often  bite  when  you  least  desire  it ; 
however  their  darling  bait  is  a  gentle  at  the 
bottom,  and  a  small  fly  at  the  top ;  in  the 
summer  months  an  ant-fly  is  best ;  they  will 
likewise  take  any  paste,  as  well  as  all  sorts 
of  small  worms.     Angle  for  him  with  a  very 
slender  rod,   a  line  of  very  fine  single  gut, 
at  least  for  two  yards  above  the  hook,  which 
must  be  a  very  small  one;  one  small  shot, 
a   float   made   of   two    very    small    goose 
quills,  cut  within  half  an  inch  of  the  feather, 
thrust  one  of  the  open  ends  into  the  other 
and  whip  it  fast  with  fine  waxed  silk  :  when 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  43 

you  are  so  provided,  get  some  white  bread 
and  bran,  knead  them  well  to  the  consistency 
of  paste,  and  making  it  up  into  small  balls, 
with  a  pebble  in  each,  throw  them  into  the 
water :  bait  with  gentles  and  you  will  have 
excellent  sport. 

The  Dace  will  take  all  sorts  of  flies  if  you 
point  your  hook  with  a  gentle.  In  the  spring 
he  takes  an  earth-bob  very  well. 

If  the  water  be  so  high  as  to  rise  almost 
to  the  banks,  fasten  to  your  line  an  artificial 
fly  called  the  caterpillar-fly,  then  take  a 
large  yellow  gentle,  the  yellower  the  better, 
run  your  hook  through  his  skin  and  draw 
him  up  to  the  tail  of  your  artificial  fly;  this 
being  done,  whip  with  it  on  the  surface  of 
the  water,  and  if  you  are  diligent  and  ex- 
pert, you  may  assure  yourself  of  good  sport. 


44  THE    DUIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

THE  ROACH, 

Is  a  handsome  fish  it ;  has  a  small  head,  a 
leather  mouth,  which  is  small  also,  and  its 
teeth  are  in  the  throat ;  tlie  cii'cle  of  the  eye 
resembles  a  gold  colour ;  it  has  a  hog  back, 
which  is  tolerably  thick  for  its  size,  the  scales 
are  large,  the  fins  in  general  red,  particular- 
ly when  in  season,  and  the  tail  is  a  little  fork- 
ed. It  is  a  very  silly  fish,  and  the  flesh  of 
it  but  little  esteemed,  being  rather  bony, 
though  exceedingly  wholesome,  and  the  roe 
is  particularly  good.  The  Roach  are  much 
better  in  some  rivers  than  others,  but  there 
are  none  good  in  ponds.  They  are  taken  in 
the  Driffitld  river  as  large  as  from  two  to 
three  pounds  weight ;  but  the  best  size  for 
eating  is  from  one  pound  and  a  half  to  two 
pounds,  and  in  my  opinion  are  not  so  de- 
spiseable  as  many  affect  to  think  them,  per 
haps  because  being  so  numerous  they  are 
very  common. 

They  delight  in  deep  gentle  running  water, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  45 

and  holes  that  are  well  shaded,  having  a  bot- 
tom of  fine  gravel,  sand,  or  a  kind  of  slimy 
marL  In  the  summer  they  often  frequent 
more  shallow  water,  about  the  tails  of  fords, 
under  banks,  or  among  weeds,  particularly 
when  the  water  is  thick.  They  spawn  in 
May,  begin  to  be  in  season  in  July,  and 
continue  so  till  near  the  same  time  of  spawn- 
ing again,  but  are  far  the  best  in  winter  : 
when  out  of  season  their  scales  are  very 
rough,  of  a  duller  colour,  and  their  fins  not 
so  red  and  beautiful. 

The  best  way  to  angle  for  these  fish  is  as 
follows  :  let  your  rod  be  long  or  short,  pro- 
portioned to  the  place  you  fish  in,  rather 
stiff,  and  such  a  one  as  will  strike  true ;  your 
line  about  a  foot  and  a  half  shorter  than  the 
rod,  pretty  strong,  and  taper  to  the  bottom ; 
the  lower  part  should  be  a  fine  round  and 
smooth  silk-worm  gut,  of  a  water  colour, 
and  the  hook  No.  7  or  8  ;  put  one  shot 
No.  3,  four  inches  from  the  hook,  and  two 
or  three  more,  No.  2,  about  five  or  six  inches 


46  THE   DRIFFIELD   i^NGLEIi, 

higher  up,  sufficient  to  sink  the  float  (which 
should  be  a  swan's  quill)  so  that  you  may 
just  discern  the  top  of  it  above  water.—- 
When  you  fix  on  a  place  for  sport,  plumb 
the  bottom,  and  let  the  bait  float  not  more 
than  two  inches  from  the  bottom,  provided  it 
is  level,  the  run  gentle,  and  the  water  deep 
and  clear ;  in  this  manner  I  have  had  better 
sport  in  winter  than  at  any  other  time. — 
When  the  water  is  coloured  with  a  fresh,  and 
especially  if  on  the  rise,  you  may  take  them 
best  at  the  depth  of  a  yard,  or  a  yard  and  a 
half. 

When  you  have  thus  taken  the  depth  lay 
aside  your  rod,  and  throw  in  at  the  top  of 
your  swim  three  or  four  balls  of  ground  bait, 
about  the  size  of  an  egg,  with  a  small  stone  in 
each  to  sink  them  to  the  bottom ;  this  will  gra- 
dually break  and  spread  about,  and  entice  the 
fish  to  stop  there  after  being  drawn  together. 
The  bait  is  thus  prepared  :  take  some  coarse 
wheat  bran,  and  a  little  sweet  coarse  flour, 
or  bread,  sufficient  to  bind  the  bran  with 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEU.  4? 

scalding  water,  so  as  you  may  make  it  up  in 
a  large  ball,  but  not  so  stiff  as  dough,  so  that 
it  may  not  break  in  going  down,  for  if  it 
sticks  together  too  much  it  will  not  divide  in 
the  water,  if  too  little  it  will  wash  away  and 
all  the  fish  follow  it.  Be  careful  also  when 
you  throw  your  little  balls  so  that  they  do 
not  go  too  far  out,  for  you  should  fish  over 
them ;  bait  with  two  or  three  grains  of  Sal* 
mou'^roe  if  you  have  any,  which  is  by  far  the 
best  bait;  if  not,  a  small  round  bit  of  red 
paste,  (such  as  mentioned  before  for  the 
Chub)  or  gentles,  will  supply  the  want  of  it. 
You  must  keep  a  sharp  eye  on  the  float, 
striking  at  the  least  nibble;  and  when  you 
hook  a  fish,  if  it  be  large,  give  him  play,  for 
they  are  very  strong  and  struggle  much, 
therefore  use  the  roundest  and  smallest  silk- 
worm gut  for  near  two  yards  of  your  line 
next  the  hook. 

They  are  also  to  be  taken  in  warm  weather 
with  cads  and  natural  flies  under  water,  and 
with  artifici^.!  flies  at  the  top.    In  winter  you 


48  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANOLER. 

may  fish  for  them  with  paste  or  gentles,  and 
in  spring  with  worms  or  cod-bait ;  but  in  very 
hot  weather  use  small  white  snails,  earth- 
bobs,  and  new  cheese. 

THE  BLEAK, 

Is  a  very  small  fish,  scarcely  ever  attain- 
ing to  more  than  five  inches  long,  his  body  is 
beautifully  covered  with  thin  silver  scales,  he 
is  of  a  more  slender  make  than  a  Dace,  and 
his  head  is  proportionably  less ;  he  has  large 
eyes,  and  the  lower  part  of  the  iris  is  spotted 
with  red,  the  inside  of  his  mouth  is  like  that 
of  a  Carp,  and  provided  in  the  same  man- 
ner :  they  are  to  be  met  with  in  most  inland 
rivers  of  England  in  great  plenty,  and  reck- 
oned to  be  best  in  season  in  autumn,  when 
they  are  delicious  food.  They  spawn  in 
March,  and  recover  their  strength  in  about 
a  month's  time. 

The  best  baits  for  them  in  the  cold  months 
are  well  scoured  red  worms,  or  gentles ;  and 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  49 

in  summer  I  have  taken  twelve  dozen  at  a 
time  with  the  artificial  ant-fly;  there  can  be  no 
better  sport  than  whipping  for  Bleak  off  a  high 
bank  in  swift  water  on  a  summer's  evening. 
I  would  recommend  for  this  purpose,  to  tie 
two  small  black  wings  on  a  very  little  hook, 
and  instead  of  a  body  to  the  fly,  supply  it 
with  a  gentle  or  tw  o  :  this  is  by  far  the  best 
method  that  can  be  used. 

Having  now  given  an  account  of  such  fish 
as  will  promiscuously  take  the  fly  and  ground- 
bait  ;  I  shall,  in  the  next  place,  proceed  with 
those  that  are  in  general  only  to  be  taken  by 
the  latter  means,  and  which  are  equally  the 
inhabitants  of  rivers,  lakes,  and  fish-ponds; 
beginning,  as  the  first  for  dignity  and  sport, 
with  the  Pike,  on  whom  I  shall  bestow  a 
long  cliapten 


F 


so  THE    DRIFFIELD    AKGLEft. 


CHAPTER    V. 

THE  PIKK 

JL  HE  Pike  is  a  very  long  lived  fish,  and  is 
supposed  to  attain  a  greater  age  than  most 
others,  which  may  be  deemed  a  misfortune, 
he  being  so  extremely  voracious ;  and  is 
properly  called,  Tyrant  of  the  fresh  waters. 

Ttie  largest.Pike  are  the  coarsest  food,  the 
smaller  being  ever  the  best;  contrary. to  the 
nature  of  Eels,  which  increase  in  goodness 
in  proportion  to  their  bulk  and  size. 

He  is  a  solitary  fish,  never  swimming  in 
shoals,  but  resting  himself  alone  :  if  we  may 
credit  report,  a  Pike  has  been  known  to 
fight  an  Otter  for  a  Carp  he  had  taken  and 


THE    DRIFFIELD    AXGLER.  51 

was  carrying  out  of  the  water.  Another  bit 
a  woman  who  had  a  gold  ring  upon  her  fin- 
ger, when  washing  her  hands  in  the  river 
Gosta^  near  Pickering,  pulled  her  into  the 
water,  and  nearly  drowned  her ;  from  which 
circumstance  the  town  of  Pickering  in  York- 
shire is  said  to  have  derived  its  name.  I 
shall  add  one  other  instance  of  its  voracity, 
which  I  can  depend  upon  from  the  person 
who  informed  me  of  it. 

On  a  large  lake  belonging  to  a  gentle- 
aaaan's  domains,  in  the  south  of  England,  a 
swan  was  observed  for  two  or  three  days 
with  its  head  under  the  water,  as  if  div- 
ing for  weeds;  at  length,  the  servants  ob- 
serving the  bird  still  in  the  same  posture, 
acquainted  their  master  with  it,  who  imme- 
diately ordered  them  to  make  use  of  their 
drag  nets ;  which,  when  pulled  on  shore, 
discovered  that  the  swan  had  been  seized  by 
a  very  large  Pike  in  the  act  of  dipping  its 
head,  and  both  of  them  dead. 


F2 


52  .  THE    DHIFpiELD    ANGLER. 

In  short,  this  fish  from  its  greediness  has 
justly  obtained  the  name  of  the  fresh  water 
Shark ;  and  frequently  for  want  of  other 
food,  or  being  the  nearest  to  him,  will  de- 
vour its  own  kmd  ;  perhaps  kindly  intended 
by  nature,  that  the  breed  may  not  supera- 
bound:  there  will  still  be  enough  left  utterly 
to  ruin  ail  rivers  and  other  places  where 
they  are  not  kept  under,  although  they  breed 
but  once  in  a  season. 

The  Pike  usually  feeds  on  fish  or  frogs, 
and  sometimes  it  is  said  on  a  weed  of  his 
own  called  pickerel.  Some  idle  and  fanci- 
ful speculatists  suppose  that  the  fish  them- 
selves are  produced  from  this  weed  ;  those 
•who  maintain  this  opinion  asserting,  that 
though  none  have  been  put  into  ponds,  yet 
they  have  always  been  found  in  abundance 
^^vhere  there  has  been  plenty  of  that  w^eed. 
Were  they  indeed  viviparous,  like  the  Eel, 
there  would  at  least  be  more  ostensible  pleas 
in  their  favour ;  as  the  young  coming  forth 
alive  would  some  of  them  be  deposited  at 


^HE    DIUFFIELD    ANGLlill.  53 

randbin,  on  weeds^  raots,  <>r  stones ;  but  so 
absurd  a  doctrine  sliould  be  by  this  time 
sufficiently  refuted :  in  the  present  enhghten- 
ed  age,  let  this  vulgar  error,  among  many  ^ 
others,  yield  to  the  universal  law  of  nature, 
which  holds  in  vegetables  as  well  as  animals, 
that  nothing  can  be  produced  but  by  the 
seed  of  its  own  sp'e'cies;  even  the  flies  in 
corrupted  flesh  ate  no  otherwise  the  efffect 
of  that  corruption,  than  as  it  serves  them  for 
a  proper  nest  and  nourishment ;  and  doubt- 
less, by  parity  of  reason,  there  will  be  more 
Pike  found  where  there  is  plenty  of  their 
fevourite  weed  than  in  other  places,  without 
the  w^eed  pontributing  in  the  least  to  their 
original  production. 

Pikes  grow  to  a  vei'y  large  size  ;  I  hav€ 
seen  one  taken  out  of  Mr.  Bethefs  pond  at 
Ilisfe,  near  Beverley,  Yorkshire,  upwards  bf 
thirty-eight  pounds  weight,  with  a  trimmer. 
In  the  year  1 790,  John  Wilson,  Esquire,  of 
Hull,  caught  one  in  the  Driffield  river  that 
weighed  twenty-eight  pounds,  and  was  thirty- 
F3 


54  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

five  inches  in  length ;  it  was  presented  to 
Ilichard  Langley,  Esquire,  of  Wykeliam- 
Abbey,  lord  of  the  said  manor,  and  was 
judged  to  be  one  of  the  best  fish  of  the  kind 
ever  eat :  it  was  certainly  the  largest  and 
finest  ever  taken  at  Driffield.  I  have  taken 
several  in  the  same  river  that  have  weighed 
from  twelve  to  eighteen  and  twenty  pounds, 
by  trolling,  and  also  by  the  snap ;  and  even 
when  trolling  for  Trout  with  the  minnow, 
and  gut  next  the  hook,  have  by  chance  taken 
them  from  five  to  ten  pounds. 

They  begin  spawning  about  the  middle  of 
February,  if  the  season  be  forward,  and  re- 
tire till  towards  the  latter  end  of  March  into 
creeks  or  ditches,  as  is  supposed  that  other 
fish  may  not  devour  their  spawn,  and  where 
there  is  a  sufficient  supply  of  water.  .  In 
ponds  they  seek  the  neck  or  shallow  parts 
of  the  water,  among  weeds,  mud,  roots, 
gravel,  &c.  where  the  spawner  casts  her 
eggs,  and  the  milter  performs  his  office. — 
About  the  middle  of  September  you  may  see 


THE    DlilFFIELD    ANGLER.  55 

hundreds  of  the  small  fry  (if  the  water  be 
over  the  banks  by  a  flood,  or  stopt  by  flood- 
gates) among  short  weeds  and  grass,  feeding 
on  very  small  yellow  frogs,  and  worms ;  at 
which  time  they  are  from  two  to  two  and  a 
half  inches  long:  next  year  about  the  same 
time,  they  will  grow  from  eight  to  ten  and 
fifteen  inches  in  length,  if  the  river  be  clear 
in  which  they  are  spawned. 

When  the  Pike  arrives  to  twenty-eight  or 
thirty  inches  in  length  he  is  generally  at  a 
stand,  and  then  thrives  niost  in  thickness : 
it  is  a  very  uncommon  thing  to  meet  with 
them  full  four  feet  long,  though  I  have  seen 
one  that  measured  four  feet  two  inches. — 
The  best  fish  are  those  that  are  bred  in 
rivers;  the  females  are  preferable  to  the 
males;  the  worst  are  taken  in  meers  or 
ponds.  They  are  in  season  from  the  begin- 
ning of  May  till  spawning  time ;  the  flesh 
is  firm,  dry,  and  sweet ;  from  seven  to  twelve 
pounds  are  the  best  fish,  and  under  three 
they  are  watery  and  insipid. 


56  Tin:  ©^ii?fx^ld  angler. 

The  Pite  is  fond  of  a  quiet,  shady,  *im- 
frequented  water,  and  lurks  in  the  midst  of 
weeds,  flags,  or  bull-rushes;  yet  he  often 
-makes  fexeursions  from  thence,  and  ranges 
abotit  in  search  of  prey.  In  winter  arid 
cold  weather,  lie  hes  deep  and  near  the  bot- 
tom :  his  best  biting  times  are  early  in  the 
m-ornin^  and  late  in  the  evenino;,  when  there 
is  a  brisk  wind,  and  where  the  water  is  cledr  ; 
if  they  are  inclined  to  the  bait,  they  will  take 
it  after  three  or  foul*  trials ;  it  is  therefore 
needless  to  throw  it  often  in  the  same  plax^e. 

Towards  the  summer,  as  the  weather  grows 
warm,  he  frequents  the  shallows ;  in  a  very 
hot,  clear,  sultry  day,  he  may  be  seen  lying 
6n  the  surface  of  the  water,  but  then  you 
cannot  tempt  him  with  any  bait.  I  have 
frequently  shot  them  thus  basking  themselves 
in  the  sun,  which  is  to  be  done  by  aiming 
right  under  them ;  for  there  is  a  great  de- 
ception in  the  water,  both  by  varying  the 
appearance  of  the  object,  and,  when  fired 
into,  by  causing  th6  shot  to  rise. 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER,  6^7 

To  angle  for  Pike. 

Let  your  rod  be  strong,  such  as  you  troll 
with  for  Salmon,  with  a  reel  or  winch  plac- 
ed on  the  but-end  of  it,  sufficient  to  hold 
about  forty  or  fifty  yards  of  strong  hair  line, 
at  the  end  of  which  must  be  a  swivel  to  fasten 
on  your  armed  wire,  or  gimp :  there  are 
many  w^ays  of  taking  this  fish,  the  first  that  I 
shall  describe  is  called  dipping,  and  is  per- 
formed as  follows  : 

Let  your  hook  be  a  large  proper-sized 
gorge-hook,  very  slightly  leaded  on  the 
shank,  bait  it  by  putting  the  wire  or  gimp  in 
at  the  mouth  of  a  small  fisli,  such  as  a  Gud- 
geon, Roach,  Dace,  small  Trout,  Salmon- 
fry,  &c.  and  bringing  it  as  near  the  tail  as 
possible,  for  which  purpose  you  should  have 
a  needle  seven  or  eight  inches  long  ;  put  the 
gimp  loop  on  the  small  curve  or  eye  of  the 
needle,  thrust  it  into  the  mouth  of  the  fish 
and  bring  it  out  as  above-mentioned;  draw 
it  out  for  the  hook  to  be  close  in  one  corner 


38  THE    BRIFFIEILD   ANGLETl. 

of  its  mouth,  which  must  be  then  sewed  up, , 
and  the  tail  tied  up  to  the  wire,  or  gimp,  very 
neatly  with  a  bit  of  white  thread  ;  cut  away 
the  back  fin,  and  loop  on  to  your  swivel. 
When  you  begin  to  angle,  let  out  your  line 
to  a  convenient  length,  and  fish  where  the 
water  is  not  very  deep,  but  overspread  with 
docks  and  weeds,  except  in  some  parts  where 
you  have  room  to  get  in  your  bait:  the  fish 
hanging  with  its  head  downward,  will,  with 
a  gentle  motion,  sport  and  play  among  the 
weeds  very  naturally,  and  the  Pike  will  be 
eager  of  taking  it  this  way,  even  near  the 
surface  of  the  water :  when  he  seizes  your 
bait,  slacken  your  line  and  let  him  take  it 
down  and  run  with  it,  if  he  has  room  ;  in  a 
short  time  afterwards  you  will  perceive  the 
line  and  rod  top  to  shake,  which  is  a  good 
time  to  strike,  or  else  give  him  time  to  gorge 
it,  as  your  judgment  may  direct:  when  you 
hook  one  manage  him  gently,  winding  up 
your  line  by  degrees ;  and  when  you  think 
it  is  time  to  land  him,  bring  him  quietly 
through  the  weeds,  with  his  nose  above  them ; 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER:.  59"^ 

and  if  you  have  not  a  landing  net^  be  careful 
hpw  you-  take  him  out  of ,  the  water,  for  his 
bite  ia  very  sharp-;  the  best  way  is  to  take 
him  with  your  finger  and  thumb  inr  his 
eyes.  Be  sure  to  let  your  baits  be  fresh 
and  clear. 

The.  next  method,  which  is  very  pleas- 
ing, is  called  trolling. 

Your  rod  and  line  must  be  the  same ^aa 
before,  the  hook  either  double  or  single  :  the 
double  hook  is  made  of  two  large  ones,  with 
ong  shanks,  tied  together  nearly  back  to 
3ack,  then  whipped  to  a  piece  of  proper 
brass  wire  about  five  inches  long,  and  to  the 
wire  half  a  yard  of  gimp  should  be  added, 
with  a  small  loop  at  top ;  the  hook  must  be 
l^ded  two  inches  up  the  wire,>  the  piece  of 
l^d  running  small  to  the  upper  end,  and  a 
quarter  of  an  inch  square  at  the  lower  end: 
the-single  hook  is  completed  the  same  way, 
aWays^  observing  to  choose  one  Avith  a  long 
shank  ;  they  are  baited  the  same  way  as  be- 


60  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

fore  directed,  only  cutting  away  one  of  the 
fins  at  the  gillsj  and  another  at  the  vent  on 
the  contrary  side,  and  keeping  the  points  of 
the  double  hook  towards  his  eyes  when  it  is 
drawn  close  to  his  mouth :  angle  for  them 
this  way  in  deep  strong  water,  near  to 
weeds,  bull-rushes,  water-docks,  hollow 
banks,  stumps  of  trees,  &c.  cast  your  bait 
across  the  water,  and  work  it  up  and  down 
in  such  places  as  you  judge  proper,  keeping 
it  in  continual  motion,  by  sometimes  letting 
it  sink  a  considerable  depth,  and  at  other 
times  raising  it  gradually :  you  need  not 
make  more  than  three  or  four  trials  in  a 
place,  for  if  a  Pike  be  there  he  will  seize  the 
bait  within  that  time  if  he  intends  taking  it 
at  all ;  when  he  has  got  it,  give  him  line 
and  he  will  run  to  his  hold  to  swallow  it: 
in  a  short  time  afterwards  you  may  use  3^our 
rod  and  line  sharp,  (as  before  observed)  if 
that  be  not  the  case  let  him  alone  for  five  or  six 
minutes  from  the  time  that  he  first  made  off, 
then  strike  and  manage  with  discretion,  and 
be  is  your  own :  but,  if  after  he  has  run  with 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER*  6l 

the  bait,  he  makes  scarcely  any  stay  at  his 
hold  but  goes  oft'  again,  you  should  not 
strike  him  till  he  has  rested  a  second  time, 
allowing  him  still  about  five  or  six  minutes  ; 
but  should  he  run  once  more  before  that 
time  is  expired,  draw  a  tight  line  and  strike 
instantly ;  if  you  hook  him,  and  he  proves 
a  large  fish,  give  him  line  enough,  which  will 
exhaust  his  strength ;  in  time  wind  up  your 
line  by  degrees,  but  do  not  pull  him  roughly,' 
for  if  you  do  he  will  plunge  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  tliough  he  m^y  not  be  able  to  breal^ 
your  tackle,  yet  he  may  t(?ar  away  his  hold  ;- 
when  you  have  brought  him  within  sight,  if 
he  begins  again,  proceed  in  th^  same  manner 
till  you  master  and  kill  him.  pike  are  to 
be  enticed  by  a  large  bait,  but  a,  small  one 
is  much  more  certain  :  take  care  that  all  'm 
clear  from  dirt  and  weeds  when  you  recast  it 
kito  the  water,  which  must  be  don^  gently, 
or  you  will  frighten  the  fish  instead  of  'on^ 
couraging  him  to  take  it. 

There  is  another  way  of  trolling  by,  the 
G 


6a'  THE    DRIFFIELD    AXGLER, 

hand :  the  hook  being  baited  and  fixed  to 
the  end  of  the  line,  the  other  end  must  be 
tied  round  the  wrist  of  the  person  using  it, 
or  through  the  butfon-holes  of  his  coat ;  the 
Mae  naust  be  gradually  taken  up  in  length  in 
the  left  hand,  except  about  three  quarters  of 
a  yard,  which  is  held  in  the  right  hand  near 
the  bait ;  then  with  a  spring-jerk  away  flies 
the  bait  to  the  extent  of  thie  line  in  general, 
letting  it  sink  a  little,  drawing  the  line  with 
such  a  motion  as  to  keep  the  bait  in  good 
play ;  by  this  method  many  large  fish  are 
eaught. 

The  next  way  is  called  taking  them  at 
snap,  for  which  you  must  be  provided  with 
a  double  spring  hook,  being  much  preferable 
to  all  others,  as  it  never  fails. 

When  you  bait  fbv  the  snap,  you  must 
make  a  hole  in  the  side  of  the  fish-bait,  as 
near  the  middle  as  you  can,  with  the  point 
of  a  probe,  or  your  hook  ;  put  in  your  arm- 
fed  wire  or  gimp,   draw  it  but  at  the   fish's 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  63 

mouth  and  sew  it  up.  When  you  fish  thus 
for  the  Pike,  be  sure  you  strilce  liim  tlie  con^ 
trary  way  from  that  which  he  runs  :  the  snap 
is  best  used  in  March  or  April,  the  Pik^ 
being  very  shy,  and  though  they  will  seize  the 
bait  with  seeming  eagerness,  yet  they  will 
often  let  it  go.  again  immediately ;  to  be  even 
with  them,  therefore,  I  generally,  strike  a$ 
soon  as  they  take  the  bait;  when  the  Pike 
comes  you  may  see  the  water  move,  and  tlie 
moment  you  feel  him,  atrike  the  contrary  way 
from  that  he  takes  it;  you  must  play  your 
fish-bait  with  a  quicker  motion  at  the  snap 
than  in  other  ways.— Another,. and  most  de- 
structive means,  is  the  following  ; 

Let  your  hook  be  single,  with  rather  a 
long  shank,  and  before  you  fix  your  swivel 
at  the  bottom  of  your  reel-line,  put  a  cork- 
float  that  will  swim  a  Gudgeon  ;  then  put  on 
the  swiviel  and  fix  the  gimp,  on  which  your 
hook  must  be  well  and  neatly  whipped ;  add 
a  large  shot  or  two  to  make  the  float  stand 
up  a  little,  that  when  the  Gudgeon  is  on,  it 
G  2 


64  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEU. 

may  do  so  properly :  you  must  have  your 
Gudgeon  quite  alive,  and  when  you  bait  w^ith 
one,  stick  the  hook  either  through  the  upper 
lip  or  back  fin ;  then  angle  in  deep  and 
likely  places,  letting  the  bait  swim  at  mid- 
water,  moving  the  float  either  higher  or  lower 
according  to  the  place;  w^hcn  you  have  a 
bile,  let  the  fish  run  a  little  and  then  strike ; 
by  this  means  you  will  take  large  Perch  as 
well  as  Pike,  especially  if  you  fish  with  a 
very  small  Gudgeon,  or  minnow:  in  this 
way  you  will  often  meet  with  a  double  prize  ; 
for  as  the  Perch  is  descending  with  his  prey, 
he  will  sometimes  be  seized  by  a  Pike ;  as 
they  are  both  tyrants  alike,  I  wish  you  suc- 
cess in  securing  them. 

Although  this  fish  does  not  belong  to  the 
species  that  rise  naturally  at  flies,  yet  let  the 
angler  take  notice  that  there  is  very  extraor- 
dinary sport  to  be  had  with  them,  particularly 
with  such  a  one  as  I  shall  describe.  The  fly 
must  be  larger  than  even  those  used  for  Sal- 
mon ;   it  must  be  made  on  a  double  hook, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  €5 

formed  of  one  piece  of  wire  fastened  to  a 
good  link  of  gimp  ;  it  must  be  composed  of 
very  gaudy  materials,  such  as  the  feathers  of 
the  gold  and  common  pheasant,    peacock, 
mallard,  &c.  with  the  brown  and  scfftest  part 
of  bear's  fur,  a  little  dark  and  reddish  mo- 
hair, with  yellow  and  green  mohair  for  the 
body,  and  four  or  five  turns  of  gold   twist 
slanting  round  the  body ;  the  head  must  be 
formed  of  a  little  dark  brown  mohair,  some 
gold  twist,  and  two  small  black  beads  for  the 
eyes ;  the  body  about  three  inches  long,  and 
made  rough,  full,  and  round ;   the  wings  not 
parted,  but  to  stand  upright  on  the  back,  and 
some  smaller  feathers  continued  thence  all 
down  the  hatk  to  the  end  of  the  tail,  so  that 
where  you  finish  they  may  be  left  a  little  longer 
than  the  hook,  and  the  Whole  to  be   about 
the  thickness  of  a  tom-tit,  and  near  three 
inches  long. 

N.  B.  These  sort  of  flies,  and  all  othef 
artificial  baits  for  Pike,  are  to  be  had  of 
Mr.  Ustenson,  in  the  Strand,  Mr.  Chevalier^ 
and  other"  tackle-makers,  iri  London, 

G  3 


66  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

I  have  also  taken  them  at  times  with  an 
artificial  may-fly,    and  other  large  flies ;  but 
this  is  chiefly  to  be  done  in  lakes,  and  broad 
waters,  in  dark  and  windy  days,   when  the 
wind  is  at  south  or  west,  and  best  in  a  boat 
carried  gently  across,  or  driving  down  the 
stream  ;  observing  to  move  the  fly  quick,  and 
to  keep  it  about  two  inches  under  the  surface 
of  the  water  if  possible  :  in  this  manner  you 
may  take  Pike  when  other  baits  avail  nothing. 
They   are   also   to  be  taken  with   artificial 
frogs,    water-rats,  mice,   and  calves'-tails;  a 
small  Eel  is  also  a  good  bait  for  them,   or 
Perch  with  the  fins  cut  oflf;    and  indeed,  in 
laying  trimmers,  I  have  known  all  those  that 
were  served  with  this  bait  to  be  taken,  whilst 
the  others  were  totally  deserted ;  thus  nature 
has  determined  that  one  despot  shall  prey 
upon  another ;  and  was  it  not  for  that  strong 
defence  given  them  of  the  prickles  on  the 
back,  the  Perch,  I  believe,  would  not  be  so 
fond  of  choosing  the  same  haunts. 

Your  live  baits  should  be  kept  in  a  tin  ket- 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  67 

tie,  with  holes  made  in  the  side :  change 
your  water  often,  which  will  keep  them 
alive  a  long  while. 

There  are  other  ways  of  taking  Pike  wWch 
do  not  strictly  come  under  the  head  of  ang- 
ling ;  but  being  so  enormous  a  depredator, 
I  think  too  many  means  of  destroying  him 
cannot  be  marked  out;  for  do  all  you  can 
there  will  still  be  too  many  of  them  left. 

I  shall  now  describe  a  ledger-bait,  which 
is  fixed  to  a  certain  place,  and  may  be 
left  whilst  you  angle  for  other  fish :  it 
is  best  to  have  your  baits  alive;  stick  the 
hook  through  the  upper  lip,  or  back  fin,  if  it 
be  a  fish;  if  a  frog,  put  the  arming-wire  in  at 
his  mouth  and  out  at  his  gill,  and  tie  the  leg 
above  the  upper  joint  to  the  wire ;  the  yel- 
lowest frogs  you  can  get  are  always  the  best ; 
fasten  your  wire  or  gimp  to  a  strong  line, 
fifteen  or  sixteen  yards  long,  the  other  end 
to  a  stake  made  fast  in  the  ground,  or  the 
stump  of  a  tree,  near  the  Pike's  haunt ;  then 


S8  THE  t)litFFl£L&  ANfeL:]^U. 

place  a  forked  stick  conveniently  near  the 
water,  and  let  the  line  pass  through  the  fork, 
suspending  the  bait  about  a  yard  or  more 
in  the  water,  and  fix  the  line  slightly  in  a 
notch  made  at  one  end  of  the  fork,  that 
when  a  Pike  takes  the  bait  it  may  easily  slip 
out,  so  that  he  may  rtm  off  with  the  line 
into  his  hole.  A  better  way  still  is  to  have 
a  large  winch,  or  reel,  to  hold  your  line, 
made  fast  to  an  iron  spindle  to  fix  into  the 
ground. 

The  next  method,  and  the  last  I  shall 
mention,  is  called  the  decoy-bait ;  which,  al- 
though it  will  occasion  much  diversion  to  the 
spectators,  is  at  the  same  time  very  cruel 
and  terrifying  to  the  poor  birds  concerned 
in  it. 

Make  fast  a  line,  t\ith  a  baited  hook  and 
armed  wire,  to  one  of  the  legs  of  a  goose^ 
or  large  duck,  of  such  a  length  as  to  swim 
about  mid-water ;  throw  it  into  the  fiver  or 
lake  where  Pikes  frequent,   keeping  it  off 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  69 

t?ie  land  as  much  as  you  can ;  upon  the 
bait  being  taken,  the  duck  will  instantly 
be  drawn  under  water,  but  upon  recovering 
from  the  surprise,  will  soon  force  her  head 
up  again,  and  attempt  to  set  up  a  loud 
quacking,  when  in  a  moment  she  will  be 
taken  down  again;  and  this  contest  will 
continue  for  some  time,  if  the  fish  be  tolera- 
bly large,  till  at  last  the  duck,  though  some- 
times nearly  exhausted,  will  drag  her  prize 
on  shore.  A  goose  being  a  much  stronger 
bird,  is  seldom  or  never  taken  under  water, 
even  by  very  large  Pike;  but  will  be  so 
much  scared  at  the  attack,  and  so  bewildered 
for  a  time,  by  being  pulled  about  in  so  many 
directions,  that  at  last,  upon  taking  courage, 
she  begins  to  lash  the  water  with  her  wings, 
and  adding  every  effort  of  strength  to  her 
activity,  secures  a  landing. 

You  may  also  take  them  by  a  quantity  of 
blown  bladders  tied  strongly  together,  at 
the  bottom  of  each  having  a  line  to  carry  the 
bait  about  midvvvater :  set  them  off  with  a 


70  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANtJLEE. 

gentle  wind,  sufficient  to  move  them  properly : 
the  Pike  having  taken  the  bait,  the  bladders 
will  dance  and  tumble  about  in  a  diverting 
manner ;  when  tiie  fish  is  spent,  you  may 
throw  out  a  grapple  to  recover  them,  if 
within  your  reach ;  but  in  broad  waters  a 
boat  will  of  course  be  necessary  :  these,  with 
trimmers  and  night-lines,  include  all  the 
methods  I  have  seen  practised  of  catching 
Pike  wdth  a  bait. 

There  still  remains  to  relate  a  means  by 
which  numbers  of  these  fish  may  be  taken  in 
a  day,  but  that  nmst  be  in  the  warmest  part 
of  it,  and  in  the  hot  months,  this  is  by  snar- 
ing, or  haltering. 

The  Pike  at  this  titiie  will  lie  near  the  top 
of  the  water ;  when  yon  see  one  tlius,  fix 
your  eyes  stedfastly  upon  him,  without  look- 
ing oft',  or  else  he  wiil  be  gone  ;  have  your 
snare  ready  prepared,  as  follows :  choose  a 
taper  pole  that  is  stiff  and  strong,  but  not 
too  heavy,   and  about  four  yards  in  length ; 


THE    DRrTFFrELD   ANGIKR.  7t 

at  the  small  end  of  which,  fasten  a  well- 
tempered  brass  wire,  made  into  a  noose  or 
snare:  having  opened  the  noose  wide  enough 
to  slip  over  the  fish's-  head  without  touching 
him,  let  it  down  in  the  water  with  your  pole, 
even  in  depth  with  the  Pike,  but  two  yards 
before  him,  and  guide  it  very  gently  towards 
his  head,  fixing  your  eyes  full  upon  him,  till 
you  have  brought  the  snare  over  his  head  and 
gill  fins,  but  no  farther,  then  immediately 
with  a  strong  upright  jerk,  hoist  him  to 
land. 


CHAPTER    VI. 
THE  PEARCH,  OB  PERCH. 

Jl  HE  Perch,  as  a  fish  of  prey^  \»  n6)tt  ia 
greediness  to  the  Pike ;  having  a  very  wide 
mouth,  with  large  teeth;  a  hog  back,  on 
>^hich.  aiie  two  fins  aa2me4?ii^iA*  sharp  pric- 


72  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER* 

kles,  which  rise  to  a  considerable  height,  and 
are  his  chief  defence  against  other  watery 
monsters ;  his  skin  is  covered  over  with 
thick,  hard;  dry  scales,  which  form  a  kind 
of  coat  of  mail,  and  his  body  is  thick  and 
broad :  these  fish  are  taken,  where  they  run 
large,  from  ten  to  sixteeji  inches  in  length ; 
they  are  very  ravenous,  and  bold  feeders, 
devouring  even  their  own  kind,  but  are 
very  wholesome  and  good  eating. 

In  the  early  part  of  the  season  they  are 
chiefly  to  be  found  in  gentle  streams,  that 
are  not  very  deep,  and  where  there  are 
weeds  and  other  lurking-places ;  under  hol- 
low banks,  in  gravelly  bottoms,  and  at  the 
turning  of  eddies ;  at  the  end  of  isummer,  1 
and  in  autumn,  they  frequent  deeper  parts 
of  the  river,  generally  choosing  deep  and 
wade  holes,  if  they  can  find  them,  by  bridges, 
or  atiy  wooden  piles,  or  near  the  roots  of 
trees.  ^ 

They  spawn  Ae  latter  end  of  February, 


THE    DRIFFXKLD    ANGLER*  73 

and  in  March.     There  are  many  baits  for 
taking  the  Percli,  but  a  worm,   minnow,  or 
very  small  frog  is    the  best ;    your   worms 
should  be  well  scoured  brandlings,  red  dung- 
hills, or  those  found  in  rotten  tan  :  your  hook 
No.  4,  5,   or  6,    being  well  whipped  to   a 
strong  silk-worm  gut.     If  you  fishk  with  two 
worms,  put  them  on  as  heretofore  described 
for  the  Salmon  and  Trout ;  but,  in  my  opini- 
on, a  single  one  is  best:   use  a  small  float,. 
and  keep  the  bait  aboiit  nine  inches  from  t4i:e^ 
bottom,  and  sometimes  near  mid-water..    H 
you  angle  in  a  large  water,   or  lakCj  where, 
you  may  chance  to  meet  with  Pike,  I  would 
always  recommend  to  tie  the  hook  on  very^ 
small  gimp.    .  -  ■     ♦ 

To  draw  the  fish  together,  take  thr-ee  or. 
four  balls  of  the  best  stift'clay  that  can  be  pro- 
cured, make  holes  in  them,  put  one  end  ofi 
a  lob-worm  in  each  hole  and  close  the  clay ^ 
fast  upon  them,  then  throw  them  into  the 
water  where  you  mean  to  angle,  about  a. 
yard  distant  from  each  other ;    the  worms 

H 


74  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

being  alive  in  the  balls  will,  when  loosened 
by  the  water,  move  and  twist  about,  which 
tempts  the  fish  to  feed  upon  them  ;  but  the 
worms  that  you  angle  with  being  of  a  supe^ 
rior  kind,  they  will,  on  sight  of  them,  leave 
those  in  the  clay  and  seize  yours  with  the 
greatest  eagerness.  When  you  have  thus 
brought  them  upon  their  feed,  you  may  have 
sport  with  them  till  they  are  nearly  all  de- 
stroyed ;  but  give  them  time  to  swallow  the 
bait,  for  if  you  should  suffer  two  or  three  to 
esca})e  after  being  hooked,  it  is  ten  to  one 
but  they  all  leave  off  bititig,  as  by  one  con- 
sent, and  perhaps  quit  the  place.  It  is 
pleasant  sometimes  to  see  seven  or  eight  of 
these  fish,  rising  after  the  one  that  has  takers 
^our  bait,  nearly  to  the  top  of  the  water, 
seemingly  anxious  for  the  fate  of  their  com- 
pahion,  or  perhaps  in  hopes  of  taking  the 
bait  from  him,  which  it  is  not  possible  to  de- 
termine; however  beware  of  letting  your' 
prey  go  in  this  situation,  or  you  may  seek 
out  for  a  fresh  biting  place. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  75 

Not  only  Perch,  but  many  other  kinds  of 
fish,  Barbel,  Bream,  &c.  are  to  be  draw4;i 
together  by  means  of  these  clay  balls. 

If  you  are  out  in  a  bad  day,  and  the 
fish  will  not  be  thus  brought  to  feed,  slip 
your  float  up  the  line  near  to  the  point  ojl' 
your  rod,  or  take  it  off,  and  begin  to  rove 
for  them  thus  : 

Let  down  the  line  longer  than  the  rod, 
or  as  long  as  you  can  properly  throw  it  out 
without  injuring  your  bait,  which  should  be 
w^orms  or  small  minnows,  and  throw  it  some- 
times right  across  the  water,  sometimes  up 
or  dowOj  and  in  all  directions,  drawing  the 
bait  towards  you,  and  playing  it  witii  the 
same  motion  as  you  spin  the  minnow;  so 
keep  moving  about,  angling  in  such  places 
as  you  think  proper ;  when  a  fish  takes  the 
bait,  slacken  the  line  and  give  him  time  be- 
fore you  strike  :  there  is  good  sport  to  be 
had  in  bad  weather  by  this  means,  when  all 
other  methods  would  avail  nothing; :  but 
H2 


76  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

more  especially  when  there  has  been  a  rough 
wind  from  the  south  or  west. 


When  you  rove  with  a  minnow  let  it  be 
alive ;  stick  the  hook  in  at  his  back  fin,  or 
upper  lip,  and  let  him  swim  in  mid-water 
or  a  little  lower,  by  means  of  a  cork  float, 
'  such  a  one  as  the  minnow  cannot  take  under 
water,  with  a  fevv  shot  on  your  hook,  about 
eight  inches  from  it  to  keep  the  bait  down, 
otherwise  when  tired  he  will  come  to  the 
top  of  the  water.  When  you  fish  with  a 
frog,  put  the  hook  through  the  skin  of  his 
back  and  he  will  swiin  the  easier  :  when  you 
have  a  bite,  be  sure  that  you  give  him  line 
enough,  and  let  him  gorge  the  bait;  this 
w^ay  of  fishing  is  best  in  the  latter  end  of 
April,  May,  and  all  June,  for  then  the  Perch 
are  roving  about  in  search  of  young  fry  of 
the  DacC;  Roach,  and  other  fish. 

Perch  bite  best  in  the  latter  part  of  the 
spring,  and  in  the  autumn,  but  are  to  be 
taken  all  the  year  round,  in  warm  weather, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  77 

when  there  is  a  little  wind,  generally  frbm 
sun-rise  for  three  or  four  hours  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  in  the  evening  for  some  hours  before 
sun-set;  but  in  the  month  of  September  I 
have  had  great  diversion  with  them  for  the 
whole  day  through. 

THE  BARBEL, 

Is  a  handsome  well-shaped  fish  ;  the  back 
is  of  an  olive  colour,  the  belly  silver ;  it  is 
speckled  on  the  back  and  sides  with  small 
black  spots ;  his  make  is  long  and  roundish, 
and  his  snout  sliarp ;  the  mouth  not  large, 
but  the  upper  jaw  is  more  prominent  than  the 
lower;  he  has  four  barbs,  or  wattles,  from 
which  he  derives  his  name,  two  at  the  cor- 
ners of  his  mouth  and  two  near  the  end  of 
the  snout.  The  Barbel  cannot  well  endure 
cold,  and  therefore  in  the  winter-time  is  sick 
and  languid,  but  in  the  summer  clean  and 
sound ;  the  flesh  is  soft  and  flabby,  and  in 
no  great  esteem  :  the  spawn  is  said  to  be 
unwholesome ;   the   male  is  thought  much 

H3 


78  THE.  PRIFFIELD    ANGLEE. 

better  than  the  female  :   their  principal  sea- 
son is  August    and    September ;    their  size 
from  one  and  a  half  to  two  feet  long ;   the 
sort  that  are  usually  met  with  are  from  two 
to  six  or  eight  pounds  weight.     This  fish  is 
bred    in   most  rivers ;    in   the   summer    he 
haunts  the  swiftest  and  shallowest  streams, 
where  he  lurks,  under  the  weeds,   and  works 
and  roots  with  his  nose  in  the  sand  like  a 
hog :  in  autumn  he  retires  to  bridges,  flood- 
gates, locks,    and  weirs,    or  the    midst    o-f 
streams,    where    the  waters   are  swift  and 
deep ;  he  never  feeds  off  the  ground,  and 
takes  any  sort  of  worm,  bits  of  bacon,   or 
old  cheese  if  it  be  kept  in  a  linen  bag,  dipped 
in  honey,  two  or  three  days  to  make  it  tough ; 
the  greaves  that  are  to  be  had  at  the  tallow- 
chandler's,  for  a  ground-bait  over  night,  are 
very  good ;    yet  most  commonly  the  same 
worm  is  used  that  is  baited  with.     They  are 
a  very  subtle  strong  fish,    struggle  hard  far 
their  lives,  and  will  often  pick  ofl*  your  baits : 
his  time  of  biting  i^  early  in  the  morning  till 
nine  or  ten  o'clock,  and  from  four  in  the 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  79 

evening  till  sun-set ;  but  at  times^I  have  had 
excellent    sport  with    them  the  whole  day 
through :  you  may  fish   for  them   from  the 
latter  end  of  May  to  the  end  of  autumn,  but 
I  prefer  September  before  any  other  montli, 
as  by  that  time  they   are   sure  to  be  met 
with  in  deep  holes,  and  the  weather  is  not 
too  cold.     In  the  summer  they  come  to  the 
shallows  about  sun-set,   where  they  may  be 
taken  with  a  well  scoured  lob-worm;  you 
have  no  occasion  for  a  float,    but  must  put 
a  large  bullet  on  the  reel-line,   made   fast 
about  a  yard  above  your  hook,  that  your 
bait  may  lie  ledger ;   you  must  have  a  very 
strong  silk-worm  gut  next  your  hook,  at  the 
bottom  of  your  reel-line ;  for  the  Barbie  is 
so  very  strong,  and  will  make  so  many  at- 
tempts to  run  off,  that  a  winch  is  as  necessary 
here  as  for  a  Trout. 

THE  BREAM, 

Is  a  broad  flat  fish,  with  a  small  head  and 
a  sharp  snout ;  they  breed  both  in  rivers  and 


80  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGL£K. 

lakes,  but  delight  chiefly  in  the  latter ;  for 
which  reason  they  are  never  found  in  swift, 
rapid  streams,  but  only  in  such  parts  of 
rivers  as  more  resemble  standing  waters, 
with  muddy  bottoms  :  they  swim  in  herds 
the  same  as  Perch  do. 

The  Bream  seldom  grows  to  the  size  of 
more  than  five  or  six  pounds ;  but  I  have 
heard  of  their  being  taken  of  ten  pounds 
weight.  They  spawn  in  May,  and  are  in  the 
highest  season  in  March  and  April ;  they 
naturally  feed  among  slime,  weeds^  and  dir^ 
but  will  take  any  sort  of  paste,  the  brood  of 
bees  or  wasps,  flies  six  inches  under  water, 
and  cod-baits^  but  a  short  well  scoured 
marsh-worm,  or  a  red  worm,  or  two  or  three 
well  scoured  brandlings  will  prove  most 
successful.  They  bite  best  when  there  is  a 
breeze  of  wind,  and  the  water  is  rough ; 
your  bait  must  be  placed  within  a  foot  or 
fifteen  inches  of  the  bottom ;  the  likeliest 
places  to  meet  with  them  are  the  deepest  and 
broadest  parts  of  a  river,'  early  in  a.  morn- 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  81 

ing,  and  from  fcyur  or  five  in  the  afternoon 
till  sun-set :  when  the  weather  is  warm  they 
bite  very  slow,  and  the  larger  they  are  the 
slower ;  as  soon  as  you  have  struck  one,  he 
will,  immediately  make  to  the  bottom  and 
stay  there  some  time ;  but  if  he  stops  too 
long,  give  him  a  gentle  touch  and  he  will 
immediately  rise  and  give  two  or  three  strong 
tugs,  but  w4ien  you  have  once  turned  him  he 
will  soon  yield. 

The  best  mode  of  ancrlins;  for  him  is  to 
seek  a  shallow  sandy  bottom,  that  leads  to 
a  deep  hole;  then  throw  into  the  shallow 
part  of  the  stream,  three  or  four  handfuls 
of  marsh  or  red  worms  cut  in  pieces,  which 
will  soon  drive  into  the  hole :  use  a  rod 
about  sixteen  feet  long,  of  good  strength, 
with  a  reel-line  proportionable,  a  small  hook, 
No.  6  or  7,  but  no  float;  tiie  hook  must  be 
tied  to  fine,  strong  silk-worm  gut;  put  a  cut 
shot  about  eight  inches  from  the  hook,  and 
over  that  a  small  bullet,  in  the  same  manner 
as  for  Barbel ;  the  use  of  the  shot  is  to  keep 


82  THE    DRTFFIELD    ANGLER^ 

the  bullet  from  slipping  lower ;  this  done, 
bait  your  hook  with  a  well  scoured  marsh- 
worm,  throw  it  into  the  shallow  and  the  stream 
will  draw  it  into  the  hole ;  by  this  method, 
on  a  good  day,  you  may  take  as  many  as 
you  please. 

THE  RUD,  OR  RED-EYE. 

This  fish  is  supposed  by  many  to  be  a 
spurious  breed  between  the  Roach  and  the 
Bream,  being  found  in  the  same  ponds  and 
lakes ;  and  indeed  his  fin  may  well  warrant 
such  a  conjecture  :  the  body  is  shaped  very 
much  like  a  Bream,  but  thicker,  the  back  is 
very  round  and  high  like  a  hog ;  the  fins  are 
all  red,  and  the  whole  body  of  a  reddish 
cast,  especially  the  iris  of  the  eye  (from 
whence  he  derives  his  name)  which  is  redder 
even  than  that  of  the  Roach,  and  the  scales 
are  larger :  when  it  is  scaled  the  skin  looks 
greenish ;  the  palate  is  like  that  of  a  Carp. 
These  fish  usually  measui^  from  ten  to  twelve 
inches ;  tliey  spawn  m  I\Iay,  among  the  roots 


1^'HE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  83 

of  trees,  and  are  angled  for  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  Roach,  or  Dace,  with  worms 
or  gentles. 

THE  EEL, 

Is  a  fish  of  passage,  and  to  be  found  in 
almost  all  waters  that  have  any  communica- 
tion with  the  sea.  There  are  several  sorts 
of  them ;  the  silver  Eel  has  a  dark  brown 
back,  and  white  belly,  with  a  head  small  and 
shai'p :  the  green  Eel  has  a  broad,  flat  head, 
and  is  much  flatter  towards  the  tail  than  the 
other,  having  the  back  of  a  dark  green  co- 
lour, and  the  belly  of  a  whitish  green  :  the 
black  Eel  has  a  larger  head  than  the  two 
former,  a  black  back,  and  yellow  belly,  and 
the  flesh  is  reckoned  unwholesome,  particu- 
larly those  taken  out  of  mud  in  standing 
waters;  but  indeed  none  of  them  bear  an5r 
comparison  to  the  silver  Eel  first  described, 
which  is  very  delicious  food. 

*  Eels  are  supposed  to  be  viviparous,  bring*- 


84  THE    DRIFFIELB    ANGLER* 

ing  forth  their  young  alive :  I  have  myself 
opened  numbers,  and  have  found  within 
many  of  them  a  small,  soft,  whitish  substance, 
knotted  together  very  curiously ;  which,  upon 
examination,  appeared  when  separated,  to  be 
perfect  small  Eels,  capable  of  moving,  though 
some  of  them  were  no  thicker  than  a  very 
fine  needle. 

They  may  be  caught  by  several  sorts  of 
baits,  but  principally  with  powdered  beef, 
lob-worms,  minnows,  hen-guts,  and  gar- 
bage of  fish ;  but  some  prefer  a  pride,  or 
lamprey,   to  every  other  kind  of  bait. 

As  Eels  abscond  in  winter,  taking  up  their 
constant  residence  in  mud,  without  stirring 
out  for  four  or  five  months,  so  in  the  sum- 
mer they  take  delight  to.be  abroad  in  tlie 
day,  at  which  time  they^will  feed,  if  the 
water  be  thick :  but  the  most  proper  tioie  to 
take  them  is  in  the  night,  fastening  your  line 
to  the  bank  side,  with  your  hooks  laying  in 
tUe  water  ;  or  you  may  throw  a  strong  line 


*rriE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLERv  85 

across  the  stream,  with  a  number  of  hooks 
tied  on  pack-thread,  and  properly  baited, 
hanging  from  it  at  convenient  distances,  and 
a  cork  at  top  to  discover  where  the  line  lies, 
that  in  the  morning  you  may  take  it  up  with 
your  drag-hook. 

There  is  atiother  method  of  taking  Eels, 
which  is  called  sniggling,  or  broggling  for 
them:  take  a  strong  line,  and  hook  baited 
with  a  lob  or  garden  worm,  and  marking 
such  holes  and  places  where  the  fish  us^  to 
hide  themselves  in  the  day-time,  near  weirs^- 
mills,  or  ffood-gates,  gently,  by  the  help  of 
a  stick,  put  your  bait  into  those  holes  where 
you  imagine  Eels  are  ;  and  if  there  are  arty 
you  will  be  sure  of  a  bite ;  but  then  take 
care  you  pull  not  too  hard,  lest  you  spoil 
all :  here  note,  that  the  top  of  your  stick 
must  be  cleft,  wherein  you  must  put  a  strong 
hook,  this  stick  must  guide  the  bait  into  the 
hole  where  the  Eel  is,  by  which  means  you 
«Qay,  if  your  tackle  holds,  get  as  large  ones 


86  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

as   are   to   be  found   in  rivers,   mill-darns, 
ponds,   or  flood-gates. 

Bobbing  for  Eels  is  done  after   another 
manner,   i.  e.  take  very  large  lob  or  marsh- 
v/orms  well  scoured,  and  with  a  needle  run 
some  strong  twisted  silk,    or  worsted  thread 
through  them  from  end  to  end ;  take  so  many 
that  you  may  wrap  them  on  a  board  a  dozen 
times  at  least ;   then  tie  them  fast  with  the 
two  ends  of  the  silk,   that  they  may  hang  in 
so  many  hanks  ;  fasten  all  to  a  strong  cord, 
and,  about  seven  inches  from  the  worms,  fix. 
a  plumb,  from  half  a  pound  to  three  quarter^ 
of  a  pound  weight,  and  tie  the  cord  to  a  stiff 
pole :  having  so  done,  fish  in  muddy  water, 
bearing  the  worms,  as  near  as  you  can  guess,, 
just  clear  of  the  bottom ;  and  when  you  feel 
the  Eels  tug  lustily  at  them,  gently  draw  up 
your  line  till   you  have  brought  your  Eels 
to  the  top  of  the  water,  and  then  bring  tliem 
to  shore  as  fast  as  you  can ;  but  take  care^ 
in  striking  not  to  do  it  with  a  jerk,  by.  which 
means  you  might  lose  your  sport ;  aa  the* 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.^  87 

iishj  you  will  remember,  are  not  caught  fey 
a  hook,  but  only  hanging  to  -the  w'orms  an4 
silk  :  I  have  taken  seven  or  eight  large  Eels 
at  a  time  this  way. 

Very  large  Eels  are  caught  by  baiting 
night-hooks  with  small  Roach  or  Minnows; 
and  let  the  hooks  lie  in  the  mouth  of  the 
fish.  Some  persons  near  the  Eel-haunts 
sink  a  bottle  of  hay,  loosely  bound,  and 
stufied  with  fowls'  guts,  and  liver  cut  in  long 
shreds,  over  night,  and  coming  early  next 
morning,  and  drawing  it  up  hastily,  by  the 
rope  fastened  to  the  band,  find  large  Eels 
bedded  in  it  for  the  sake  of  the  prey :  but 
this  may  be  better  done  with  a  bundle  of 
brushwood,  out  of  v/hich,  upon  pulling  them 
up,  they  cannot  so  easily  get. 

I  cannot  dismiss  this  subject  without  tak- 
ing notice,  that  on  most  rivers  of  any  con- 
sequence in  England,  there  are  weirs  built 
on  the  different  royalties,  wherein  very  large 
baskets,  usually  called  bucks,  are  laid  close 
I  2 


8^  THE    DRTFFIKLD   ANGLEJt. 

to  each  other  quite  across  the  stream,  the 
Eels  are  sure  to  be  caught  when  they  begin 
to  drop  down  towards  the  sea  ;  the  best  run  is 
reckoned  to  be  during  the  first  thick  water  after 
heavy  rains  in  the  summer,  and  in  the  dark- 
est nights;  for  it  has  been  observed  that 
where  there  is  any  white  object  near,  such  ^ 
as  a  net,  house,  or  fishing-house  plaistered, 
the  fish  will  be  sure  to  be  caught  on  the 
other  side  of  the  stream.  The  weirs  are 
very  profitable  to  the  owners,  vast  quantities 
gf  Eels  being  caught  by  their  means,  I  have 
^Iso  seen  them  so  constructed,  that  without 
bucks,  the  fish  were  impelled  either  on  one 
side  or  the  other,  into  traps  and  reservoirs 
prepared  for  them,  something  like  those 
jnentioiied  in  the  account  of  the  Salmon. 

This  is  an  object  of  considerable  import- 
ance in  dijfferent  parts  of  the  country,  as  an 
article  of  food,  which  can  be  kept  for  many 
months,  with  a  little  expense. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEK.  89 

,  THE  GUDGEON, 

Is  generally  five  or  six  inches  long,  of  a 
smooth  body,  with  very  small  scales,  the 
back  of  it  is  dark,  but  the  belly  pale  :  they 
are  to  be  met  with  in  most  rivers. 

This  fish  spawns  twice  in  a  year,  the  latter 
end  of. April  and  in  November;  his  flesh 
is  very  well  tasted,  of  easy  digestion,  and  very 
nourishing ;  in  so  much,  that  some  think  it 
no  way  inferior  to  a  Smelt.  He  delights  in 
sandy,  gravelly  bottoms,  gentle  streams,  and 
small  rivers ;  in  the  summer  time  he  resorts 
to  the  shallows, .  in  the  winter  to  the  deeps : 
he  bites  all  day  from  iVprii  to  Michaelmas, 
from  about  an  hour  after  the  sun  rises  to  an 
hour  before  he  sets.  The  principal  baits  are 
small  red  worms,  gilt-tails,  brandlings,  and 
meadow-worms;  he  will  likewise  take  a 
gentle,  cod-bait,  brood  of  wasps,  or  cow- 
dung-lob,  but  the  smaU  i^d  worm  is  what 
pleases  him  best. 

I  3 


so  .THE    I>R1FFIELI>   ANGLER-. 

The  best  method  of  anghng  for  this  fish  ioi 
large  rivers,,  is  to  fix  a  boat,  or  punt,  across: 
the  stream,  with  a  large  pole  at  each  end, 
shod   with  iron,    that  they   may  the  better 
drive  into  the  gravel ;   in  this  way  two  or 
three  persons  may  sit  in  the  boat  and  fish 
at  the  same   time,    having  first  drawn  the 
Gudgeons  together  by  disturbing  the  ground 
with  a  long  mke:   your  line  should  be  small 
at  bottom,  and  your  hook  the  same.  No.  8  ; 
put  your  float  in  as  close  to  the  boat  as  you 
can,  and  let  your  bait  swim  down  the  streamj 
as  near  as  possible  to  the  bottom,   should  it 
even  touch  in  some  places  it  will  be  never 
the  worse :  by  these  means  vast  quantities 
of  these  pleasant  little  fish  may  be  taken,  as 
they  bite  very  greedily ;  and  when  they  be- 
gin to  give  over  feeding  at  one  pitch,  (which 
will  be  the  case)  immediately  remove  you? 
boat  to  another. 

THE  POPE,   OR  RUFF. 

This  fish,  with  a  double  name,  is  small; 


THE    1>RTFFIELI>  ANGLER.  ^1 

and  seldom  grows  bigger  than  a  Gudgeon ; 
in  shape  it  is  not  unlike  a  Perch,  and  would 
be  exceeding  good  food,  was  it  not  so  very 
full  of  bones. 

The  Ruff  makes  most  excellent  sport  for 
the  unexperienced  angler,  for  he  is  a  very 
greedy  biter,  and  like  to  be  in  great  shoals 
together,  where  the  water  is  deep,  smooth^ 
and  clear ;  if  you  wish  to  catch  a  good  quan- 
tity, bait  your  ground  with  earth,  and  angle 
for  them  with  a  small  red  worm. 

THE  MINNOW. 

The  Minnow  is  so  inconsiderable  in  size, 
that  he  would  scarce  be  worthy  of  discourse, 
were  it  not  that  he  serves  for  excellent  baits 
to  take  larger  and  better  fish  ;  and  indeed,  so 
innumerable  is  their  breed,  in  almost  all 
rivers,  that  it  is  supposed  they  tend,  more 
than  any  other  part  of  their  food,  to  assist 
the  growth  of  other  fish  ;  large  quantities  of 
Trout  in  particular  are  observed  to  attend 


9^  THE  drii?fiej:d  angler; 

on  them,  when  they  come  about  the  montii 
of  May  in  vast  shoals  to  spawn  at  their  hillS, 
or  gathering  places,  generally  on  the  bright- 
est gravel,  in  some  shallow  part  of  a  clear 
stream,  the  Trout  lying  a  little  below  them  m 
Somewhat  deeper  water,  where  you  may  fre- 
quently see  them  dashing  with  great  havocfc 
among  them.  These  fish  have  a  bitter  fla- 
vour, but  I  have  made  a  very  good  tansy  of 
them  by  cutting  off  their  heads  and  tails, 
and  saucing  them  with  butter,  sugar,  and* 
verjuice.  I  should  also  suppose  it  would  be 
an  excellent  method  to  dress  them  in  the 
manner  they  do  the  white-bait  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  London. 

Having  now  done  with  such  fish  as  are 
equally  inhabitants  of  rivers^  lakes,  and 
ponds,  I  shall  finish  with  the  description  of 
the  Carp  and  Tench,  which  reside  more 
exclusively  in  the  latter;  and  though  they 
are  to  be  found  in  rivers,  I  am  inclined  to  be 
of  opinion  that  they  are  carried  thither  by 
floods,  and  overfipwings  of  other  waters. 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  $3 


CHAPTER    VIL 


THE  CARP. 

jlHE  Carp  is  allowed  by  all  to  be  the 
queen  of  the  lakes  and  fish-ponds ;  its  ex- 
cellence on  the  table  being  universally  ad- 
mitted ;  the  female  is  somewhat  better  shaped 
and  larger  than  the  male  :  they  are  a  subtle 
fish,  and  longer  lived  than  any  of  the  fresh 
water  breed,  out  of  their  proper  element. 

Carp  are  observed  to  breed  several  months 
in  the  year,  and  for  this  reason  you  shall 
hardly  ever  take  either  male  or  female  with- 
out milt  or  spawn.  They  breed  always 
better  in  ponds  than  in  running  water ;  in 
the  latter  very  seldom,  but  where  they  do 
breed,  their  produce  is  innumerable. 


S4  THE    PRIFFIELD   ANGLER, 

He  that  intends  to  angle  for  a  Carp,  must 
arm  himself  with  a  deal  of  patience,  by  rea- 
son of  the  extraordinary  subtlety  and  policy 
of  that  fish ;  next  you  are  to  observe,  that 
be  will  scarce  ever  bite  in  cold  weather,  and 
in  warm  weather  you  cannot  be  too  early  or 
too  late  at  your  sport ;  should  he  be  in  the 
humour  to  feed,  you  need  not  fear  his  hold, 
for  he  is  one  of  those  leather-mouthed  fish 
who  have  their  teeth  in  their  throat. 

The  Carp  takes  delight  in  worms,  and 
sweet  pastes,  of  w  hich  there  are  great  va- 
riety :  the  best  are  made  up  of  honey  and 
sugar,  and  ought  to  be  thrown  into  the  water 
some  hours  before  you  intend  to  angle ;  or 
if  you  throw  your  paste,  made  into  small 
bullets,  two  or  three  days  before,  it  will  not 
be  the  worse,  especially  if  you  throw  in  also, 
chicken-guts,  garbage,  or  blood,  incorporat- 
ed with  bran,  or  cow-dung.  You  may 
make  your  paste  in  this  manner:  take  a 
convenient  quantity  of  bean  flour,  or  any 
other  flourJ^  and  mingle  it  with  the  flesh  of 


THE   DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  55 

rabbits,  or  veal  minced  small ;  make  up  the 
composition  with  honey,  and  then  beat  the 
whole  together  in  a  mortar,  till  it  is  so  tough 
as  to  hang  upon  a  hook  without  washing 
off;  for  the  better  effecting  of  which,  mix  it 
with  some  fine  whitish  wool;  and  if  you 
would  keep  it  all  the  year,  add  thereto 
some  virgin's  wax  and  clarified  honey :  if 
you  fish  with  gentles,  anoint  them  with 
honey,  and  put  them  on  your  hook  with 
a  piece  of  scarlet  cloth  dipped  in  the  same. 

This  is  the  most  approved  method  to  de- 
ceive and  captivate  the  subtle  Carp;  and 
remember  to  fish  as  far  from  you  as  your 
rod  will  admit  of;  and  should  the  water  be 
clear,  keep  as  much  out  of  sight  as  possible. 

THE  TENCH, 

The  Tench  is  a  leather-mouthed  fish,  and 
from  each  corner  of  the  mouth  hangs  a  little 
barb ;  his  eyes  are  large,  and  of  a  gold  co- 
lour, having  the  iris  red ;  it  kas  small  smooth 


96  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

scales,  very  large  fins,   and  its  body  is  of 
.a  yellowish  brown. 

Their  haunts  are  chiefly  among  weeds, 
and  in  places  that  are  well  shaded  with 
bushes  and  rushes ;  they  delight  and  thrive 
more  in  foul  than  clear  water,  and  are  much 
more  numerous  in  ponds,  and  pits,  than  in 
rivers  ;  but  those  taken  in  the  latter  are  far 
preferable  in  their  flavour  ;  it  is  a  most  de- 
licious fish  to  the  taste,  and  exceedingly 
wholesome* 

They  are  to  be  angled  for  much  in  the 
same  way  as  Carp ;  your  tackle  must  be 
strong,  with  a  proper  float,  the  hook  No.  3, 
to  6  or  7,  whipped  to  a  strong  silk-worm 
gut,  with  two  or  three  shot,  No,  2  ;  fish 
where  there  are  weeds  about  two  feet  deep, 
or  at  mid-water,  and  sometimes  lower,  ac- 
cording as  they  are  in  the  humour  to  take; 
but  if  there  be  not  a  great  quantity  of  mud 
in  the  water,  use  clay  balls,  as  for  Perch, 
and  now.  and  then  tt^row^in  a  few  gentles„ 


THE    DltlFFIELD    ANGLER.  97 

whicli  will  keep  them  together ;  fish  half  a 
foot  from  the  bottom,  unless  the  mud  be  so 
deep  as  to  cover  the  balls  when  thrown  in ;  in 
which  case  keep  to  the  former  way,  and  bait 
the  hole  with  bits  of  lob-worms  and  gentles. 

When  you  have  a  bite,  allow  some  time 
before  you  strike :  they  will  take  several 
baits,  but  the  best  of  all  is  the  small  red 
worm  taken  out  of  rotten  tan,  and  used 
without  any  scouring;  though  liiey  will  at 
times  take  the  gentle,  wasp,  maggot,  and 
green  worm  from  the  boughs  of  trees;  they 
generally  come  out  to  feed  several  times  in 
the  day,  but  their  best  time  of  biting  is  late 
and  early ;  and  the  best  months  for  catching 
them  are  August  and  September,  if  the 
weatlier  proves  warm.  When  you  take  any 
out  of  muddy  places,  keep  them  alive  for 
some  time  in  a  tub  of  water,  where  they 
will  cleanse  themselves  from  that  muddy 
quality  to  which  they  are  subject,  and  be 
much  better  for  the  table. 

K 


98  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEIt. 

The  Tench  is  esteemed  the  fish's  physician, 
on  account  of  a  natural  balsam  which  he  is 
^aid  to  carry  about  him,  that  will  cure  both 
himself  and  others ;  so  that  if  any  other  fish 
receives  a  wound,  he  will  seek  out  the 
Tench,  and  rubbing  the  part  affected  against 
him  (which  the  Tench  will  suffer  him  to  do) 
receives  a  certain  cure  by  virtue  of  this  bal- 
sam, or  slime ;  and  it  is  affirmed  that  the 
voracious  Pike  himself,  is  so  sensible  of  this 
virtue,  that  however  greedy  of  prey,  he  will 
never  hurt  his  physician  :  whether  true,  or 
not,  this  account  passes  current  with  other 
legendary  tales. 


THE    DRIFFIEL©    ANGLER.  99 


CHAPTER    VIII. 


IN  MAKING  FISH-PONDS, 

i5L  PRINCIPAL  regard  shoald  be  had  to  the 
choice  of  a  fit  place,  and  a  proper  soil.  It 
is  now  generally  agreed,  that  heathy  land, 
inclinable  to  be  moorish,  and  full  of  springs, 
is  the  best ;  let  the  situation,  if  possible,  be 
at  the  bottom  or  side  of  a  hill,  that  any 
sudden  shower  or  continued  rain  may  wash 
down  worms,  insects,  and  other  things  fit  for 
the  nourishment  of  the  fish;  this  likewise 
will  be  the  means  of  filling  and  refreshing 
tl^e  pond,  if  it  has  not  the  advantage  of  a 
brook  or  rivulet ;  moreover,  it  has  been  ob-^ 
served,  that  those  ponds  which  have  been 
so  situated  as  to  receive  the  stale  and  dung 
pf  cattle,  have  bred  the  largest  and  fattest 

K2 


100  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER* 

The  head  of  the  pond  should  be  at  the 
lowest  part  of  the  ground,  and  the  trench  of 
the  flood-gate,  or  sluice,  should  have  a  pretty 
swift  fall,  that  the  water  may  not  be  too  long 
in  running  out  when  it  is  to  be  emptied. 

If  more  ponds  than  one  are  to  be  made 
at  a  time,  it  will  be  most  beautiful  and  ad- 
vantageous to  have  them  placed  one  above 
another,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  head  of 
one  may  be  next  to  the  point  or  tail  of  the 
other.  If  the  pond  carries  six  feet  of  water 
it  is  sufficient,  but  yet  it  should  be  eight  feet 
deep,  that  there  may  be  room  enough  to 
receive  the  rains  and  freshes  that  may  fall 
into  it :  in  some  places  there  should  be 
shoals  for  the  fish  to  spawn  upon,  and  sun 
themselves  in ;  as  likewise  holes,  hollow 
banks,  and  roots  of  trees,  to  serve  for  re- 
tiring places  :  some  cast  in  bavins  in  the  most 
sandy  places,  not  far  from  the  side,  which 
serve  not  only  for  the  fish  to  spawn  upon, 
but  are  defences  for  the  young  fry  against 
such  vermin  as  would  devour  them.     Trees 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  101 

shoiild  not  be  planted  so  near  the  pond  as  to 
incommode  it  with  the  falling  in  of  the  dead 
leaves,  because  they  spoil  the  water,  muddy 
it,  and  render  it  disagreeable  to  the  fish.  In 
stocking  the  pond,  if  the  fish  are  only  de-. 
signed^ for  stores,  they  should  be  all  of  a  sex, 
that  is,  either  milters  or  spawners  ;  by  these 
means  Carp  will  become  large  and  exceed* 
ing  fat  in  a  short  time. 

The  most  usual  fish  which  ponds  are  stock- 
ed with  are  Carp,  Tench,  Bream,  and  Pike : 
of  these,  Carp  and  Tench  agree  well  enough 
together,  but  any  other  fish  will  devour  their 
spawn.  The  Pike  admits  of  no  companion 
but  the  Perch,  and  he  is  not  always  safe,  if 
not  very  large ;  however  it  is  usual  to  put 
Roach,  Dace,  Bream,  Chub,  Gudgeons,  and 
Minnows,  into  the  same  pond  with  him,  that 
be  may  have  wherewithal  to  satisfy  his  vora- 
cious nature,  and  grow  fat  the  sooner :  like- 
wise care  should  be  taken,  that  all  the  Pike 
which  are  put  into  the  same  pond,  should  be 
nearly  of  a  size  ;   because  a  Pike  of  thirty 

KS 


102  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

inches  will  devour  another  of  eighteen  ;  some 
grow  more  in  length,   others  in  thickness, 
which  latter  sort  are  the  finest  fish ;  for  a 
lean  slender  Pike,  though  he  seems  to  ad- 
vance in  length,  is  commonly  in  a  decayed 
condition,  by  reason  of  some  outward  wound 
from  the  otter,   or  some  stronger  of  his  own 
kind,  or  an  inward   prick  by  the  hook,  or 
some  other  casualty ;  yet  even   in  this  con- 
dition he  will  be  as  hungry  and  as  greedy  as 
ever.     It  is  observed  by  some,  that  Tench 
and    Eels   delight  in    those    ponds   chiefly, 
whose  bottoms  arc  full  of  mud  ;  whereas  the 
Carp  likes  a  sound  gravelly  bottom,  where 
grass  grows  on  the  sides  of  the  pond ;    for  in 
the  hot  months,  if  the  water  happens  to  rise, 
they  will  feed  on  it.     Some  make  a  square 
hole  in  the  middle  of  their  pond,    three  feet 
deep,  and  cover  it  with  a  sort  of  door,  sup- 
ported at  the  corners  by  four  strong  stakes 
driven  into  the  ground  ;   this  provides  the 
fish  both  with  a  place  of  shelter    and  re- 
treat, and  likewise  preserves  the  pond  from 
being  robbed,  as  the  door  and  stakes  would 
tear  the  nets  all  to  pieces. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANOLEK.  103 

In  the  winter  time,  when  there  happens 
to  be  a  hard  frost,  it  will  be  necessary  from 
time  to  time  to  break  holes  in  the  ice,  in 
order  to  give  the  fish  air,  otherwise  they  will 
all  die,  for  they  cannot  live  long  without 
fresh  air  ;  it  must  indeed  be  owned  that  this 
is  a  rule  generally  known,  and  as  generally 
practised. 

Care  should  likewise  be  taken  to  kill  or 
drive  away  the  enemies  of  fish,  and  devour- 
ers  of  their  spawn  ;  such  as  herons,  cormo- 
rants, sea-gulls,  king  fishers,  water-coots, 
water-rats,  bitterns,  wild  ducks,  and  otters, 
if  they  frequent  the  ponds;  likewise  tame 
ducks  are  great  devourers  of  spawn,  and 
the  young  fry  of  fish,  and  should  not  there- 
fore be  permitted  to  do  mischief. 

It  is  surprising  that  considering  the  bene- 
fit which  may  accrue  from  making  of  ponds 
and  keeping  of  fish,  it  is  not  more  generally 
put  in  practice;  for  besides  furnishing  the 
table,  and  raising  money,  the  land  would  be 


104  THE    PRIFFIEI,D   ANGLEJU 

vastly  improved,  and  be  worth  more  this 
way  than  any  other  whatsoever :  suppose  a 
meadow  to  be  worth  forty  shiUings  an  acre  ; 
four  acres  converted  into  a  fish-pond,  will  re- 
turn every  year  a  thousand  fed  Carp,  from  the 
least  size  to  fourteen  or  sixteen  inches  long, 
besides  Pike,  Pearch,  Tench,  and  others; 
the  Carp  alone  may  be  reckoned  to  bring 
one  with  another,  sixpence,  ninepence,  or 
perhaps  a  shilling  each ;  amounting  at  the 
lovv^est  rate  to  twenty-five  pounds,  and  at  the 
highest  to  fifty ;  which  would  be  a  very  con- 
siderable as  well  as  useful  improvement. 

FISH;  HOW  TO  BRING  THEM 
TOGETHER. 

Get  the  blood  of  an  ox,  a  goat,  and  a 
sheep,  with  dung  of  the  same  creatures 
taken  out  of  the  small  guts;  with  thyme, 
origanum,  penny-royal,  savory,  elder,  gar- 
lick,  lees  of  white  wine,  of  each  alike  ;  the 
fat,  or  marrow,  of  the  same  creatures  a 
sufficient  quantity ;   beat  all  these  that  they 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  105 

may  mix  together ;  make  the  whole  into 
lumps,  and  cast  them  into  the  fish-pond,  or 
where  fish  are,  an  hour  before  you  propose 
to  catch  them. 

THE  FOOD. 

The  best  food  to  render  Pike  extremely 
fat  is  Eels,  and  without  them  it  is  not  to  be 
done  in  any  reasonable  time.  The  best  feed- 
ing place  for  all  sorts  of  fish,  is  a  shoal  place 
near  the  side,  about  two  feet  deep,  and  this 
wall  be  the  means  to  keep  the  deepest  parts 
sweet  and  clear  ;  besides  whatever  is  thrown 
into  the  water,  will  be  more  readily  caught 
up  by  the  fish,  and  nothing  will  be  lost. — 
Any  sort  of  grain  boiled  is  proper  food  for 
iish,  especially  peas  and  malt  coarsely  ground ; 
also  the  grains  after  brewing,  while  fresh  and 
5weet,  are  very  proper ;  but  one  bushel  of 
malt  will  go  as  far  as  two  of  grains  ;  raspings 
and  chippings  of  bread,  or  almost  any  scraps 
from  the  table,  placed  under  a  cask  of  strong 
beer  or  ale,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  drop- 


}06  THE    PRTFFIELD   ANGLER. 

pings  of  the  liquor  may  fall  among  them,  is 
excellent  food  for  Carp ;  two  quarts  of  this 
is  sufficient  for  thirty,  and  if  they  are  fed 
morning  and  evening  it  will  be  better  than  once 
a  day  only.  From  October  to  March,  thirty 
or  forty  Carp  in  one  stew-pond,  may  be 
kept  well  enough  without  feeding ;  but  from 
March  to  October  they  must  be  fed  as  con- 
stantly as  fowls  in  a  coop,  and  tliey  will  turn 
to  as  good  an  account :  and  it  must  be  always 
remembered,  that  constancy  and  regularity, 
in  the  serving  of  fish,  vriU  conduce  very 
much  to  their  feeding  and  thriving. 

Besides  the  food  already  mentioned,  there 
is  one  sort  which  may  be  called  accidental, 
and  that  is,  when  pools  or  ponds  happen  to 
receive  the  wash  of  large  commons,  where 
flocks  of  sheep  usually  feed  ;  the  w^ater  being 
enriched  by  the  dung,  will  maintain  a  greater 
number  of  Carp  than  otherwise  it  could  do  : 
for  the  same  reason  it  is  an  advantage  for 
cattle  to  stand  in  the  w^ater  in  hot  weather, 
and  dung  in  it,  because  it  nourishes  the  fish 
very  much. 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  107 

Some  feed  Carp  and  Tench  with  mowings 
of  grass,  sheep  and  bullocks'  blood,  and 
chicken-guts,  which  will  help  the  growth 
of  the  fish,  and  fatten  them  likewise ;  but 
then  care  should  be  taken  to  supply  them 
with  no  larger  quantities  than  they  can 
dispense  with,  otherwise  they  will  rot  and 
putrify,  thereby  making  the  water  unwhole- 
some. 

I  shall  finish  this  account  of  rivers,  lakes, 
fish-ponds,  and  their  inhabitants,  with  a 
description  of  the  fish's  enemies,  which  are 
very  numerous ;  besides  the  human  foes, 
who  claim  a  prescriptive  right  for  their 
destruction* 

A  thousand  foes  the  finny  people  chase, 
Nor  are  they  safe  from  their  own  kindred 

race : 
The  Pike,  fell  tyrant  of  the  liquid  plain, 
With  rav'nous  waste  devours  his  fellow  train  ; 
Yet  howsoe'er  with  raging  famine  join'd, 
The  Tench  he  spares,  a  salutary  kind  ; 


lOS  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

Hence  too  the  Pearch,  alike  voracious  brood, 
Forbears  to  make  this  genVous  race  his  food; 
Tho'  on  the  common  drove  no  bound  he 

finds^ 
But  spreads  unmeasur'd  waste  o'er  all  the 

kinds. 
Nor  less  the  greedy  Trout,  and  glutless  Eel, 
Incessant  woes  and  dire  destruction  deal : 
The  lurking  water-rat  in  caverns  preys, 
And  in  the  weeds  the  wily  otter  slays  : 
The  ghastly  newt  in  muddy  streams  annoys, 
And  in  swift  floods  the  scaly  snake  destroys : 
Toads,   for  the  swarming  fry,   forsake  the 

lawn. 
And  croaking  frogs  devour  the  tender  spawn : 
Neither  the  habitants  of  land  nor  air, 
So  sure  their  doom  the  fishy  numbers  spare : 
The  swan,  fair  regent  of  the  silver  tide, 
Their  ranks  destroys  and  spreads  their  ruin 

wide : 
The  duck  her  offspring  to  the  river  leads, 
And  on  the  destin'd  fry  insatiate  feeds : 
On  fatal  wings  the  pouncing  bittern  soars, 
And  wafts  her  prey  from  the  defenceless 

shores : 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  109 

The  watchful  halcyons  to  the  reeds  repair, 
And  from   their   haunts  the  scaly  captives 

bear : 
Sharp   herns   and    cormorants    their  tribe 

oppress : 
A  harassM  race,   peculiar  in  distress  : 
Nor  can  the  muse  enumerate  their  foes, 
Such  is  their  fate,  so  various  are  their  woes. 


<i>^ 


110  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEE. 


CHAPTER    IX. 


IZ^STMUCTIOMS 

AND 

OBSERVATIONS. 

OF  THE  ROD. 


i"& 


JL  HE  double-handed  rod,  for  Trout  fish 
should  never  be  less  than  sixteen  feet  long, 
and  for  Salmon  at  least  eighteen  feet,  and 
proportionably  stronger  ;  it  should  be  made 
with  three  joints  besides  the  top  joint,  of 
which  you  should  have  several  of  different 
strength  for  the  fly,  the  minnow,  and  bottom- 
fishing  ;  but  these  rods  are  so  common,  and 
to  be  had  at  all  the  tackle-shops,  that  I  shall 
give  no  further  description  of  them  :    there 


IHE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  Ill 

also  you  may  be  supplied  with  single-handed 
rods  for  fly-fishing. 

But  in  these  latter  days  bag-rods  have  been 
invented,  which  the  angler  may  easily  con- 
ceal, and  not  proclaim  to  all  the  world  where 
be  his  going :  those  for  float-fishing  are  now 
become  common^  but  this  invention  has  lately 
been  extended  to  rods  for  the  fly,  and  ali 
other  kinds  of  angling.  Screws  to  rods  are 
not  only  heavy  and  apt  to  be  out  of  repair, 
but  are  absolutely  unnecessary  ;  and  the 
common  way  of  inserting  one  joint  into 
another  is  sufficiently  secure,  if  the  work 
be  true. 

Here  follows  the  description  of  such  a  neat, 
portable,  and  useful  one,  as  no  angler  that 
has  once  tried  it  will  ever  be  without. 

THE  BAG-ROD. 

Let  the  joints  be  four  in  number,  exclusive 
of  the  top,  and  made  of  the  best  yellow  hie* 
L  2 


I 


11^  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER, 

cary,  or  some  such  very  tough  wood,  and  two 
feet  four  inches  in  length ;  the  largest  joint 
not  exceeding  half  an  inch  in  thickness,  and 
the  rest  in  proportion;  the  tops  must  be 
lance-wood,  red-wood,  or  bamboo,  shaved 
and  neatly  dressed  ;  and  for  the  stock  let  it 
be  of  a  young  straight  grown  ash  or  willow,  of 
an  equal  length  with  ihe  other  joints,  and 
with  a  strong  ferrule  at  the  smaller  end, 
made  to  receive  the  large  joint,  which  must 
be  well  shouldered  and  fitted  to  it  with  the 
utmost  exactness ;  this  rod  will  go  into  a 
bag,  and  be  very  convenient  to  take  in  a 
carriage,  or  will  lie  very  well  concealed 
in  a  pocket  in  the  lining  of  your  coat,  on 
the  left  side,  made  straight  on  purpose  to 
receive  it. 

OF  THE  STOCKS  AND  TOPS. 

The  best  time  of  getting  and  seasoning 
stocks  is  in  the  winter  season,  when  the  trees 
have  shed  their  leaves  and  the  sap  is  in  the 
roots,    for   after  January  it  ascends   again 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  llS 

into  the  trunk  and  branches,  at  which  time  it 
is  improper  to  gather  stocks  or  tops.  Let 
your  stocks  be  taper  grown,  and  your  tops 
the  best  rush  ground  shoots  you  can  get,  not 
knotty,  but  proportionable  and  slender, 
otherwise  they  will  neither  cast  nor  strike 
well. 

Having  gathered  your  stocks  and  tops  all 
in  one  season,  as  straight  as  you  can,  bathe 
them  over  a  gentle  fire,  and  set  them  as 
straight  as  possible ;  then  lay  them  aside  for 
three  or  four  days,  after  which  rub  them 
over  with  a  piece  of  flannel  dipped  in  linseed 
oil,  which  will  polish  them  and  fetch  off  the 
superfluous  bark,  if  any ;  tie  them  quite 
straight  and  so  keep  them  till  the  spring, 
when  they  will  be  seasoned  for  use. 

When  your  rod  is  completed, ,  varnish  it 
oyer  neatly,  making  your  varnish  of  a  pint 
of  linseed  oil  and  sixpennyworth  of  India- 
rubber  scraped  fine,  put  them  over  a  slow 
fire  and  stir  them  well  together  till  the  rub- 
L  3 


il4  THE    DRIFXaELD    ANGLER. 

ber  is  dissolved,  then  boil  and  skim  it ;  use 
it  warm,  and  lay  the  rod  aside  till  quite  dry ; 
it  will  appear  on  the  rod  like  a  fine  thin 
bark,  is  very  durable,  and  will  preserve  it 
from  other  injuries.  If  the  rod  is  a  hollow 
one,  tie  a  rag  to  the  end  of  a  stick,  dip  it  in 
linseed  oil,  and  rub  the  inside  well  about 
three  times  a  year. 

OF  THE   LINE. 

Your  lines,  whether  for  running  or  float- 
fishing,  are  best  made  of  horse  hair,  unless 
you  fish  for  Barbel,  when  they  should  be 
niade  of  silk,   or  silk  and  hair  mixed,  and 
must  be  proportioned  to  the  general  size  of 
the  fish  you  expect;    always  remembering 
that  the  single  hair,  or  gut,  is  to  be  preferred 
for  small  Trout,  Salmon-smelts,  Roacli,   or 
Dace  fishing.    The  reel-line  must   be  very 
strong,  and  for  the  greater  facility  in  throw- 
ing, should  be  from  sixteen  to  eighteen  hairs 
at  the  top,  and  diminished  gradually ;  there 
are  lines  to  be  had  at  tlie  tackle-shops  that 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  115 

have  no  joints,  but  are  wove  in  one  piece 
from  fifteen  yards  to  twenty  or  thirty,  and 
from  that  to  one  hundred  and  fifty,  which 
length  will  be  required  for  Sahnon-fishing  in 
very  broad  river:  :  but  notwithstanding  these 
improvements,  should  you  choose  to  make 
your  own  lines  in  preference  to  those  twisted 
with  the  fingers,  I  would  recommend  the  use 
of  an  engine,  which  may  be  had  at  any  of 
the  shops,  consisting  of  a  large  horizontal 
wheel,  and  three  very  small  ones,  inclosed  in 
a  brass  box  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  thick, 
and  two  inches  ui  diameter  ;  the  axis  of  each 
of  the  small  wheels  is  continued  through  the 
under  side  of  the  box,  and  formed  into  a 
hook  ;  by  means  of  a  strong  screw  it  may  be 
fixed  in  any  strong  post,  and  is  set  in  motion 
by  a  small  winch  in  the  centre  of  the  box. — 
To  twist  links  with  the  engine,  take  as  many 
hairs  as  you  intend  each  shall  consist  o1^'  and 
dividing  them  into  three  parts,  tie  each  par- 
cel to  a  bit  of  fine  twine  about  eight  inches 
long,  doubled  and  put  through  the  aforesaid 
hook ;  then  take  a  piece  of  wood,  or  corkj  of 


116  THE    DIUFFIELD    ANGLER. 

a  conical  figure,  two  inches  high,  and  two  irl 
diameter  at  the  base,  with  a  hook  at  the 
point ;  tie  your  three  parcels  of  hair  into  one 
knot,  and  hang  them  on  the  weight :  next 
cut  three  groves  at  equal  distances  in  the 
sides  of  a  common  bottle  cork,  and  placing 
it  so  as  to  receive  each  division  of  hair,  begin 
to  twist,  which  you  will  find  to  proceed  with 
great  evenness  at  the  lead  ;  as  it  grows  tighter, 
shift  the  cork  a  little  upwards,  and  when  the 
whole  is  sufficiently  twisted  take  out  the  cork, 
and  tie  the  link  into  a  knot :  proceed  in  this 
manner  till  you  have  twisted  links  sufficient 
for  your  line,  observing  to  lessen  the  number 
of  hairs  in  each  link,  in  such  proportion  that 
the  line  may  taper  at  the  bottom  of  your  reel- 
line.  When  you  fish  with  a  fly,  put  about 
three  or  four  yards  of  good  gut  for  the  cast- 
line,  diminishing  by  degrees  to  the  size  of  the 
flylinL  I  have  found,  by  long  experience, 
that  a  grey  line  like  pepper  and  salt  mixed, 
will,  by  its  colour,  best  suit  any  water. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLES.  117 

OF  HOOKS. 

Let  your  hooks  be  made  of  the  best  tern* 
pered  steel  wire,  rather  long  in  the  shank, 
and  strong  and  deepish  in  the  bend,  the 
point  fine  and  straight,  and  as  true  as  can  be 
with  the  shank,  wliich  for  fly-making  should 
be  tapered  at  the  end,  that  the  fly  may  be 
finished  the  neater ;  be  careful  also  that  the 
hook  has  a  good  barb.  The  best  of  this 
kind  that  I  have  seen,  were  made  at  Limer- 
ick in  Ireland. 

OF  FLOATS,  &<;. 

'  They  are  of  many  sorts,  such  as  swan- 
quills,  goose-quills,  Muscovy  duck-quills, 
and  porcupine-quills ;  the  first  of  which  is 
the  best  when  you  use  light  baits  in  rivers  or 
deep  water,  and  the  others  for  slow  water, 
or  ponds,  where  it  is  not  very  deep.  For 
heavy  fishing  with  worm  or  minnoAv,  either 
in  rivers  or  ponds,  a  cork-float  is  preferable, 
and  is  made  of  sound  cork,  without  holes  or 


Il§  THE    DRIFI^IEL1>  ANGLER, 

flaws,  bored  through  with  a  hot  iron,  and 
a  quill  put  into  it  of  a  fit  proportion,  open  at 
each  end  for  the  line  to  run  through ;  cut 
the  cork  of  a  pyramidical  form,  and  make  it 
smooth  with  a  fine  file.  The  quill-floats 
must  carry  shot  enough  so  as  to  sink  them, 
that  you  may  the  better  perceive  the  slightest 
nibble ;  and  as  to  the  cork-floats,  let  there 
be  sufficient  shot  to  make  them  stand  upright 
in  the  water,  when  the  shot  is  at  the  bottom, 
by  which  you  may  know  when  you  fish  there 
or  not ;  for  when  the  shot  is  on  the  ground^ 
the  float  will  fall  on  one  side,  and  not  stand 
up.  When  you  go  out  a  bottom-fishing,  &c. 
you  should  have  with  you  different  kinds  of 
lines,  links,  floats,  and  spare  caps,  split  shot, 
shoe-maker's  wax  in  a  piece  of  leather,  silk, 
a  plummet  to  fix  the  depth  of  the  water,  red 
paste,  gentles  in  a  box,  worms  of  different 
sorts,  ground-baits,  and  a  clearing-ring  to 
disengage  the  hook  when  entangled,  by  run- 
ning it  up  the  rod,  and  gently  down  the  line, 
by  a  strong  twine  long  enough  for  any  such 
purpose^  to  where  the  hook  is  fastened^  if  a 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  1  1^ 

sti*mp  or  Other  immoveable  thing ;  but  if  it 
be  weeds,  let  it  go  below  the  hook,  then  pull 
at  the  twine,  and  the  ring  will  break  the 
weeds  and  save  your  line  and  liook  ;  in  thiQ 
other  case,  if  it  does  not  bring  away  your 
hook,  it  will  break  the  line  near  to  it,  an<3i 
prevent  it  from  being  strained  in  any  other 
place :  a  landing-net  to  land  large  fish  with ; 
some  are  made  with  joints  to  fold  up  for 
convenience :  a  disgorge,  to  put  down  th^ 
throat  of  a  fish  when  he  has  swallowed  the 
book,  till  you  touch  it,  at  the  same  time  pull- 
kig  the  line  it  will  be  free;  and  a  fish- 
basket  to  carry  your  fish  in. 


RULES  FOR  MAKING  FLIES. 

Jl  O  frame  the  little  a^nimal,  proyide 

Ail  the  gay  hues  that  wait  on  fengiale  pride ; 


120  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

Let  nature  guide  thee,   sometimes  golden 

wire, 
The  shining  bellies  of  the  fly  require. 
The  peacock's  plumes  thy  tackle  must  not 

fail, 
Nor  the  dear  purchase  of  the  sable's  tail. 
Each  gaudy  bird  some  slender  tribute  brings, 
And  lends  the  growing  insect  proper  wings. 
Silks  of  all  colours  must  their  aid  impart. 
And  every  fur  promote  the  fisher's  art. 
So  the  gay  lady  with  expensive  care. 
Borrows  the  pride  of  land,  of  sea,  and  air; 
Furs,  pearls,  and  plumes,  the  glittering  thing 

displays, 
Dazzles  our  eyes,  and  easy  hearts  betrays. 

GAY. 

To  make  the  useful  artificial  flies,  furnish 
yourself  with  a  pocket-case,  that  has  many 
partitions  in  it,  capable  of  holding  the  follow 
ing  materials ;  bear's  hair  of  divers  colours, 
such  as  grey,  dun,  light  and  dark  coloured, 
bright  brown,  and  that  whi  ch  shines ;  also 
camel's  hair,  dark,  light,  and  of  a  colour  be- 


I 


THE    DEIFFIELD    ANGLER.  121 

tween  both  ;  badgers  hair  from  the  ear,  light 
and  dark  brown,  blackish,  and  black  ;  hog's 
down,  which  may  be  had  about  Christmas  of 
butchers,  or  rather  of  those  that  make  brawn  ; 
it  should  be  plucked  from  under  the  throat, 
and  other  soft  places  of  the  hog,  and  must 
be  of  the  following  colours,  that  is  to  say, 
black,  red,  whitish,  and  sandy,  and  for  other 
colours  you  may  get  them  dyed ;  seal's  fur  is 
to  be  had  at  the  trunk-makers  ;  get  this  also 
dyed  of  the  colour  of  cow  and  calf's  hair 
in  all  the  different  shades,  from  light  to 
the  darkest  brown ;  never  heed  cow  or 
calf's  hair,  both  ^hich  are  harsh,  and  will 
never  work  kindly  or  lay  handsomely ;  get 
also  mohair,  black,  blue,  purple,  white,  and 
violet ;  camlet,  both  hair  and  worsted,  blue, 
yellow,  dun,  •  light  and  dark  brown,  red, 
violet,  purple,  black,  pink,  and  orange  co- 
lours :  some  recommend  the  hair  of  abortive 
colts  and  calves,  but  seal's  fur,  dyed  as 
above,  is  much  better ;  and  observe,  that 
hog's  wool  is  best  for  large,  and  the  seal's  fur« 
for  small,  flies. 

M 


132  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEK. 

A  piece  of  an  old  Turkey  carpet  will  fur- 
nish excellent  dubbing  ;  untwist  the  yarn  and 
pick  out  the  wool,  carefully  separating  the 
different  colours^  and  lay  it  by. 

Get  also  furs  of  the  following  animals,  viz. 
the  squirrel,  (particularly  from  his  tail)  fox- 
cub,  from  the  tail,  where  downy  and  of  ash 
cotour  ;  an  old  fox  and  an  old  otter;  otter'S- 
cub  ;  badger;  pole-cat;  the  fur  of  a  hare 
from  the  neck,  where  it  is  of  the  colour  of 
Avithered  fern ;  and  above  all  the  yellow  fur 
of  the  martern,  from  off  the  gills  or  spots 
under  the  jaws  ;  all  these,  and  almost  every 
other  kind  of  fur,  are  easily  obtained  at  the 
furriers. 

Hackles  are  very  important  articles  in  fly- 
making  ;  the  chief  ones  are  the  long  slender 
feathers  that  hang  from  the  head  of  a  cock 
down  his  neck ;  there  are  also  fine  ones  to 
be  got  from  near  his  tail,  and  be  careful  they 
are  not  too  rank,  which  they  are  when  the 
fibres  are  more  than  half  an  inch  long,  and 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER,  123 

for  some  purposes  these  are  much  too  large  ; 
be  provided  with  these  of  the  following  co- 
lours, viz.  red,  dun^  yellowish,  white,  orange, 
and  perfect  black  ;  and  whenever  you  meet 
with  a  live  or  a  dead  cock  of  the  game  breeds 
whose  hackle  is  of  a  strong  brown  red,  never 
fail  to  buy  him;  but  observe,  the  feathers  of 
a  cock  chicken,  be  they  ever  so  fine  for 
shape  and  colour,  are  good  for  little,  as  they 
are  too  downy  and  weak  to  stand  erect  after 
they  are  once  wet.  Feathers  absolutely  ne- 
cessary for  the  wings  and  other  parts  of  flies, 
are  got  from  the  back  and  other  parts  of  the 
wild  mallard,  or  drake ;  the  feathers  of  a 
partridge,  especially  those  red  ones  that  are 
in  the  tails  ;  feathers  from  a  cock  pheasant's 
breast,  tail  and  wings ;  the  wings  of  a  black- 
bird, a  brown  hen,  starling,  jay,  land-rail  or 
throstle,  fieldfare,  and  water-^coot ;  the  fea- 
thers from  the  crown  of  the  pewet,  plover^ 
or  lapwing,  green  and  copper-coloured  pea- 
cock and  black  ostrich's  harl ;  feathers  from 
9,  heron's  neck  and  wings;  and  remember 
that  in  most  instg,nces  where  the  fjrake  oy 
M2 


124  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

wild  mallard's  feather  is  hereafter  directed^ 
that  from  a  starling's  wing  will  do  much  bet- 
ter, as  being  of  a  finer  grain  and  less  spongy. 
Be  provided  with  marking  silk  of  all  colours, 
fine  and  very  strong ;  flaw  silk,  gold  and 
silver  flatted  wire  and  twisted,  a  sharp  knife, 
hooks  of  all  sizes,  silk-worm  gut,  India-weed, 
and  the  best  white  and  grey  horse  hair 
for  links  to  your  flies,  shoe-maker's  wax,  a 
large  needle  to  raise  your  dubbing  when  flat- 
ted with  working,  and  a  small  sharp  pair  of 
scissors ;  and,  lastly,  if  any  materials  requir- 
ed in  the  subsequent  list  of  flies,  may  have 
been  omitted  in  the  foregoing  catalogue,  be 
careful  to  add  them  to  your  former  stock,  so 
often  as  you  shall  find  any  such  omissions. 

Remember  with  all  your  dubbing  to  mix 
bear's  hair  and  hog's  wool,  which  are  stiff, 
and  not  apt  to  imbibe  the  water,  as  the  fine 
furs  and  most  other  kinds  of  dubbing  do ; 
also  that  the  martern's  fur  should  be  the  best 
yellow :  when  the  angler  is  furnished  with 
these  materials,  he  may  make   any  sort  of 


THE    PIiIFFJ|:X.X)    ANGLKR.  Igi 

artificial  flies  to  represent  thpse  which  he 
shall  perceive  Trout,  or  ot^eriish^  to  rise  at : 
observe,  th^t  usually  the  smallest  flies  are  th^ 
best,  also  that  the  light  fly  generally  makes 
the  most  sport  in  a  dark  day,  and  the  darkest 
and  least  fly  iu  a  bright  day;  but  particularly 
observe  to  make  your  flies  lighter  or  saddef 
according  to  the  weather,  or  your  fancy. 

In  making  artificial  dub-flies,  imitate  the 
belly  of  the  fly,  for  that  the  fish  t^-ke  most 
notice  of,  as  heiog  more  in  their  sight,  and 
liet  the  wings  of  the  fly  always  |be  of  an  equal 
length,  or  it  will  not  swim  right  and  true. 
When  you  try  how  to  fit  the  colour  of  the  fly^, 
wet  the  dubbing,  lest  you  be  mistaken ;  for 
though  when  dry  they  exactly  suit  the  colour 
pf  the  fly,  yet  the  water  alters  most  colours. 
Always  make  your  dub-flies  on  a  sun-shiny 
day ;  and  to  know  the  exact  colour  of  youf 
dubbing,  hold  it  betwixt  your  eye  and  the 
sun. 

Let  not  the  tail  of  your  dub-fly  descend  to 
M3 


126  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

the  bend  of  the  hook,  and  never  into  the 
bend  itself,  as  some  practise.  When  Trout 
often  shew  themselves  at  your  fly,  and  do 
not  take  it,  be  assured  that  either  the  day  or 
water  is  improper  for  fly  angling ;  or  which 
is  far  more  probable,  that  your  fly  is  not  of 
the  right  colour  and  shape  they  then  covet. 

Flies  made  of  the  skins  of  bears,  hogs, 
squirrels,  camels,  seals  dogs,  foxes,  badgers, 
otters,  ferrets,  cows,  calves,  &c.  are  more 
natural,  lively,  and  keep  their  colour  better 
in  the  water  than  flies  made  of  crewels,  and 
worsted  stuffs^  unless  you  mingle  hairs  there- 
with. 

The  feather  got  from  the  quill  of  a  shep- 
stare,  or  starling's  wing,  is. the  best  feather 
generally  to  use  for  dub-flies'  wings ;  next  are 
the  feathers  got  from  the  wings  of  throstles, 
fieldfares,  and  blackbirds ;  also  those  from 
the  back  of  the  wild  mallard,  woodcock's 
wings,  and  from  the  hen  pheasant,  the  softest 
part  of  the  wing  feather. 


I 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  12/ 

THE  BEST  METHODS  OF  COLORING 
GUT  AND  HAIR. 

For  a  broxvn. — Take  some  alum  pound- 
ed, and  boil  it  till  dissolved,  then  add  a 
pound  of  walnut-tree  bark  from  the  branches 
when  the  sap  is  up,  or  the  buds,  or  green 
nuts  ;  boil  it  an  hour,  and  let  it  stand  after 
skimming  about  ten  minutes ;  then  put  in  the 
gut,  or  hair,  for  about  a  minute,  stirring  it 
round,  or  till  you  like  the  colour:  if  you  let 
it  continue  there  too  long,  it  will  become 
dark  and  make  the  hair,  or  gut,  rotten :  I 
think  the  lighter  it  is  tinged  with  this  colour 
the  better.  You  may  also  make  it  brown- 
ish by  steeping  it  in  salt  and  ale. 

For  a  pale  watery  green. — ^Take  a  pint 
of  strong  ale,  half  a  pound  of  soot,  a  small 
quantity  of  the  juice  of  walnut  leaves,  with 
the  like  quantity  of  alum,  put  these  into  a 
pipkin  and  boil  them  together  about  three 
quarters  of  an  hour  ;   having  so  done,    take 


128  THjE    D]aiFFI>EXD    AJJ^GLKU, 

it  off  the  fire,  and  when  nearly  cold  put  in 
your  gut  or  hdr.  Or  this. — Take  two 
quarts  of  alum  water,  somewhat  more  than 
a  handful  of  marigold  flowers,  boil  them  till 
a  yellow  scum  rises ;  then  take  half  a  pound 
of  green  copperas,  with  as  much  verdigrease, 
and  beat  them  together  to  a  fine  powder ; 
put  these,  with  the  gut,  or  hair,  into  the  alum 
water,  aiid  let  it  lay  three  hours,  or  more, 
then  tafce  it  out  and  let  it  dry. 

J^ar  a  bluish  water  co/our.-^Proceed  as 
m  the  iir^t  re4:eipt,  only  add  logwood  instead 
i)f  the  walnut,  being  caxeful  not  to  colour  it 
iQp  much. 

Anothe7\  and  the  best. — Take  about  four 
inches  square  of  green  baize  cloth,  a  quarter 
of  a  pound  of  alum,  boil  them  in  three  pints 
of  soft  water  half  an  hour  slowly,  let  it  stand 
till  near  cold;  then  put  your  gut,  or  hair,  in  for 
an  hour,  and  if  it  is  too  bright  a  green,  take 
some  ink  and  give  it  what  shade  you  please 
between  a  green  and  bluish  water  colouf. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  129 


CHAPTER    XL 


OF  SALMON  FLIES. 

it  HESE,  for  the  spring  season,  must  be 
made  much  larger,  but  not  quite  so  gaudy 
as  those  used  in  summer,  viz.  let  the  hook 
be  No.  i,  the  shank  three  inches  or  more  in 
length,  and  small  at  the  ^nd,  in  order  that 
the  head  of  the  fly  may  be  made  the  neater  : 
the  feather  for  the  wings,  the  darkish  brown 
speckled,  from  the  turkey's  tail,  and  mixed 
with  about  twelve  harls  from  the  peacock's 
tail,  dividing  them  that  there  may  be  six  in 
each  wing;  the  next  feathers  for  wings  to 
these  large  flies,  are  kite,  buzzard,  bittern, 
and  heron's  wings.  The  body  of  the  first 
fly,  called  the  tartan-fly,  is  of  four,  five  or 
more  different  colours,  yellow,  light  blue, 
green,  dark  red,  orange,  and  purple,  and  as 


ISO  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

many  more  colours  as  the  fancy  may  lead  the 
angler  to ;  for  the  fork,  or  tails,  use  the  dark 
mottled  feather  from  behind  the  wild  mal- 
lard's wings,  and  a  black  and  red  cock's 
hackle  over  the  body,  for  the  legs  and  head. 

Hozo  to  make  the  Tartan-fly, — Take  three 
lengths  of  strong  silk-worm  gut,  properly 
twisted  together,  and  having  your  silk  well 
waxed  (which  must  be  of  a  light  brown  cop- 
per colour)  whip  it  round  your  gut  six  or 
seven  times,  about  an  inch,  or  more,  from 
the  end,  which  will  prevent  the  shank  of  the 
hook  from  galling  it ;  then  take  the  hook, 
and  put  the  end  of  the  shank  nearly  to  the 
top  of  the  silk,  that  the  gut  may  be  on  the 
inside,  and  begin  to  whip  the  hook  to  it,  bwt 
desist  when  you  have  gone  about  half  a 
dozen  rounds;  then  having  a  proper  quantity 
of  feather  ready  for  the  wings,  take  it  and 
lay  it  on  the  back  of  the  shank  (keeping  it 
close  together,  and  as  even  as  you  can) 
with  the  right  side  next  the  hook,  and  the 
biit-end  downwarcj^,    leaving  the  other  end 


"VllE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLEll.  ISl 

to  be  (when  turned  back  again)  full  as  long 
as  the  hook ;  then  go  on  witli  your  silk,  and 
whip  it  round  your  feather,  hook,  and  gut, 
six  or  eight  times,  or  sufficient  to  make  it 
fast,  and  with  a  pair  of  fine  scissors  cut  away 
what  remains  of  the  but-end  of  the  feather, 
taking  care  not  to  hurt  the  gut,  which  must 
be  opened  and  twisted  round  the  shank  of 
the  hook  as  you  go  on  with  the  whipping, 
which  is  to  be  continued  till  it  nearly  comes 
opposite  the  point  of  the  hook  (but  you 
must  cut  off  the  ends  of  the  gut  before  they 
come  quite  so  low  down,  if  found  too  long)  ; 
next  put  on  your  strips  of  feather  for  the 
forks  at  the  tail,  with  the  fine  points  down- 
wards, leaving  them  both  exactly  the  same 
length,  rather  more  than  an  inch  long,  and  to 
stand  open  and  make  two  laps  round  with 
the  silk ;  then  take  the  hackle  (which  must 
be  ready  prepared  by  stripping  off  the  downy 
part  at  top,  and  cutting  the  feather  across  on 
each  side  near  to  the  stem,  about  two  or 
three  tenths  of  an  inch  from  the  point,  or  by 
drawing  the  fibres  back  to   prevent  any  of 


132  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

them  from  being  bound  down  by  the  silk) 

and  whip  in  the  point  of  it  two  or  three  times 

round,   leaving   the  largest    end   and   gold 

hanging  downwards,  and  the  right  uppermost, 

making  one  lap  round  between  it  and  the 

fork,  and  one  below  all  round  the  bare  hook, 

tight  and  close  to  the  fork,   and  cut  off  the 

superfluous  ends  of  it,  if  any  remain  in  sight ; 

then  wax  your  silk  afresh,  and  having  your 

stuff  for  the  body,  all  the  different  colours 

separate,  take  first  of  the  brightest  yellow 

hog's  wool,  and  twist  as  much  of  i    on  the 

silk  as  will  make  four  or  five  laps  round  the 

hook,   then  as  much  more  of  dark  red,   of 

the  same  wool,  twist  on  the  silk  and  make 

five  or  six  laps  at  the  end  of  the  yellow ;  then 

take  as  much  of  green  and  do  it  as  before 

with  five  laps,  and  as  much  of  light  blue  in 

the  same  way ;  as  much  dark  orange  done  in 

the  same  way,  and  as  much  black   as  will 

bring  j^ou  up  to  the  wings,  then  fasten ;  take 

your  needle  and  prick  the  body  all  round, 

'and  make  it  even  and  straight;   then  take 

your  gold  plaiting,  or  twist,  that  hangs  at  ihe 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  133 

bend  of  the  hook,  and  work  it  gradually  up- 
wards till  you  come  close  up  to  the  feather 
for  the  wings,  and  fasten ;  then  take  your 
hackle  and  work  it  up  neatly  between  the 
lappings  of  gold,  till  you  come  close  to  the 
but  of  the  wings,  make  all  fast  by  two  or 
three  laps,  and  if  any  of  the  fibres  remain, 
strip  them  off  from  the  stem  ;  and  untwist- 
ing the  silk  to  its  proper  place,  make  two  or 
three  laps  to  fasten  the  hackle,  and  cut  away 
what  remains  of  the  stem ;  then  take  the 
feather  for  the  wings,  which  has  lain  back 
all  this  time,  and  turn  it  down  towards  the  tail 
of  the  fly,  and  holding  it  down  tightish,  with 
the  rest  between  your  finger  and  thumb, 
having  all  the  part  of  the  hackle  out  of  the 
way,  whip  it  two  or  three  times  round  with 
the  silk  just  over  the  feather  very  tight,  and 
then  two  or  three  laps  close  above  it ;  wax 
the  silk  again  a  little,  and  take  a  bit  of 
copper-coloured  mohair,  and  twist  it  thin  on 
your  silk,  and  begin  at  the  end  of  the  hook 
and  lap  it  neatly  four  or  five  times  up  to  the 
back  of  the  wings  ;  make  two  or  three  nooses 

N 


134  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

close  to  the  wings,   and  finish  the  operation 
with  completing  the  head  of  the  fly. 

A  SECOND  FLY  FOR  SALMON. 

Let  the  hook  be  the  same  size  as  the  for- 
mer, No.  1,  only  something  shorter  in  the 
fiJiank ;  the  wings,  the  mottled  feather  from 
the  turkey's  tail,  of  a  reddish  cast ;  the  mix- 
ture for  the  body,  the  light  brown  hair,  or 
fur  of  bear,  mixed  with  dark  brown  hog's 
wool,  and  gold  coloured  mohair,  gold  twist,  a 
large  black  cock's  hackie,  a  red  one  a  little 
larger;  and  for  the  head,  a  bit  of  deep  red 
hog's  wool,  or  mohair. 

How  to  make  it. — Proceed  in  the  same 
manner  as  before  directed,  until  you  come 
opposite  the  point  of  the  hook,  then  ]ay  in 
the  ends  of  your  hackles  and  twist  them  to- 
gether, the  red  one  undermost  and  the  twist 
at  top,  and  after  whipping  them  there,  make 
one  lap  below  them  ;  wax  your  silk  afrqsh^ 
twist  on  the  dubbing  for  the  body,    and  go 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  135 

on  as  in  the  former  case  next  the  twist,  and 
rib  it  up  to  the  wings,  each  lap  about  one 
eighth  of  an  inch  from  the  other,  sloping ; 
then  take  the  black  hackle,  and  work  that 
upwards  between  the  laps  of  the  twist,  rather 
lower  than  the  middle  of  each  space,  and 
bring  it  twice  round,  close  together  at  the  top 
of  the  body ;  and  bringing  on  the  red  hackle 
in  the  same  manner,  w'ork  it  very  neatly  just 
above  each  lap  of  the  black  one,  and  finish 
it  the  same  way,  contriving  to  leave  the  twist 
just  to  show  itself  between  the  hackles,  and 
then  complete  your  fly  as  before  directed. 

A  THIRD  FLY,  CALLED  THE  BLACK 
DOG  IN  SCOTLAND. 

The  hook  No.  1,  and  shank  near  three 
inches  long ;  the  wings,  the  bluish  feather 
from  the  heron's  wing,  intermixed  with  the 
spotted  reddish  ones  of  a  turkey's  tail ;  fea- 
thers for  the  body,  lead  coloured  hog's  soft 
wool  from  under  the  ear,  small  gold  twist,  a 

N  2 


136  TH£    DRIFFIELD    aNGLEK. 

large  black  cock's  hackle ;  the  head,  a  little 
dark  green  mohair,  and  dark  green  silk. 

Hoxv  to  make  it, — Proceed  in  the  same 
way  as  before,  whipping  the  points  of  the 
hackle  and  gold  before  you  come  opposite 
the  point  of  the  hook  ;  wax  your  silk  afresh, 
twist  on  your  dabbing  for  the  body,  and  go 
on  a;s  in  the  former  case,  twisting  it  neatly 
round  the  silk ;  lap  it  smooth  and  even  alike 
up  to  the  wings;  the  body  of  this  fly  is  all 
of  a  thickness  from  head  to  tail ;  take  the 
twist  and  lap  it  up  neatly  about  two  tenths 
of  an  inch  from  each  other,  sloping  up  to  the 
wangs,  make  one  noose ;  then  take  the  hackle 
and  work  it  upwards  between  each  lap  of 
the  gold  twist,  till  you  come  to  the  but  of  the 
wings ;  make  the  stem  fast  by  two  laps  and  a 
noose,  cut  away  what  remains  of  the  stem ; 
then  take  your  needle  and  put  your  hackle 
in  order,  bring  the  wings  forward,  divide 
them  with  the  gold  twist  that  hangs  at  the 
shoulders,  bringing  it  three  or  four  times 
backwards  and  forwards  between  the  wings, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  13/ 

making  it  appear  as  much  as  possible  about 
the  head  ;  wax  your  silk,  and  twist  a  little 
cfrecn  mohair  on  the  silk,  and  finish  the  head 
of  your  fly.  Here  you  have  the  very  best 
fly  from  the  middle  of  April  till  about  the 
last  week  in  May,  that  can  be  fished  with  in 
any  river  in  the  united  kingdom. 

I  have  killed,  on  the  river  Tay,  in  one 
day,  twelve  Salmon,  near  Lord  Bredalbane^S, 
that  weighed  together  eighteen  stone,  with 
this  fly  only.  I  have  had  most  excellent 
sport  on  the  Spay,  Dee,  and  Don,  and  almost 
every  Salmon-river  in  the  north;  and  par- 
ticularly on  the  river  Aw,  which  runs  into 
the  Sound  of  Mull,  in  the  west  of  Scotland, 
jfend  one  of  the  best  Salmon-fisheries  in  the 
kingdom. 

A  FOURTH  FLY. 

For  this  fly,  hook  No.  ^;  the  w^ing^  a 
speckled  feather  from  a  kite  or  buzzard's 
wing ;  for  the  body,  light  blue  hog's  wool, 
N  3 


138  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

and  a  little  lead-coloured  mohair  mixed, 
small  gold  twist,  a  large  white  cock's  hackle, 
dyed  a  darkish  blue,  four  strips  of  the  cop- 
per-coloured feather  of  the  mallard  for  the 
forks  ;  the  head  a  little  of  the  same  as  the 
body,  and  your  silk  a  dark  bhie  colour. 

Ho7o  to  make  it. — Proceed  the  same  way 
as  before  described,  until  you  come  opposite 
the  point  of  tlie  hook,   whipping  in  the  point 
of  the  hackle,   and  going  a  few  laps,  then 
take  the  twist  and  the  strips  for  the  forks, 
whip  in  the  twist  and  forks ;  wax  your  silk, 
twist  the  dubbing  even  on  the  silk,  leaving 
it  fine  next  the  hook,   but  gradually  thicken- 
ing upwards;  make  one  lap  below  the  fork, 
and  one  or  two,   as  required,  between  that 
and  the  hackle,  and  work  it  gradually  up- 
wards  till  you  come   close  to  the  feather 
for  the  wings;   if  any  of  the  fur  remains  on 
the  silk  after  you  have  thus  formed  the  body, 
take  it  off,  and  wind  your  silk  lightly  a  little 
upwards  to  be  out  of  the  way;  then  take  the 
hackle  by  the  end  of  the  stem,  and  rib  it 


THE    DRTFFIELB    ANGLER.  13^ 

neatly,  lapping  it  thicker  as  you  go  on,  till 
you  bring  it  up  to  the  wings ;  fasten  the  stein 
by  two  laps  close  to  the  wings,  bring  them 
forward  to  the  bend  of  the  hook,  divide  them 
and  make  two  or  three  laps  between  tiie 
wings,  and  two  laps  behind  the  wings,  to 
throw  them  forward,  and  to  lay  as  flat  as  you 
can  on  the  back  of  the  hook ;  then  take  a 
little  of  the  dubbing,  the  same  as  the  body, 
twist  it  very  thin  on  the  silk,  lap  it  three  or 
four  times  at  the  back  of  the  wings,  making 
three  nooses  close  to  the  wings,  cut  off  the 
silk,  take  your  needle  and  put  your  fly  to 
rights,  and  your  work  is  completed. 

A  FIFTH  FLY. 

Take  for  this  fly,  hook  No.  2,  the  length 
about  two  inches ;  for  the  wings,  the  mottled 
grey  feather  from  the  turkey's  tail ;  for  the 
body,  two  strands  of  the  copper-coloured 
feather  from  the  peacock's  tail,  and  two  of 
green  plover's,  or  lapwing's,  topping,  narrow 
silver  plaiting,  dark  red  silk^  two  forks  ap 


140  TTIE    DllIFFXELD    ANGLER. 

inch  and  a  quarter  long  from  the  tail  fea- 
ther of  a  cock  pheasant,  and  a  dark  tinged 
cock's  hackle. 

Proceed  in  the  same  way  as  before,  whip- 
ping in  the  hackle  a  little  before  you  come 
opposite  the  point  of  the  hook,  give,  two  or 
three  laps,  take  the  plaiting  and  the  strips 
for  the  forks,  whip  in  the  end  of  the  feathers 
and  plaiting  together,  cut  away  the  end  of 
the  feather ;  take  the  peacock  harl  and  plov- 
er's feather,  twist  them  and  the  silk  together, 
then  w^ork  it  up  neatly,  leaving  it  fine  next 
the  hook,  but  gradually  thickening  upwards 
to  the  wings ;  having  fastened  as  before,  take 
tlie  plaiting,  make  tw^o  laps  with  it  close  be- 
low the  forks,  that  they  may  stand  up  and 
separate,  and  the  points  even,  then  give  one 
lap  above  it,  rib  the  plaiting  neatly  up  to  the 
wings,  about  the  eighth  of  an  mch  between 
each  lap,  sloping,  fasten :  the  plaiting  by  a 
lap  and  one  ooose ;  next  work,  up  the  hackle 
-neatly  between  each  lap  of  the  plaiting,  till 
you  qome  to  tbe,  wings,  then  give  the  hackle 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  141 

tvro  turns,  fasten  the  stem,  and  cut  away 
what  remains  of  it;  take  a  peacock's  hackle 
and  finish  the  head  of  the  fly,  take  your 
needle  and  put  all  in  order ;  this  is  a  very 
killing  fly,  but  best  in  bright  weather. 

A  SIXTH,  CALLED  THE  GOLDEN 
FLY. 

For  this  fly,  a  hook  No.  3^  the  shank  near 
two  inches  in  length;  the  wings  from  the 
golden  pheasant,  the  common  pheasant,  the 
parrot,  the  peacock's  harl  from  the  tail,  the 
turkey's  mottled  feather  from  the  tail,  and 
two  blue  mottled  feathers  from  the  jay's^ 
wings,  one  placed  on  each  side  of  the  wings,, 
with  the  mottled  side  downwards ;  it  must  be 
made  very  soft  with  your  finger  and  thumb, 
not  breaking  the  crust  of  the  stem  that  may 
lay  more  flat  down  to  the  other  part  of  th^ 
wings;  it  must  be  lapped  on,  before  you  finish 
the  head,  by  itself;  all  the  other  feathers 
must  be  mixed  equally  alike,  and  a  middling 
l&rge  wing,  but  not  longer  than  to  the  end  Qi 


14%  TftE    I^RIFFIELD  ANGLEKv 

the  hook ;  finish  the  head  with  a  very  little 
green  mohair ;  the  body,  broad  gold  plaiting, 
with  a  strong,  bold,  red  cock's  hackle,  ribbed 
with  a  piece  of  dark  green  silk ;  the  body 
must  be  all  of  one  thickness,  about  the  size 
of  a  wheat  straw,  and  made  with  any  kind 
of  thick,  or  round,  silk  ;  at  the  same  time 
lapping  in  the  hackle,  silk,  and  gold  plaiting, 
take  the  plaiting  and  make  two  laps  on  the 
hook  at  the  tail  of  the  fly,  then  lap  the  plait- 
ing side  by  side  till  you  come  to  the  but  of 
the  wings,  and  fasten ;  take  the  green  silk 
and  lap  it  neatly  up,  about  the  eighth  of  am 
inch  slanting  from  each  other,  to  the  wings 
as  before,  and  fasten ;  then  take  the  hackle, 
with  both  the  sides  on,  and  lap  it  neatly  be- 
tween every  lap  of  the  silk,  and  giving  two 
laps  under  the  wings  fasten  your  hackle; 
then  bring  the  wings  forward,  pressing  them 
down  to  the  tail  of  the  fly,  divide  the  wings 
into  two  equal  parts ;  take  your  silk,  well 
waxed,  and,  crossing  it  three  or  four  timea 
between  them,  make  two  or  three  laps  behind 
the  wings,  in  order  to  throw  them  forward:^^ 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  143 

and  lay  rather  flat  on  the  back  of  the  fly 
than  otherwise  ;  for  the  head  take  the  ruddy 
harl  of  a  peacock's  feather,  and  finish  as 
before. 

A  SEVENTH,  CALLED  THE  SILVER 
FLY. 

Made  as  the  golden  Jlij.  —  For  this  fly, 
hook  No.  3  or  4,  the  shank  nearly  the  same 
length  as  the  last,  also  the  same  wings ;  the 
body,  silver  plaiting,  a  bit  of  green  silktorit^ 
^  with,  and  light  blue  cock's  hackle;  finish 
the  head  with  the  ruddy  of  peacock,  as 
before-mentioned.  They  are  both  to  be  used 
from  the  middle  of  June  till  the  latter  end  of 
August,  when  the  waters  are  low  and  fine ; 
after  that  time  yon  must  return  to  your 
spring  flies :  yet,  if  the  weather  and  waters 
continue  fine,  they  will  take  the  last  four 
flies  till  the  middle  of  September. 

The  same  sort  of  flies  are  used  for  Salmon- 
trout,   and  other  fish  of  the  Salmon  kind, 


144  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

(at  times)  only  smaller  hooks.  No.  4,  5,  and 
6;  though  they  will  often  take  very  small 
Trout-flies,  with  which  I  have  killed  dozens 
of  them  in  a  day,  on  the  Tweed  and  Whiteter, 
five  miles  above  Berwick,  which  is  one  of 
the  best  small  rivers  in  the  North  for  this 
sort  of  fishing,  and  affords  most  excellent 
sport  to  the  angler. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  145 

CHAPTER    XIL 

DESCRIPTION  OF    THE 

AUTIFICIAIL  FI.IES. 

Proper  to  angle  with' in  the  Dj^iffield  rivers^ 
or  in  any  Trout  atream  in  the  kingdom  ; 

For  every  month  in  the  year,  except  January  and 
December ;  when  the  fish  are  at  spawn,  and  it  is 
highly  unfair  to  take  them ;  nor  indeed  would  the 
true  sportsman  attempt  to  angle  for  more  than  six 
months,  viz.  from  Lady-day  to  Michaelmas. 

FEBPJJAllY. 

No.  \,  A  H E  palmer-fly y  or  plain-hackle,^ 
The  body  is  made  of  black  hog's  wool,  dark 
red  silk,  dark  red  cock's  hackle  over  all ; 
hook  No.  6,  and  made  in  this  manner :  In 

O 


M6  the    DftlFFlKLD    ANGLtK, 

whipping  on  the  hook,  lap  in  the  point  of  the 
liackle ;  when  you  have  gone  ahout  halfway, 
wax  your  silk,  and  likewise  at  the  bottom 
wax  your  silk,  and  twist  on  your  dubbing 
very  thin  towards  the  tail,  and  gradually 
thicken  it  up  to  the  body,  within  the  tenth  of 
an  inch  of  the  end,  and  fasten ;  put  the  body 
in  order  with  your  needle,  then  begin  to  lap 
the  hackle,  and  as  you  -go  up  lap  it  thicker, 
and  take  two  turns  close  together,  at  the  top 
make  a  lap;  and  two  or  three  nooses,  and  cut 
the  silk  off;  take  your  needle  and  put  tfie 
hackle  in  order,  with  your  finger  and  thumb 
of  the  right  hand  turn  the  hackle  towards  the 
tail  of  the  fly,  pressing  it  close  down  to  the 
hook  on  all  sides,  which  finishes  the  fly.  It 
is  in  season  all  the  month,  and  until  the 
middle  of  March. 

Ko*  2.  7Jie  gold'hackle. — The  body  black 
spaniers  ear,  dark  yellow  silk  ribbed  over 
with  gold  twist,  and  dark,  black,  red,  or 
tinged  cock's  hackle  over  all ;  it  is  made  in 
the  same  way  as  the  palmer. 


THK    PllIFFlELD    ANGLER.  147 

No.  3.  The  black-wing-hackle. — The 
wings,  the  light  part  of  a  feather  from  the 
stare  or  starling's  wings,  stripped  off  from  the 
stem ;  the  body,  black  water-dog's  fur,  and 
black  hackle  over  it,  and  is  made  thus  :  tak^ 
a  good  even  silk-worm  gut,  a  hook  No.  6  or 
7,  and  proceed  as  with  the  Salmon-flies,  al- 
ways observing  to  keep  the  feather  close  to- 
gether, even  and  level  at  the  points,  laying 
it  on  (as  before)  with  the  wrong  side  upper- 
most ;  when  you  come  to  use  the  fur  for  the 
body,  lay  it  on  very  thin  and  neat,  and  work 
the  hackle,  which  must  be  suited  in  size,  neat- 
ly over  it  till  it  comes  up  to  the  wings,  thea 
bring  it  twice  round,  but  if  there  be  too 
iftijijch  strip  it  qff;  whip  the  stem  fast,  a;nd 
cutting  9.way  the  end  that  remains,  take  your 
needle  and  divide  the  feather  for  the  winss 
into  two  parts,  as  equal  as  possible,  and 
bring  that  part  nearest  you  by  turning  it 
downwards,  and  holding  it  a  little  tight  and 
smooth,  give  it  three  or  four  laps  just  ov.^ 
tlie  feather,  as  near  the  top  of  it  as  you  can, 
so  that  the  silk  may  not  s.l^p  off,  keeping  ali 
02 


148  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

the  points  of  the  hackle  downwards  out  of  the 
way ;  then  take  the  other  part,  bringing  it 
down  in  the  same  manner,  and  holding  all 
between  your  finger  and  thumb,  taking  care 
that  no  part  of  the  wings  get  down  too  low 
on  the  sides  ;  whip  them  both  over  together 
the  same  as  at  first,  very  tight,  give  two  laps 
above  them,  and  fasten  by  noosing  your  silk 
two  or  three  times,  which  finishes  the  head 
of  the  fly ;  after  this  is  done,  take  your  needle 
and  put  the  hackle,  &c.  in  order,  with  the 
wings  sloping  towards  the  tail ;  this  way  of 
parting  the  wings  makes  them  look  very  na- 
tural :  those  that  are  made  to  stand  upright, 
or  nearly  so,  affright  instead  of  enticing  the 
fish,  by  the  unnatural  break  in  the  water 
when  moved ;  therefore  the  end  fly  ought  to 
be  fished  with  two  inches  under  the  water. 

No.  4.  The  dark  brown  fly.  — With  dub- 
bing of  the  brown  hair  of  the  flank  of  a  brind- 
led calf,  collected  in  the  spring ;  a  small 
tinged  hackle,  lapped  two  or  three  times  under 
the  wings  with  dark  red  silk ;  the  wings  froiti 


THE    PRIFflELD    ANGLER.  14j9 

the  light  part  of  a  starling's  wing.  This  is 
an  excellent  fly  for  March,  April;  and  part 
of  May,  with  hook  No.  7. 

MARCH. 

In  this  inonth  use  all  the  same  flies^  as  iu 
February,  but  made  less. 

No*  L  The  whirling-dun^ — made  ofthq 
bottom  fur  of  a  squirrel's  tail,  and  mixed 
with  a  little  light  blue  hog's  wool,  or  mohair, 
lapped  on  witli  dusty  yellow  silk ;  the  wing? 
of  starling's  feather. 

^0.  2.  The  early  bright  &row/?,-3rmade 
of  the  down  of  a  dark  red  spaniel's  ear,  and 
a  3ry  small  tinged  hackle,  lapped  two  or 
thr^e  times  under  the  wings;  you  may  fork 
this  .ly  lapped  on  with  copper-coloured  silk ; 
the  wings,  the  light  mottled  feather  of  the 
pheasant  hen's  wing,  the  hook  No.  7 ;  a 
good  fly  all  the  mon  h,  and  until  the  middle 
of  April. 

O  3 


150  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

No.  3.  The  little  bright  broxon^ — taken 
from  the  middle  of  the  month  to  the  middle 
of  April ;  made  of  a  light  brown  dubbing 
from  the  spaniel's  ear,  and  mixed  with  yellow 
mohair,  lapped  with  yellow  silk,  and  two 
forks  at  his  tail ;  the  wings  from  the  light 
feather  of  a  jay's  wing ;  the  hook  No.  9- 

No.  4.  The  whitest  dun^ — made  of  the 
roots  of  camel's  hair,  lapped  with  ash  colour- 
ed silk,  and  a  light  grey  pheasant  hen's  fea- 
ther ;  the  hook  No.  9.  In  the  forenoon  it  is 
taken  from  ten  till  one  o'clock. 

No.  5.  The  latter  bright  brown, — taken 
from  thQ  middle  of  March  till  the  latter  end 
of  April,  and  made  with  dubbing  of  bright 
copper-coloured  mohair,  lapped  with  red 
silk  and  a  tinge  hackle  all  over  the  body, 
and  a  woodcock's  wing  feather,  or  brown 
hen's  wing ;  the  wings  very  little  longer  than 
the  body,  and  a  hook  No.  7.  It  is  one  of 
the  best  flies  we  have. 


i 


THE   DRIFFIELD    ANGLER,  151 

APRIL. 

The  same  hackles  and  flies  that  are  used 
in  March,  are  taken  in  April  also,  with  this 
difference  only,  that  all  the  browns  be  lapped 
with  copper-coloured  silk,  and  the  duns  with 
yellow  silk.  I  shall  add  to  these  the  flies 
peculiar  to  this  month. 

No.  1.  The  small  bright  brown, —  made 
of  a  spaniel's  fur,  from  the  point  of  the  ear, 
which  is  much  weather-beaten,  with  a  yellow 
cast,  and  copper-coloured  silk,  and  a  light 
starling's  wing ;  to  be  used  in  clear  water  : 
the  hook  No.  9. 

No.  2.  The  great  whirling  dun, — taken 
from  about  the  tenth  of  this  month  to  the 
first  week  in  May,  from  eleven  until  two 
o'clock ;  and,  at  times,  from  thence  to  th» 
first  of  July,  in  most  rivers;  and  is  com- 
monly made  of  the  down  of  a  fox's  cub, 
which  is  of  an  ash-colour  at  the  roots,  lap- 


153  THE    DJilFFIELD    AXtJLER, 

ped  with  yellow  silk;  the  wing,  of  the  pale 
grey  feather  of  a  mallard,  very  little  longer 
than  the  body. 

Jn  entire  new  method  of  making  it. — 
Take  a  small  even  silk-worm  gut,  and  half  a 
yard  of  fine  yellow  silk  well  waxed,  with 
hook  No.  7  or  8,  and  proceed  thus :  take 
the  hook  between  the  finger  and  thumb  of 
your  left  hand,  take  your  silk  and  make  two 
laps  round  the  hook,  within  the  tenth  of  an 
inch  of  the  bend,  wax  the  end  of  the  gut 
and  lay  it  on  the  inside  of  the  shank  ;  if  you 
mean  to  fork  it,  take  two  fibres  of  the  cop- 
per-coloured feather  of  the  mallard,  and  lay 
them  on  the  back  of  the  hook,  leaving  them 
a  proper  length ;  then  begin  to  lap  the  gut  to 
ithe  hook  all  the  way  up  till  you  come  within 
Jhe  tenth  of  an  inch  of  the  end  of  the  shank; 
iWax  your  silk,  and  having  the  feather  for  the 
#v^ings  ready,  taking  care  the  points  are  even, 
lay  them  on  the  back  of  the  hook,  keeping 
.them  close  together  and  even  with  the  right 
s^de  next  the  hook,  and  the  but-ends  down- 


THE    DRIFFIELD   AITGLER.  153 

wards,  leaving  the  others  (when  turned  back 
again)  to  come  near  the  bend  of  the  hook; 
take  your  needle  and  divide  the  wings,  and 
with  your  silk,  bringing  it  two  or  three  times 
backwards  and  forwards  between  them,  make 
one  noose  behind  the  wing ;  w^ax  your  silk, 
bring  the  wings  forward  and  press  them  down 
close  to  the  back  of  the  hook,  with  the  finger 
and  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  taking  fast  hold 
of  them  with  the  left  finger  and  thumb  ;  then 
take  the  silk,  and  what  remains  of  the  shank, 
which  should  be  no  more  than  about  the 
twelfth  of  an  inch,  make  two  or  three  laps, 
till  all  the  end  be  taken  up ;  turn  the  silk 
back  to  the  wings,  and  make  two  nooses 
close  to  the  back  of  them,  which  will  throw 
the  wings  quite  forwards  to  the  bend,  and 
make  them  stand  in  their  proper  places; 
having  the  dubbing  ready  for  the  body,  twirl 
it  thin  and  neatly  on  the  silk,  but  remember 
that  it  is  to  be  thicker  on  the  silk  for  the 
first  three  or  four  turns  under  the  wings,  in 
order  to  thicken  the  shoulder  of  the  fly ;  then 
let  the  silkj  &c.  be  thinly  covered  with  the 


154  THE   DRIFFIELD  ANGLER. 

dubl)ing,  and  lap  it  neatly  down  to  the  tail  of 
the  %,  side  by  side ;  make  a  lap  round  the 
tail,  and  strip  off  what  remains  on  the  silk  of 
the  dubbing;  wax  your  silk,  and  make  two  or 
three  neat  nooses  at  the  tail,  and  then  cut  off 
the  silk ;  take  your  needle  and  pick  out  as 
much  of  the  dubbing  as  will  cover  the  tail  of 
the  fly  ;  with  your  needle  put  the  body  into 
proper  form  all  the  way  up  to  the  wings, 
leaving  part  of  the  dubbing  for  feet,  but 
those  that  do  not  stand  in  their  place  on  the 
body,  or  feet,  take  them  ^way  with  the  tweez- 
er^. Here  you  will  have  finished  one  of  the 
neatest  dubb-flies  that  can  be  made  with 
hands. 

When  I  make  winged-hackles,  palmers^ 
and  diubb-fl.ies,  I  begin  in  the  same  manue;? 
as  with  this  fly. 

No.  3.  The  grouse'hackle.--r-This  has  nq 
wings ;  the  mixture  for  the  body  is  dark  olive 
mohair,  and  a  fine  gold  coloured  hog's  wool, 
K#  ffiixecj^  and  copper-colour^.d  silk  of  finq^ 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLE*.  155 

mottled  •gr(!yiis^  feather,  of  a  reddish  brow^i, 
from  the  neck  of  the  €oek;  the  hook  No.  7. 

How  to  iJtake  this  fly. — ^Take  a  small  even 
silk-worm  gut,  and  half  a  yard  of  silt,  well 
waxed,  with  the  hook  between  the  finger  and 
thumb  of  the  left  hand ;  take  your  silk  and 
make  two  laps  round  the  hook,  within  the 
tenth  of  an  inch  of  the  bend,  wax  the  end  of 
the  gut  and  lay  it  on  the  inside  of  the  shank ; 
ffien  begin  to  lap  the  gut  to  the  hook  all  the 
way  up  till  you  connfe  within  the  twelfth  of  an 
inch  of  the  enti  of  the  shatlk,  make  one 
noose ;  then  take  the  hackle  and  strip  off  the 
downy  part  froi^  the  stem,  and  lay  (he 
back  of  the  stem  on  the  back  of  the  hook, 
i^ake  two  or  three  laps  round  the  hook,  gut, 
and  feather,  till  you  have  nearly  covered  all 
the  shank,  only  leaving  as  mxrch  as  to  make 
two  turns  round  the  hook  and  gut,  tiH  the 
hook  is  nearly  covered  with  the  lapping; 
bring  the  silk  back  to  the  inside  of  the  stem, 
nrake  one  noose  and  cut  away  the  end  oi  the 
5tem ;  take  a  little  af  the  dubbing  and  twirl 


156  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

it  thin  and  even  on  the  silk,  and  lap  it  neatly 
side  by  side  till  you  come  near  to  the  middle 
of  the  fly;  strip  off  the  dubbing,  and  fasten 
there  with  one  noose  ;  wax  the  silk,  and  leave 
it  hanging  till  you  bring  down  the  point  of 
the  hackle  to  that  place ;  now  take  the  hackle 
by  the  point,  and  bring  both  sides  of  the 
feather  to  the  back  of  the  stem,  taking  them 
several  times  through  your  lips,  and  making 
them  wet,  then  they  will  stand  together  at  the 
back,  or  side,  of  the  stem  next  you ;  then 
take  the  point  of  the  hackle  between  the 
finger  and  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  work  the 
hackle  neatly  down  till  you  come  to  where 
the  silk  is  hangmg,  then  bring  the  hackle 
round  close  over'  the  end  of  the  dubbing, 
keeping  it  very  tight,  with  the  silk  make  two 
laps  and  a  noose,  then  cut  away  what  is  left 
of  the  point  of  the  hackle ;  wax  the  silk  and 
take  a  small  quantity  of  the  same  dubbing 
and  twirl  it  round  the  silk,  very  thin  toward^ 
the  tail,  make  one  lap  at  the  end  of  the  tail 
and  strip  off  what  remains  on  the  silk  of  the.| 
dubbing ;  wax  your  silk,  make  two  nooses 


THE    DRIl^'FIELD    ANGLER.  ]^7 

as  neatly  as  you  can  at  the  tail  of  the  fly ; 
take  your  needle  and  pick  out  a  little  of  the 
dubbing,  which  will  cover  the  finishing  of  the 
fly ;  now  with  the  needle  put  the  body  and 
hackle  in  order,  and  leaving  the  body  towards 
the  tail  of  the  fly,  so  that  you  see  the  rows, 
or  ribSj  of  silk  through  the  dubbings  bring 
forward  the  hackle  between  the  finger  and 
thumb  of  the  right  hand  towards  the  tail  of 
the  fly,  pressing  the  hackle  close  down  to  the 
hook  on  all  sides ;  here  the  hackle  is  finished. 

If  you  wish  to  hackle  all  the  length  of  the 
body,  and  have  it  ribbed  with  gold  or  silver, 
you  must  proceed  as  before-mentioned  with 
the  grouse-hackle,  only  remember  when  you 
fasten  the  stem  of  the  hackle  on  the  back  of 
the  hook,  fasten  the  gold  or  silver  twist  at 
the  same  time  ;  in  making  the  body,  be  sure 
to  make  it  rather  thicker  at  the  shoulder  than 
in  any  other  part  of  it ;  take  the  gold  twist 
and  lap  it  sloping  and  neatly,  four  or  five 
times  round  the  body  till  you  come  to  the 
end  of  the  tail,  and  fasten  with  one  noose  ; 


158  tHE    DRIFFIELD   AXGLEll. 

then  take  the  hackle  by  the  point,  with  the 
finger  and  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  and  make 
two  turns  with  the  hackle  at  the  very  top  of 
the  hook,  close  to  each  other ;  then  lap  the 
hackle  neatly  down,  between  every  lap  of  the 
gold,  till  you  come  to  the  tail  of  the  fly, 
where  you  will  find  the  end  of  the  silk,  and 
bring  the  point  of  the  hackle  tight  round  the 
hook  at  the  tail ;  make  a  lap,  and  two  or 
three  nooses,  and  with  your  finger  and  thumb 
press  down  the  hackle  all  round  the  hook, 
and  with  your  needle  put  the  hackle  to  rights, 
and  the  fly  is  finished. 

When  the  fly-maker  gets  into  this  method, 
it  being  the  quickest,  easiest,  and  neatest  way 
of  making  Trout-flies,  he  will  never  attempt 
to  make  them  by  any  other. 

No.  4.  The  brown  partridge. — ^The  wings 
are  of  a  feather  from  a  partridge's  tail  (not 
the  red)  ;  the  body  a  sable  fur,  and  gold- 
coloured  hog's  wool,  well  mixed ;  in  making 
it  proceed  in  the  same  way  as  with  the  great 
whirling  dun ;  the  hook  No.  7. 


THE   DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  159 

No.  5.  The  sooty  dim  hacklcy — has  no 
wings ;  the  body,  a  little  lead-coloured  mo- 
hair, ash-coloured  silk,  with  a  sooty  dun 
cock's  hackle,  all  the  length  of  the  body  :  ijt 
is  made  by  fastening  the  stem  of  the  hackle 
at  top,  and  proceed  as  witli  the  gold  hackle ; 
make  the  body  very  thin  all  the  way  down 
to  the  tail,  and  the  hackle  suited  to  the  size 
of  your  hook  :  what  remains^  to  be  done  has 
been  before  explained ;  the  hook  No.  7.  It 
is  a  good  fly  in  the  hot  months,  in  large 
rivers  and  rapid  streams :  this  fly  may  be 
fished  with  either  9<s  the  end-fly  or  dropper* 

MAY. 

In  the  month  of  May,  all  the  same  hackles 
and  flies  may  be  used  as  in  March  and  Aprils 
the  hackles  lighter,  and  the  flies  rather 
smaller.  I  shall  add  a  few  of  the  very  best 
flies  for  this  month,  especially  the  dun-cut, 
green-drake,  grey-drake,  and  stone-fly. 

No.  1.     The  dun-cut. — ^The  dubbing  of 


}60  THE    DRIFFIELD    i^NGLEK. 

bear's  hair,  with  a  little  blue  and  yellow  mo- 
hair intermixed,  lapped  on  with  yellow  silk ; 
a  dun  whig  from  the  kite's  wing  feather,  and 
two  horns,  or  forks,  from  a  foulmart's  tail,  and 
made  the  same  way  as  the  great  whirling  dun. 
It  is  a  very  killing  fly  in  every  river,  rapid 
stream,  and  shallow  water. 

No.  2.  The  green-drake, — which  comes 
in  about  the  twenty-tifth  day  of  May,  and  is 
taken  till  about  the  twenty-first  of  June,  in 
all  rivers,  and  almost  in  every  hour  of  the 
day.  The  wings,  the  grey  spotted  feather  of 
a  mallard,  dyed  yellow ;  the  body,  a  little  fine 
wool  from  the  ram's  testicles,  which  is  of  a 
beautiful  dusty  yellow,  and  ribbed  with  cop- 
per-coloured silk,  with  a  dark  bittern's  hackle 
for  legs,  and  two  hairs  from  the  fitchat's  tail 
for  the  tail,  or  forks,  and  a  bit  of  the  brown 
peacock's  harl  from  the  tail  feather  for  the 
head.  This  is  a  large  fly,  and  should  be 
made  on  a  hook  No.  5,  or  large  No.  6;  there 
requires  no  further  instructions  for  making 
it,  than  what  has  before  been  given. 


I 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  IGl 

No.  3.  The  grey-drake. — The  wings,  the 
grey  mottled  part  of  a  mallard,  mixed  with 
that  of  a  jay  or  widgeon;  the  body,  light 
camel's  hair,  a  little  light  sky-blue  hog's 
wool,  well  mixed,  ash-coloured  &ilk,  a  small 
bluish  grizzled  cock's  hackle;  the  forks,  three 
fangs  from  the  foulmart's  tail.  In  making 
this  fly,  let  the  three  hairs  for  the  forks  be 
an  inch  and  a  quarter  long  at  the  least,  and 
stand  open,  and  a  bit  of  peacock's  feather  at 
the  tail ;  and  is  made  in  the  manner  as  de- 
scribed before. 

No.  4.  The  yellow-hackle.  —  For  the 
hackle,  the  mottled  feather  from  the  mal- 
lard's breast,  dyed  yellow ;  the  body  tlie 
same  as  the  green-drake,  and  ribbed  (the 
same  as  that  fly)  witii  copper-coloured  silk, 
and  two  forks  of  the  fitchat  s  tail,  about  an. 
inch  long ;  a  bit  of  the  peacock's  harl  at  the 
head.  It  is  made  in  the  same  way  as  the 
grouse-hackle,  but  you  must  not  bring  the 
hackle  quite  so  low  down  on  the  body. — 
This  is  the  very  best  fly  all  the  drake-season. 
P  3 


1<)2  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

These   three   flies  are  end-flies,   and  fished 
with  singly ;  the  hook  No.  6. 

No.  5.     The  stone-^y.  — Made  of  bear's 
dun  hair,  with  brown  and  yellow  camlet,  well 
mixed,  but  so  placed,  that  the  fly  may  be 
more  brown  towards  the  wings,   and  yellow 
towards  the  tail ;  you   must  place   a  black 
cock's  hackle  on  the  top  of  the  hook,   in  the 
arming,   or  whipping,  so  as  to  be   turned  up 
when  you  wrap  on  your  dubbing,  and  to  stand 
almost  upright ;    it  must  be  ribbed  with  cop- 
per and   yellow-coloured  silk,    twisted  to- 
gether, and  lapped  six  times- round  the  body, 
sloping .  towards  the  tail ;    the  wings  just  as 
long  as  the  body,  and  made  from  a  kite  or 
woodcock's  wing,  the  mallard's  feather  being 
too  stiff,  and  not  so  near  to  the  colour  of  tlifi 
fly,  nor  lying  so  flat  to    its  body.     It  is   a 
good  killer,   and  made  as  before  described. 
lIookNcO.     An  end-fly. 

No,  6.     The  black  silver-hackle, — j\fade 
of  the  whirl  of  aa  ostrich's  feather,  and  lap 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  \63 

ped  round  five  times,  sloping,  witli  silver 
twist,  and  a  black  cock's  hackle  over  all.  A 
good  fly  the  latter  end  of  May,  and  all  June ; 
the  hook  No.  8.     A  dropper. 

No.  7.  Thewoodcock'fly. — Made  of  brown 
spaniel's  ear,  and  a  little  of  the  squirrel's  fur, 
well  mixed,  with  two  w^hisks  af  the  mallard's 
copper-coloured  feather  from  behind  the 
wing  for  forks ;  and  a  small  tinged  hackle, 
with  one  side  taken  off,  and  lapped  neatly 
sloping  to  the  tail,  and  fasten  as  observed 
before ;  and  wdth  your  needle  put  the  body 
and  hackle  in  order;  the  hook  No.  8  or  9- 
[Taken  from  the  twentieth  of  this  month,  to 
Uhe  latter  end  of  August,  when  there  is  any 
wind  stirrings  and  the  best  fly  we  have. 

JUNE. 

No,  J.  The  grizzle  hackle. — This  fly  fol- 
lows the  green  and  grey  ones,  and  is  a  good 
fly  during  its  season ;  it  has  no  wings ;  the 
body,  a  feather  from  the  pheasant's  tail,  of  a 


lG4i  THE    PRIFFIELD   A^GLEn. 

dark  reddish  brown,  red  or  copper-coloured 
silk,  and  a  dark  grizzled  cock's  hackle  :  it  is 
made  ni  ttie  same  way  as  tlie  grouse-hackle ;. 
the  hook  No.  8.     A  dropper. 

No.  2.  The  golden  sooty  dun, — The 
wings,  starling's  feather;  the  body,  dark 
brown  wool  of  a  black  lamb  weather-beaten, 
resembling  soot,  and  mixed  with  a  little 
bright  yellow  martern's  fur,  and  ao  hackle. 
It  is  made  the  same  way  as  the  brown-par- 
tridge :  hook  No.  9 ;  and  in  season  from  the 
beginning  of  June  to  the  latter  end  of  Sep- 
tember. 

No,  3.  The  light  blue  fox, — The  wings 
are  the  light  feather  from  a  starling's  wiiig,; 
the  body,  fox's  blue  fur,  a  little  light  camel's 
hair,  and  light  straw-coloured  mohair,  well 
mixed  ;  the  fork  at  the  tail  is  two  hairs  that 
grow  on  a  monkey's  skin,  which  is  of  a  fine 
ash-colour  ;  proceed  as  with  tKe  great  whirl- 
ing dun,  and  finish  the  same.  In  »ome  rivers 
it  is  in  season  the  last  w^eek  in  April,  and.  in 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER^  l65 

Others  in  May;  however  it  is  a  good  fly, 
and  taken  all  the  summer  on  every  river,  at 
times. 

No.  4.  The  purple-hackle. — Made  with 
spaniel's  fur,  and  a  little  purple  mohair,  mix- 
ed and  twirled  on  dark  red  silk,  with  a  blood 
red  cock's  hackle  over  all ;  the  hook  No.  8* 

No.  5.  The  owl-fly. — Taken  about  the 
middle  of  the  month  till  the  latter  end  of 
July,  late  in  the  evening.  TKo  r^nhhing 
must  be  made  of  a  very  light  yellow,  or  al- 
most white  mohair,  a  very  light  yellow  silk, 
a  small  brown  head  of  the  peacock's  harl, 
and  the  wings  of  the  white  grey  feather  of  the 
mallard,  and  must  be  very  little  longer  than 
the  body ;  the  hook  No.  7.  With  this  fly  I 
have  had  good  sport,  in  all  rivers  that  I  have 
fished,  in  an  evening  till  about  ten  o'clock. 

No.  6.  The  ant-fly. — The  wings,  a  feather 
of  the  starling's  wing ;  the  body,  mohair  of 
amber-colour,    mixed    with   a   little   black. 


166  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

spaniel's  fur,  and  small  brown  silk,  black  red 
tinged  cock's  hackle  twice  round  the  wings. 
In  making  it,  let  the  body  be  large  at  the  tail 
and  small  towards  the  wings,  and  endeavour 
to  form  as  natural  a  resemblance  of  the  ant 
as  possible,  and  finish  as  in  former  cases  ;  the 
hook  No.  11. 

No.  7.  The  green  grasshopper, — The 
body  of  green  and  yellow  mohair,  well  mix- 
ed, and  the  body  ribbed  over  with  fine  green 
silk.  anH  a  green  peacock's  harl  twisted  to- 
gether, and  a  light  red  cock's  hackle  over 
all ;  the  hook  No.  6. 

No.  8.  The  dun-grasskoppcr. — The  body 
slenderly  made,  of  a  little  dun  bear's  hair,  and 
a  little  dark  dun  mohair,  and  dun  smoky 
hackle  over  all.  A  good  fly  in  a  dai'k  windy 
day.     The  hook  No.  5  or  6. 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANG'LEH.  iGf 

JULY. 

The  dub-flies  for  this  month  are, 

No.  1.  The  badger-Jly. — The  body  of 
badger's  skin,  from  the  skinners'  pits,  twisted 
on  some  small  red  silk,  with  a  dark  red  head, 
and  a  sad  grey  wing,  from  the  pheasant  hen's 
wing  feather.  This  is  a  good  fly,  and  used 
in  March,  April,  and  May :  the  hook  No. 
9  or  10. 

No.  S.  The  orange-fiy.  —  The  dubbing 
of  dark  orange-coloured  mohair,  and  small 
gold  twist,  with  a  small  orange-coloured 
hackle  twice  under  the  wing,  and  a  black 
wdng  from  a  crow's  wing  feather ;  it  may  be 
varied  with  a  rail's  feather.  A  good  fly  in 
the  afternoon. 

No.  3.  The  wasp-fly.  —  Made  of  dark 
brown  dubbing  from  the  bear,  and  a  black 
rabbit's  fur,  a  little  yellow  mohair,  well  mix- 
ed, and  ribbed  over  with  yellow  silk ;   the 


168  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER* 

wings  of  the  mallard's  grey  feather ;  the  hook 
No.  7  or  8. 

No.  4.  The  shell-fly.— Vf'ith  dubbing  of 
yellow  fine  hog's  wool,  or  mohair,  mixed 
with  the  dark  fur  of  a  hare's  ear  ;  lead-co- 
loured silk,  and  starling's  wing ;  the  hook 
No.  9  or  10. 

No.  5.  The  little  dun. — The  body  made 
of  white  mohair,  twirled  on  ash-coloured 
silk ;  the  wings  of  a  jay's  light  blue  wing  fea-^ 
ther;  the  dubbing  raised  under  the  wings 
with  your  needle;  the  hook  No.  9  or  10. 
A  good  fly  in  an  evening  before  the  moths 
come. 

Though  I  by  no  means  approve  of  night- 
fishing  with  the  moths,  yet,  as  many  sports- 
men are  so  passionately  fond  of  angling  as 
to  be  induced  to  pursue  their  pastime  at  all 
events,  and  are  often  more  successful  than  in 
the  day-time,  I  will  here  give  them  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  best  flies  for  the  purpose. 


THE    DRIFFIELD   A]\  ixx.xi.iv#.  *^^ 

•   No.    1.     The   mealy  white  moth^- — with 
large  broad  wings,   just  the  length  of  the; 
body,   made  of  the  soft  mealy  feather  of  a 
white  owl ;  the  body,  the  soft  white  fur  of  a 
hare,  or  a  rabbit,   with  a  soft  white  hackle  v 
the  body  as  thick  as  a  very  large  straw,  till 
you  come  near  the  wings,  there  lap  two  oit 
three  times,  take  the  hackle  by  the  point  and 
lap  it  two  or  three  times  pretty  close  under^ 
the  wings ;   afterwards   thinly  down   to   thet 
tail,   there  make  the  point  fast  by  noosing* 
two  or  three  times,   as  observed  before  lO; 
other  places ;   the  hook  should  be  No.  4/ 
or  5  at  the  least. 

No.  2.  The  mealy  cream  moth.  —  The: 
wings  are  tlie  feathers  of  a  yellow  owl,  of  a 
deep  cream  colour ;  the  body  made  of  the 
fur  of  a  white  weasel's  tail,  lapped  on  with 
straw-coloured  silk,  and  a  bit  of  brown  pea* 
cock's  harlfor  the  head,  and  a  yellow  hac- 
kle ;  it  is  made  on  the  same  sized  hook,  and 
finished,  and  fished  with,  the  same  way  as 
the  former.     You  may  vary  the  head  with 


170  THE   ©RlFriElB  ANCLEH. 

silver  or  gold,   which  ever  best  suits  your 
purpose. 

No.  3.  The  mealy  hrown.^-^liht  wings 
are  made  of  the  mottled  brown  feather  of 
an  owl ;  the  body,  the  fur  of  a  weasel's  tail, 
a  little  yellow  martern's  fur,  and  very  little 
brown  spaniels  for  from  the  ear,  well  mixed, 
and  a  bittern's  hackle  lapped  four  or  five 
times  under  the  wings,  and  with  your  scissors 
cut  the  hackle  so  as  to  be  left  half  an  inch 
Jong  for  the  legs ;  and  a  brown  head,  or  silver 
twist  instead,  as  the  last,  and  finished  in  the 
same  way.  They  are  great  killers  in  warm 
gloomy  nights,  after  hot  days ;  and  when  you 
fish  this  way,  you  should  fish  with  no  more 
than  six  or  seven  yards.  You  may  hear  the 
fish  rise  as  in  the  day  time,  and  feel  them 
when  they  take. 

AUGUST- 

In  addition  to  the  fli6s  that  are  used  in 
July,  prepare  as  follows  : 


THK    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  171 

No.  1.  Tht  fern-jly, — The  dubbing  of 
the  fur  of  a  hare  or  rabbit's  neck,  that  is 
the  colour  of  witiiered  fern,  with  orange 
silk ;  a  dark  grey  wing  of  a  mallard's  fea- 
ther \  the  hook  No.  9. 

No.  2.  The  harry  long  legs. — The  body, 
long  and  slender,  made  of  bears  dun,  and  blue 
mohair,  well  mixed,  with  a  smoky  brown  hackle 
feather  over  all,  and  lapped  with  brown  silk ; 
the  hook  No.  5  or  6.  N.  B.  Ail  the  same 
browns  and  duns  are  taken  this  month  that 
were  fished  with  the  latter  end  of  April  and 
May, 

SEPTEMBER. 

The  same  flies  are  taken  this  month  that 
were  in  April. 

OCTOBER. 

The  same  as  were  taken  in  March* 


-./^  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

NOVEMBER. 

The  same  as  were  taken  in  February. 

INSTRUCTIONS  for  FLY-FISHING. 

Let  your  line  be  about  half  as  long  again 
as  the  rod,  and  holding  that  in  one  hand  and 
the  line,  near  the  fly,  in  the  other,  give  your 
rod  a  motion  from  right  to  left;  and  as  you 
move  the  rod  backwards  to  throw  out  the 
line,  let  it  go  out  of  your  left  hand;  at  the 
same  time  try  several  throws  at  this  length, 
and  having  v»'ell  marked  your  object  on  the 
opposite  side  oftlie  water,  and  made  several 
throws,  let  out  a  yard  or  two  more  line,  and 
try  that  till  you  throw  within  four  or  five 
inches  every  time,  if  the  wind  be  any  way 
in  your  favour ;  still  using  more  and  more 
line,  till  you  can  manage  any  length  required, 
from  ten  to  tvrelve  yards^    which  is  quite 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  173 

sufficient  for  the  young  angler  to  practise 
with.  And  observe,  that  in  raising  your  line 
in  order  to  throw  it  in  again,  you  should 
bring  your  rod  round  your  head,  and  not  di- 
rectly backwards ;  nor  must  you  return  the 
line  too  soon,  nor  till  it  has  gone  its  full 
length  behind  you,  or  you  will  certainly  whip 
off  your  end-fly.  There  is  great  art  in  mak- 
ing your  line  fall  on  the  water,  and  showing 
the  fly  well  to  the  fish;  which  must  be  done 
without  any  part  of  the  line  falling  into  the 
water,  except  your  flies  and  cast-line  :  to 
prevent  this  great  impediment,  when  you 
make  your  throw,  or  cast,  to  bring  your  rod 
round  from  right  to  left,  and  the  line  at 
its  full  extent,  bring  the  point,  or  top,  of 
your  rod  in  a  direct  line  with  your  eye  to 
the  place  you  wish  to  throw  it  to,  minding 
when  your  rod  comes  between  the  place  and 
your  eye,  to  stiffen  the  rest  of  your  hand, 
which  will  prevent  the  top  coming  too  near 
the  water ;  and  the  spring  of  tlie  top  back- 
wards will  raise  the  middle  of  your  long  line, 
and  throw  your  flies  and  cast-line  within  four 
Q  3 


174  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

or  five  inches  to  where  you  wish  to  have  it 
on  the  water,  in  a  very  natural  way,  and  no 
part  of  your  wheel-line  will  touch  the  water : 
when  once  an  anrfer  sets  this  method  of 
throwing,  he  will  be  able  to  throw  with  a  six- 
teen feet  rod,  from  eighteen  yards  to  two 
or  three  and  twenty  neatly;  and  also  will 
be  enabled  to  throw  ten  or  twelve  yards  in 
the  wind's  eye  to  the  opposite  bank,  w^hich 
will  enable  him  to  kill  more  Trout  than  any 
other  angler,  except  he  manages  his  rod  and 
line  in  the  same  way;  but  this  can  only  be 
attained  by  practice  :  for  this  reason,  when 
he  throws  his  flies  to  the  opposite  side,  the 
wind  and  stream  will  bring  the  flies  more 
naturally  down  and  cross-ways  on  the  stream, 
than  throwing  downwards  :  and  if  the  angler 
will  but  observe  when  a  Trout  or  Salmon  is 
hooked  from  the  opposite  bank,  that  he  is 
always  well  hooked  and  killed ;  and  most  fish 
that  take  the  fly  a  litde  across  and  against 
the  stream,  are  never  well  hooked,  and  sel- 
dom killed  ;  although  at  times  they  will 
give  some  play  and  get  loose  at  the  last, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  175 

except  you  have  a  landing-net  with  a  long 
handle,  to  reach  a  good  way.  Always  ob- 
serve when  you  hook  a  fish,  if  he  goes  to 
the  bottom  and  never  shows  himself  at  the 
top  till  you  have  almost  killed  him,  you  may 
be  assured  he  is  well  hooked,  and  with  care 
he  is  your  own;  but  if  you  hook  a  fish  and 
it  springs  out  of  the  water  often,  he  is  but 
slightly  hooked,  or  the  point  of  it  is  against 
a  bone,  which  will  make  him  bounce  out  of 
the  water  several  times,  and,  by  so  doing, 
will  frequently  disengage  himself  from  the 
hook, 

1 

CHAPTER    XIIL 

OF  WORMS. 

Jl  HE  ash'grub, —  is  a  milk-white  worm, 
with  a  red  head,  and  may  be  had  at  any  time 
from  Michaelmas  till  June  :  it  is  to  be  found 
under  the  bark  of  an   oak,   ash,  alder,   or 


176  THE    DRIFFIEjLD   ANGLER, 

birch,  if  they  lay  a  year  after  they  have  been 
cut  down  ;  you  may  likewise  find  them  in  the 
bodies  of  rotten  alders  if  you  break  them 
with  an  axe ;  as  also  under  the  bark  of  a 
decayed  stump  of  a  tree  :  it  is  a  good  bait 
for  a  Grayling,  Chub,  Roach,  and  Dace.— 
The  brandling,  gilt-tail,  and  red  worm  are  all 
to  be  found  in  old  dunghills,  or  the  rotten 
earth  near  them  ;  but  the  best  are  found  in 
tanners'  yards,  under  the  heaps  of  bark 
which  they  throw  out  after  they  have  done 
with  it.  The  brandhng  is  most  readily  met 
with  in  hogs'  dung,  horses'  dung,  and  rotten 
earth,  and  also  in  old  thatch  and  dung.  These 
are  good  baits  for  Trout,  Graylmg,  Sal- 
mon-smelts, Gudgeons,  Pearch,  Tench^  and 
Bream,  or  any  fish  that  takes  a  worm. 

The  clap-bait^ — is  found  under  cows'  dung, 
and  is  like  a  gentle,  but  larger.  You  must 
seek  for  it  only  on  such  land  as  is  light  and 
sandy ;  it  is  much  of  the  same  nature  with 
the  earth-bob,  and  may  be  kept  in  wet  moss 
for  two  or  three  days.     It  is  an  excellent 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER,  177 

fcait  for  a  Trout,  and  every  other  fish  will 
take  it. 


Thecod'bait^  cadis-zcorm,  Sind  straw-zvorm, 
' — are  only  different  names  for  the  same  bait : 
they  are  found  in  pits,  ponds,  brooks,  and 
ditches,  and  are  covered  with  husks  of  sticks, 
straws,  or  rushes ;  they  are  very  good  baits 
for  Trout,  Grayling,  Carp,  Tench,  Bream, 
Chub,  Roach,  Dace,  Salmon-smelts,  and 
Bleak.  The  green  sort  are  found  in  March, 
the  yellow  in  May,  and  a  third  sort  in  Au- 
gust ;  these  covered  with  rushes  are  always 
green,  and  those  with  stones  usually  yellow, 
all  the  season. 

The  earth-bob^  or  zvhite-grub^ — is  a  worm 
with  a  red  head,  as  large  as  two  maggots,  and 
is  soft,  and  full  of  whitish  guts  ;  it  is  found 
in  a  light  sandy  soil,  and  may  be  gathered 
after  the  plough,  when  the  land  is  first  broke 
up  from  grazing :  you  may  know  in  what 
ground  to  find  them  by  the  crows,  as  they 
will  follow  the  plough  very  close  where  those 


178  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

animals  are  to  be  met  with.  This  is  chiefly 
a  winter-bait  from  the  beginning  of  Novem- 
ber till  the  middle  of  April,  and  is  proper 
for  Chub,  Roach,  Dace,  Bream,  Tench, 
Carp,  Trout,  and  Salmon-smelts.  They  are 
-to  be  kept  in  a  vessel  closely  stopped,  Avith 
a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  earth  they  were 
bred  in,  and  they  will  be  ready  for  use  all 
the  winter. 

The  flag'Worm^  or  dock-worm, — is  found 
in  the  roots  of  flags  that  grow  on  the  brink 
of  an  old  pond ;  when  you  have  pulled  up 
the  roots,  you  will  find  among  the  fibres  red- 
dish, or  yellow  cases,  these  you  must  open 
with  a  pin,  and  you  will  find  a  small  worm, 
longer  and  more  slender  than  a  gentle,  with 
a  red  head,  palish  body,  and  rows  of  feet  all 
down  the  belly.  This  is  an  exceeding  good 
bait  for  Grayling,  Tench,  Bream,  Carp^ 
Roach,  and  Dace. 

The  lob-woririy  dew-roorm^  garden-worm^ 
&c. — are  found  in  gardens^   pasture-lands, 


THE   DRIFFIEID   AN6LEK.  \7§ 

Sec,  late  in  a  summer's  evening,  with  a  lantern 
and  candle :  they  are  also  to  be  dug  up  in 
fields,  and  other  places,  by  the  sides  of 
ditches  and  drains ;  the  best  sort  are  those 
free  from  knots,  a  red  head,  a  streak  down 
the  back,  and  a  broad  tail.  To  scour  and 
preserve  them  for  use,  take  some  moss,  the 
best  is  tliat  which  grows  on  heaths,  being 
soft  and  white,  and  when  gathered  will  be 
clear  and  free  from  dirt  at  the  roots  ;  dip  it 
into  clean  water,  wring  it  nearly  dry,  and  put 
half  of  it  into  an  earthen  pot,  the  worms  and 
the  other  part  of  the  moss  at  top,  cover  it  close 
that  they  may  not  get  out,  and  keep  it  in  a 
cool  place  in  summer,  and  in  a  warm  one 
in  winter,  so  as  to  prevent  the  cold  weather, 
or  frost  from  killing  them  ;  the  moss  must 
be  changed  every  third  day  in  summer,  and 
once  in  six  days  in  winter;  in  a  week's  time 
your  worms  will  be  fit  for  use ;  and  from 
these  supply  your  worm-bag  when  you  re- 
quire this  kind  of  worm,  and  what  you  have 
not  used,  upon  your  return  home,  put  them 
into  the  pot  again* 


180  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

The  marsh-worm^  —  is  to  be  found  m 
marshy  ground  on  the  banks  of  rivers ;  is 
of  a  bluish  colour,  and  a  good  bait  for 
Salmon-smelts,  Gudgeons,  Grayling,  Trout, 
and  Pearch. 

The  tag'taily — is  of  a  pale  flesh  colour, 
with  a  yellow  tag  on  his  tail,  almost  half  an 
inch  long,  and  found  in  marl-land,  or  mea- 
dows, after  a  shower  of  rain ;  and  a  good 
bait  for  Trout,  after  the  water  is  coloured 
with  rain. 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  181 

CHAPTER    XIV. 

RULES  FOR  FISHING, 

AND 

OTHER    OBSERVATIONS. 

^T  HEN  the  nights  prove  dark,  cloudy,  or 
windy,  and  the  moon  shines  little,  or  not  al 
all,  the  next  day  there  will  be  but  poor  sport, 
except  with  small  fish ;  as  Trout,  and  great 
fish,  then  range  about  in  search  of  prey.  In 
small,  clear,  and  shallow  brooks,  where  the 
mills  stand  and  keep  up  the  water,  you  will 
seldom  catch  fish ;  as  they^  especially  Trout^ 
dare  not  then  come  out  of  their  holds,  by 
reason  of  the  shallowness  of  the  water,  which 
then  brings  no  aliment  with  it.  Observe 
that  when  you  angle  in  a  clear  water,  either 
for  Trout,  Grayling,  or  Salmon-smelt3;  if  you 

R 


182  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

have  so  much  dexterity  as  to  do  it  with  ft 
single  liair  for  two  links  next  your  hook,  you 
will  certainly  catch  three  Trout  for  one 
against  any  that  angle  with  gut  next  the 
hook ;  and  though  you  may  now  and  then 
lose  a  great  fish  by  his  breaking  your  line, 
yet  if  you  had  not  been  so  small  tackled,  ten 
to  one  he  had  ever  bit,  and  a  number  of 
bites  will  compensate  the  loss  ;  you  may  fish 
with  less  hazard  at  the  bottom  than  at  the 
op  with  fine  tackle,  because  a  Trout  shoots 
at  the  fly  with  a  rapid  agility  at  your  bait, 
and  from  you  when  he  hath  taken  it,  with  his 
head  generally  downwards ;  but  at  the  ground, 
or  mid-water,  he  takes  the  bait  gently,  and 
glides  away  more  leisurely. 

Fish  take  all  sorts  of  baits  more  eagerly 
and  freely,  and  with  the  least  suspicion,  when 
you  present  them  in  such  order  and  manner 
as  nature  affords,  and  they  are  used  to  take 
them. 

Some  are  peculiar  to  certain  countries 


THE   DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  183 

apd  rivers,   of  which  every  angler  may,  in 
his  owa  place,    make  proper  observations. 
Several  of  the  foregoino;  baits  will  be  taken 
in  some  particular  rivers  and  not  in  others ; 
and  the  same  baits  are  taken  earlier  in  some 
rivers,  and  sooner  or  later  in  some  years  than 
others.     Whenever  you  find  large  shoals  of 
fish,  except  about  their  spawning  time,  they 
will  bite  if  you  use  proper  baits :  fish  with  a 
fine  line  in  a  strong  current,  and  you  will  re- 
quire a  less  quantity  of  lead.     If  you  angle 
for  small  fish  at  the  ground,   use  a  line  of 
the  roundest  and  smallest  silk-worm  gut, 
with  a  float  made  of  a  goose's  quill ;  while 
you   are  angling,    do  not  give  them   more 
baiting  than  will  keep  them  together;  and  if 
you  intend  to  angle  in  the  morning,  bait  well 
the  evening  before ;  as  also  in  the  morning 
if  you  intend  to  angle  in  the  evening. 

The  best  hours  in  general  esteemed  to 
angle  on  a  clear  day,  and  in  clear  water, 
from  about  the  tenth  of  April  until  the  end  o 
August,  are  from  sun-rise  till  half  past  tea 
R  2 


184  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

o'clock,  and  from  three  until  sun-set :  but  if 
the  day  be  dark,  cloudy,  gloomy,  or  lowering, 
especially  if  at  such  a  time  also  a  gentle 
breeze  blows  from  any  quarter,  even  from 
the  east,  you  will  not  fail  of  catching  fish  in 
any  hour  of  the  day ;  but  in  March,  the  be- 
ginning of  April,  September,  and  all  the 
winter  months,  you  may  angle  all  the  day, 
from  about  an  hour  after  sun-rise  until  about 
sun-set,  either  in  muddy  or  clear  water;  and 
you  may  even  angle  all  the  day  in  muddy 
water,  from  the  middle  of  April  until  the  end 
of  August,  but  early  in  the  morning  and  late 
in  the  evening  are  the  best  times. 

^  When  floods  have  carried  away  all  the 
^filth  that  the  rain  had  washed  from  the  higher 
grounds  into  the  river,  so  that  the  river  keep- 
eth  its  usual  bounds,  and  of  a  chesnut  brown 
or  ale  colour,  it  is  then  good  to  angle  at 
ground,  at  the  conflux  of  rivers  ;  and  when 
it  ebbs  and  flows,  fish  sometimes  bite  very 
well,  but  in  the  ebb  most  usually,  and  also 
at  pointing  of  a  tide.     Fish  rise  best  at  the 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  185 

fly  after  a  shower  that  has  not  mudded  the 
water,  yet  has  beat  in  the  gnats  and  flies  into 
the  river ;  you  may,  in  such  a  shower,  observe 
them  to  rise  much,  if  you  can  endure  the 
rain.  Great  fish.  Trout  in  particular,  feed 
most  in  the  night,  especially  if  it  be  dark  or 
windy,  and  they  bite  not  the  next  day,  unless 
it  proves  dark  or  windy,  and  then  a  little  in 
the  afternoon  only  :  all  fish  bite  keener  and 
better  (especially  in  the  summer)  in  swift, 
rapid,  stony,  and  gravelly  rivers,  than  those 
that  run  gently  in  slime  and  mud. 

In  little  brooks  that  fall  into  large  rivers, 
where  the  tide  comes  up  only  in  fresh  waters, 
or  w^aters  a  little  brackish,  if  you  begin  at  the 
mouth  of  such  brooks,  just  as  the  tide  comes 
in,  and  go  up  with  the  head  of  the  tide,  and 
return  with  the  ebb,  you  may  take  many  good 
Trout;  and  if  the  tide  does  not  foul  the 
water  they  will  rise  at  the  fly ;  or  if  you 
come  immediately  after  a  shower,  that  ha^ 
raised  the  water,  or  just  gfs  any  mill-water 
begins  to  come  down,  and  so  proceed  with 
R  s 


185  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER- 

the  course  of  the  current,  Trout  will  bite 
eagerly;  because,  expecting  the  water  to 
bring  down  food  with  it,  they  come  forth 
to  seek  it. 

When  rains  cause  the  rivers  to  i^ise,    and 
keep  them  for  feome  time  above  their  ordinary 
height,  Trout  leave  the  largest  rivers,    and 
retire  into  such  small  brooks  as  are  almost 
dry  in  hot  summers,  and  m  such  brooks  you 
should  then  anglefor  them :  theygenerallyquit 
the  great  rivers  at  Michaelmas,   and  go  into, 
small  rivulets  to  spawn,  and  are  frequently 
there  destroyed  by  idle  and  disorderly  poach- 
ers, with  groping  and  tickling,   or  otherwise^ 
which  does  more  injury  to  the  breed  of  fish, 
than  all  the  summer's  ano;lino:.     In  all  sorts 
of  angling  be  sure  to  keep  out  of  the  fish's 
sight,  and  as  far  off  the  river's  bank  as  pos- 
i^ible,  unless  you  angle  in  a  muddy  water, 
and  then  you  may  approajch  nearer.     Angle 
always,  if  you  can,    on  the  lee-shore;   and 
observe,    that  fish   lay  or  swim  nearer  the 
bottOQ],.  and  in  deeper  water,   in  winter  thau 


TElE    DRTFFIELD    ANGLER.  18/ 

in  summer  ;  they  also  get  near  the  bottom  ia 
a  cold  day,    and  on  the  calm  side   of  the 
water  ;  and  in  the  winter  are  caught  best  in 
the  mid-time  of  the  day,   and  in  sun-shiny 
weather.    When  you  angle  for  Pearch,  Chub, 
Tench,  Carp,  Dace,  Bream,  Gudgeon,,  and 
RufF,and  have  hooked  one,  and  who  afterwards 
makes   his  escape,    you  will  not  often  have 
any  great  sport  at  that  standing  for  one  or 
two  hours  after  such  misfortune,  because  the 
fish  is  so  frighted   that  he  chases  his  corn-* 
panions  out  of  the   place ;    therefore,  after 
some  trial,   it  is  best  to  remove,    and   angle 
at  some  other  standing.     In  a  clear  water^ 
when  you  use  worms,    bait  with  one  worm 
only ;  in  a  muddy  or  discoloured  water,  bait 
with  two  at  a  time. 

The  colour  of  your  line  most  be  a  dusky 
fc  white,,  or  grey  colour,  in  water  that  is  disco- 
loured; your  line,  for  two  yards  next  the 
hook,  ought  to  be  of  a  sorrel  brown,  or  ches- 
nut,  and  the  upper  part  of  it  white.  Let  your 
apparel  not  be  of  a  light  or  shining  colour^ 
which  will  reflQCt  upon  the  water  and  fright 


188  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

away  the  fish,  but  let  it  be  of  a  dark  brown, 
or  dark  bottle-green  colour,  not  with  metal 
buttons,  and  sit  close  to  the  body. 

Fish  are  terrified  with  the  least  sight  or 
motion,  therefore  by  all  means  keep  out  of 
sight  when  you  angle  in  a  clear  water,  either 
by  sheltering  behind  some  bush,  or  tree,  or 
by  standing  as  far  off  the  river's  side  as  you 
possibly  can  ;  to  effect  this  the  better,  a  rod 
of  eighteen  feet  long,  at  ground,  and  a  rod 
of  the  same  length  and  line  at  artificial  fly, 
are  absolutely  necessary :  neither  ought  yoi> 
to  move  much  on  the  banks  next  the  water 
you  angle  in,  especially  for  Trout,  Chub,  or 
Carp.  When  you  angle  at  ground,  in  a  clear 
water,  or  dibble  with  natural  flies,  angle  up 
the  river ;  but  in  muddy  water,  or  dub-fly, 
angle  down  the  river,  "When  you  have 
hooked  a  large  fish,  let  him  play  and  tire 
himself  in  the  water ;  and  have  a  special 
care  to  keep  the  rod  bent,  lest  he  run  to  the 
end  of  the  line  and  break  either  hook  or 
hold ;  haul  him  not  too  near  the  top  of  the 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER^  18^ 

water,  for  by  flouncing  he  might  break  your 
line. 


Where  any  weeds,  roots  of  trees,  stones^ 
wood,  or  other  rubbish  are,  it  is  often  good, 
but  troublesome,  anghng,  for  to  such  places 
fish  resort  for  warmth  and  security.  The 
same  may  be  said  of  whirlpools,  which  are 
like  pits  in  rivers,  and  seldom  unfurnished 
with  good  fish;  likewise  in  weirs,  weir-pools, 
mill-streams,  piles,  posts,  and  pillars  of 
bridges,  flood-gates,  cataracts  and  falls  of 
water,  the  conflux  of  rivers,  the  eddies  be- 
twixt two  streams,  the  returns  of  a  stream, 
and  the  sides  of  a  stream,  are  good  places 
generally  to  angle  in.  Keep  the  sun,  or 
moon  if  you  angle  at  night,  before  you,  pro- 
vided your  eyes  can  endure  it ;  at  least  be 
sure  to  have  those  planets  on  your  side,  for 
if  they  are  on  your  back  both  yourself  and 
rod,  will,  by  the  shadow,  give  more  offence 
when  looking  towards  the  light  than  the  con- 
trary way.  Let  all  baits  and  flies  whatso- 
' 'ever^  fall  gently  first  into  the  water,  before 


190  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER, 

any  other  part  of  the  line,  except  the  cast- 
line,  (and  with  as  little  of  that  as  possible) 
and  without  any  disturbance,  plunging,  or 
circling  of  the  water,  which  very  much  scares 
and  frightens  the  fish. 

RULES  AND  CAUTIONS. 

.  Never  raise  a  large  fish  out  of  the  water 
by  taking  the  hair  to  which  your  hook  is 
fastened,  or  indeed  any  part  of  the  line,  into 
your  hands,  but  either  put  a  landing-net  un- 
der him,  or  for  want  of  that,  even  your  hat  : 
you  may,  in  fly-fishing,  lay  hold  of  your  line 
to  draw  a  fish  to  you,  but  this  must  be 
done  with  caution.  Your  silk  for  whipping 
hooks,  and  other  fine  work,  must  be  very 
small  and  strong,  and  waxed,  and  indeed  any 
other  kind  of  binding,  with  shoemaker's  wax, 
which  is  the  tou2;hest  and  holds  the  best :  in- 
close  the  knots  and  joints  of  your  lines  in  a 
small  pill  of  wax,  pressed  very  close,  and  the 
superfluities  pinched  oft^;  this  will  soon  har- 
den and  prevent  the  knots  from  drawing ;  it 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  1C)1 

is  better  to  whip  your  knots  with  fine  silk. — 
Whenever  you  begin  fishing,  wet  the  ends  of 
the  joints  of  your  rod,  which,  as  it  makes 
them  swell,  will  prevent  their  loosening ;  and 
if  it  should  happen  to  rain,  or  otherwise  to 
wet  your  rod  so  that  you  cannot  pull  the 
joints  asunder,  turn  the  ferrule  a  few  times 
round  in  the  flame  of  a  candle,  and  they  will 
easily  separate.  Before  you  fix  the  silk- 
worm gut,  or  hair,  to  your  hook  in  order  to 
make  a  fly,  to  prevent  its  drawing,  be  sure 
to  singe  the  ends  of  it  in  the  flame  of  a  can- 
dle ;  do  the  same  with  India-weed  to  wl^ich 
at  any  time  you  whip  a  hook.  Make  flies  in 
warm  weather  only,  as  in  cold  your  waxed 
^ilk  will  not  draw;  moderate  weather  is 
the  best. 

THE  WAY  TO  ALLURE  FISH  TO 
BITE  WITH  UNGUENTS,  &c. 

The  best  is  gum-ivy,  and  put  a  good  quan- 
tity of  it  in  a  small  box  made  of  oak  ;  rub 
the  inside  of  the  box  with  this  gum^  and  when 


192  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

you  angle  put  five  or  six  worms  therein,  let- 
ting them  remain  but  a  short  time,  for  if 
long  it  will  kill  them ;  take  them  out  and  use 
them,  putting  more  in  their  stead  out  of  the 
worm-bag  and  moss,  and  continue  so  to  do 
all  the  day,  and  you  will  have  excellent  sport 
Gum-ivy  is  a  tear  that  drops  from  the  body 
of  the  larger  ivy  being  wounded ;  it  is  of  a 
yellowish  colour,  of  a  strong  scent,  and 
sharp  taste. 

To  get  the  best  gum-ivy,  is  at  Michaelmas 
or  spring,  by  driving  several  great  nails  into 
ivy  stalks,  and  having  worked  them  about 
till  they  become  very  loose  let  them  remain, 
and  gum  will  issue  out  of  the  holes ;  or  you 
may  slit  several  great  ivy  stalks,  and  visit 
them  once  a  month,  or  oftener,  to  take  what 
gum  flows  from  the  wounded  parts.  This 
gum  is  excellent  for  the  angler's  use,  perhaps 
nothing  more  so  under  the  form  of  unguents. 
Take  the  oil  of  ivy-berries,  made  by  expres- 
sion, and  put  some  in  a  box,  to  scent  a  few 
worms  just  before  you  use  them. 


THE    DKirilELD    AKGLEH*  ipS 

Put  a  little  camphor  in  the  moss  wherein  are 
your  worms  the  day  you  angle^  and  you  will  , 
be  sure  of  good  diversion.  There  is  one 
more  receipt  which  I  shall  mention,  and  with 
which  I  have  had  great  sport  at  all  times : 
take  a  handful  of  houseleek,  andhalfahand^ 
ful  of  the  inner  green  bark  of  the  ivy,  and 
press  out  the  juice,  and  w'et  your  moss  there- 
with :  nothing  is  better  if  your  worms  are 
well  scoured,  and  kept  for  near  three  weeks. 

These  are  most  valuable  secrets  in  worm- 
fishing. 

I  could  have  added  various  ways  of  night* 
angling,  and  of  means  and  devices  which 
have  been  imparted  to  me  of  insnaring  fish 
in  the  day-time,  but  as  I  never  made  use  of 
any  of  them,  and  w  illing  to  preserve  the  re- 
putation of  a  fair  sportsman,  which  I  trust  I 
have  hitherto  inviolably  maintained,  I  shall  re- 
frain from  promulgating  those  arts,  the  prac- 
tice of  which  ought  to  be  discountenanced  and 
zealously  suppressed  by  every  liberal  angler ; 

& 


194  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER, 

I  shall  therefore  wave  the  subject,  and  have 
only  to  repeat  an  observation  made  in  a- 
nother  part  of  this  work,  that  no  stream  will 
be  hm^t  by  angling,  provided  fish  are  not 
taken  under  a  proper  size,  which,  for  Trout, 
in  the  rivers  about  Driffield,  should  be  a 
poupd  in  weight :  and  shall  here  notice,  that, 
with  the  fly,  it  is  by  far  the  most  ingenious  and 
delightful  of  all  angling,  and  in  every  respect 
superior  to  the  rest ;  the  exercise  it  requires 
is  gentle  and  pleasing ;  nor  is  the  angler  con- 
fined to  any  one  part  of  the  river,  but  mov- 
ing from  stream  to  stream,  in  all  places,  is 
very  agreeably  surprised  at  the  manner  in 
which  the  fish  are  allured* 


THE   DKIFFIELD  ANGLER.  195 


CHAPTER    XV. 


Xi  A  W  S 

AS  TO 

ANGLING,  SCc. 

^NY  person  may  make  a  fish-pond  with- 
out licence ;  because  it  is  a  matter. of  profit, 
and  for  the  increase  of  victuals,     %  Inst* 

Respecting  the  right  and  property  of  fish^ 
it  has  been  held,  that  where  the  lord  of  the 
manor  has  the  soil  on  both  sides  of  the  river, 
it  is  good  evidence  that  he  has  the  right  of 
fishing ;  but  where  the  river  ebbs  and  flows, 
and  is  an  arm  of  the  sea,  there  it  is  common 

S  2 


156  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER* 

to  all ;  and  he  who  claims  a  privilege  to  hiiii- 
self  must  prove  it.  In  the  Severn,  the  soil 
belongs  to  the  owners  of  the  land  on  each 
bide;  and  the  soil  of  the  river  Thames  is  in 
the  king,  &c.  but  the  fishing  is  common  to 
alb     iMod.  105.     Burr-  21S4. 

He  who  is  owner  of  the  soil  of  a  private 
rivei^  has  ^^seperalis  pisearia;"  and  he  w^ho 
has  ^'libera  piscaria"  has  a  property  in  the 
fitih,  and  may  bring  a  possessory  action  for 
tliem  ;  but  *' communis  piscaria"  is  like  the 
case  of  all  other  commons.    S  Salk.  637. 

And  by  3  Ed.  L  c.  20.  If  any  trespass- 
ers in  ponds  be  thereof  attauited  at  the 
suit  of  the  party,  great  and  large  amends  shall 
be  awarded,  according  to  the  trespass ;  and 
they  shall  have  three  years  imprisonment, 
and  shall  after  make  fine  at  the  kmg's  plea- 
sure (if  they  have  w^hereof)  and  then  shall 
find  good  security  that  after  they  shall  not 
commit  the  like  trespass  :  and  if  they  have 
not  whereof  to  make  f;ne,   after  three  years 


THE    DaiFFJCELD    ANGLKll.  197 

imprisonment,  they  shall  find  like  security  ; 
and  if  they  cannot  find  like  surety,  they  shall 
abjure  the  realm.  If  none  sue  within  the 
year  and  a  day,  the  king  shall  have  suit. 

Trespassers  in  ponds,  are  those  who  en- 
deavour to  take  fish  therein.     2  Inst.  200. 

By  31  H.  VIII.  c.  2.  s.  2.  If  any  evil-dispos- 
ed persons  shall  fish  in  the  day-time,  from  six 
o'clock  in  the  morning,  till  six  in  the  even- 
ing, in  any  ponds,  stews  or  moats,  with  nets, 
hooks,  or  bait,  against  the  will  of  the  owners, 
they  shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  at  the  suit 
of  the  king,  or  the  party  aggrieved,  suffer 
imprisonment  for  three  months,  aiid  find  se- 
curity for  their  good  abearing. 

And  by  5  Eliz.  c,  21.  Any  person  wlio  shall 
unlawfully  break,  cut,  or  destroy  any  head  or 
dam  of  a  fish-pond,  or  wrongfully  fish  there- 
in, with  intent  to  take  or  kill  fish,  shall,  on 
conviction,  at  the  suit  of  the  king,  or  of  the 
party,  at  the  assizes  or  sessions,  be  imprison- 

S  S 


198  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

ed  three  months,  and  pay  treble  damages ; 
and  after  the  ex[uration  of  the  three  months 
shall  find  sm^eties  for  his  good  abearing  foi: 
seven  years,  or  remain,  till  he  doth. 

By  22  and  23  of  C.  II.  c.  25.  If  any  per- 
son shall  use  any  net,  angle,  hair,  noose^ 
troll,  or  spear  ;  or  shall  lay  any  weirs,  pots> 
fish-hooks,  or  other  engines ;  or  shall  take 
any  fish  by  any  means  or  device  whatsoever, 
or  be  aiding  thereunto,  in  any  river,  stew, 
pond,  or  moat,  or  other  water,  without  th^ 
consent  of  the  lord  or  owner  of  the  wateii, 
and  be  thereof  convicted  by  confession,  or 
oath  of  one  witness,  before  one-  justice,  in 
one  month  after  the  offence;  every  such 
offender,  in  killing  or  taking  fish,  shall  give 
to  the  party  injured  such  recompence,  and  in 
such,  time,  as  the  justice  shall  appoint,  not 
exceeding  treble  damages ;  and  shall  also 
pay  to  the  overseers  for  the  use  of  the  poor, 
such  sum,  hot  exceeding  ten  shillings,  as  th.e 
justice  shall  think  meet,  to  be  levied  by  dis- 
tress j  and  for  vyant  of  distress,  to  be  com- 


THE   DKIFFIELD   ANGLER,  199 

mitted  to  the  house  of  coFrectioii  for  any 
time  not  exceedmg  one  month,  unless  he 
enter  into  bond,  with  one  surety,  ta  the  party 
injured,  not  exceeding  ten  pounds,  never  to 
offend  again  in  like  manner.     S.  7.. 

And  by  the  same  statute^  s.  8.  the  justice 
may  cut,  take,  and  destroy  all  such  angles, 
spears,  hairs,  nooses,  trolls,  weirs,  pots,  fish- 
hooks, nets,  or  other  engines,  wherewith 
such  offender  shall  be  apprehended* 

Any  person  who  shall  think  himself  ag^ 
grieved,  may  appeal  to  the  next  sessions, 
whose  determination  shall  be  final,  if  no  title 
to  any  land,  royalty,  or  fishery,  be  thereia 
concerned,     S.  9, 

By  4  and  5  W.  c.  23.  No  person  shall  have 
or  keep  any  net,  angle,  leap,  piche,  or  other 
engine  for  the  taking  of  fish,  other  than  the 
makers  and  sellers  thereof,  and  other  than 
the  owner  and  occupier  of  a  river  or  fishery; 
and  except  fishermen  and  their  apprentices 


goo  THE    DRIFFIELD   A5s[GLEn. 

lawfully  authorized  in  navigable  rivers.  And 
the  owner  or  occupier  of  the  river  or  fishery, 
and  every  other  person  by  him  appointed, 
may  s^ize,  detain,  and  keep  to  his  own  use, 
every  net,  angle,  leap,  piche,  and  other  en- 
gine, which  he  shall  find  used  or  laid,  or  in 
the  possession  of  any  person  fishing  in  any 
river  or  fishery,  without  the  consent  of  the 
ow^ner  or  occupier  thereof.  And  any  per- 
son, authorized  by  a  justice's  warrant,  may 
in  the  day-time,  search  the  houses,  out-houses, 
and  other  places  of  any  person  hereby  pro- 
hibited to  have  or  keep  the  same,  who  shall 
be  suspected  to  have  in  his  custody,  or 
possession,  any  net,  angle,  leap,  piche,  or 
other  engine  aforesaid,  and  seize  and  keep 
the  same  to  his  own  use^  or  cut  and  de- 
stroy the  same,  as  things  prohibited  by  this 
act  to  be  kept  by  persons  of  their  degree* 
S.  5  and  6. 

By  5  G.  III.  c.  14.  If  any  person  shall 
enter  into  any  park,  or  paddock,  fenced  in, 
and  inclosed,  or  into  any  garden,  orchard, 


THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER.  201 

or  yard,  adjoining  or  belonging  to  any  dwell- 
ing-house, in  or  through  which  park,  or  pad- 
dock, garden,  orchard,  or  yard,  any  stream  of 
water  shall  run,  or  wherein  shall  be  any  river, 
stream,  pond,  pool,  moat,  stew,  or  other 
water,  and  by  any  means,  or  device  whatso- 
ever, shall  steal,  take,  kill,  or  destroy,  any 
fish,  bred  or  kept  therein,  without  the  con- 
sent of  the  owner  thereof,  or  shall  be  aiding 
therein,  or  shall  receive  or  buy  any  such 
fish,  knowing  the  same  to  be  so  stolen  or 
taken  as  aforesaid,  and  shall  be  convicted 
thereof  at  the  assizes,  within  six  calendar 
months  after  the  offence  shall  be  committed, 
shall  be  transported  for  seven  years.  — 
And  any  offender,  surrendering  himself  to  a 
justice,  or  being  apprehended,  or  in  custody 
for  such  an  offence,  or  on  any  other  account, 
who  shall  make  confession  thereof,  and  a 
true  discovery,  on  oath,  of  his  accomplice  ov 
accomplices,  so  as  such  accomplice  may  be 
apprehended,  and  shall  on  trial  give  evidence 
so  as  to  convict  such  accomplice,  shall  be 
discharged  of  the  offence  so  by  him  conr 
fessed,     S   1.  £• 


SOS  THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER. 

By  9  G.  III.  s.  3,  4.  If  any  person  shall 
take,  kill,  or  destroy,  or  attempt  to  take, 
kill,  or  destroy,  any  jfish  in  any  river,  or 
stream,  pond,  pool,  or  other  water,  (not  in 
any  park,  or  paddock,  or  in  any  garden, 
orchard,  or  yard,  adjoining  or  belonging  to 
any  dwelling-house,  but  in  any  other  inclosed 
ground,  being  private  property)  he  shall,  on 
conviction  before  one  justice,  on  the  oath  of 
one  witness,  forfeit  five  pounds  to  the  owner 
of  the  fishery  of  such  river,  pond,  or  other 
water  :  and  such  justice,  on  complaint  upon 
oath,  may  issue  his  warrant  to  bring  the  per- 
son complained  before  him;  and  if  he  shall 
be  convicted  before  such  justice,  or  any  other 
iOf  the  county  or  place,  he  shall  immediately 
pay  the  said  penalty  of  five  pounds  to  such 
justice,  for  the  use  of  the  person  as  the  same 
is  hereby  appointed  to  be  paid  unto  ;  and,  in 
default  thereof,  shall  be  committed  by  such 
justice  to  the  house  of  correction  for  any 
time  not  exceeding  six  months,  unless  the 
forfeiture  shall  be  sooner  paid :  or  such 
owner  of  the  fishery  may^^   within  six  calen- 


THE    DRIFFIELD   ANGLER.  203 

dar  months  after  the  offence,  bring  an  action 
for  the  penalty  in  any  of  the  courts  of  record 
at  Westminster^ 

But  nothing  in  this  act  shall  extend  to  sub- 
ject any  person  to  the  penalties  thereof,  who 
shall  take,  kill,  and  carry  awaj%  any  fish  in 
any  river  or  other  water  wherein  such  person 
shall  have  a  right  so  to  do.     S.  5, 

By  9  G.  L  c.  22.  Generally  distinguished 
by  the  name  of  the  Black  Act,  if  any  person 
being  armed  and  disguised,  shall  unlawfully 
steal  or  take  away  fish  out  of  any  river  or 
pond,  or  (whether  armed  and  disguised  or 
not)  shall  unlawfully  and  maliciously  break 
down  the  head  or  mound  of  any  fish-pond, 
whereby  the  fish  shall  be  lost  or  destroyed, 
or  shall  rescue  any  person  in  custody  for  such 
offence,  or  procure  any  other  to  join  with 
him  therein,  he  shall  be  guilty  of  felony 
without  benefit  of  clergy. 

By  2  H.  VI:  c.  15.  No  person  may  fasten 


204  THE    DRIFFIELD    ANGLER. 

nets,  &c.  across  rivers  to  destroy  fish,  and 
disturb  the  passage  of  vessels,  on  pain  of 
five  pounds. 

By  33  G.  II.  No  person  shall  take,  or 
knowingly  have  in  his  possession,  either  in  the 
water  or  on  shore,  or  sell,  or  expose  to  sale, 
any  spawn,  fry,  or  brood  of  fish,  or  any  un- 
sizeable  fish,  or  fish  out  of  season,  or   any 
Smelt  not  five  inches  long,   and  any  person 
may  seize  any  such,  together  with  baskets 
and  package,  and  charge  a  constable  or  other 
peace-officer  with  the  offender  and  with  the 
goods,  who  shall  carry  them  before  a  justice; 
and  on  conviction  before  such  justice,  the 
same  shall  be  forfeited  and  delivered  to  the 
prosecutor  :  and  the  offender  shall  also  for- 
feit twenty  shillings,  to  be  levied  by  distress, . 
by    w^arrant  of  such  justice;    half  to    the 
prosecutor,   and  half  to  the  poor  where  the 
offence  w^as  committed  (and  every  inhabitant 
of  such  parish  may,  nevertheless,    be  a   wit- 
ness) :    for  want  of  sufficient  distress,  the 
offender  to  be  committed  to  the  house  of 


THE     DRIFFIELD    ANGLEH. 


205 


carrection,  there  to  be  kept  to  hard  labour 
for  any  time  not  exceeding  three  months, 
unless  the  forfeiture  be  sooner  paid. 

Provided  that  such  justice  may  mitigate 
the  said  penalty,  so  as  not  to  remit  above 
one  half.  Persons  aggrieved  may  appeal  to 
the  next  sessions. 


MARRIOTT, 


PART    II. 


OW  SMOOTIMG, 

COURSING,   &c. 


»>h<B>K4<-* 


CHAPTEll    I. 


JL  HE  first  thing  to  be  thought  of  in  thi^ 
manly  exercise  is  the  fowling-piece,  the  length 
of  the  cylinder,  and  diameter  of  the  caliber; 
with  the  weight  of  the  barrel,  stock,  and  lock, 
when  complete. 

OF  THE  BARREL. 

In  my  opinion,  the  barrels  best  calculated 
for  general  use,  (such  as  I  have  employed 
T  2 


208  OF    SHOOTING, 

the  last  fifty  years,  and  which  I  have  found 
to  answer  every  purpose)  are  from  thirty- 
four  to  thirty-nine  inches;  whether  I  consult 
the  appearance  of  the  piece,  its  lightness^  or 
the  ease  with  which  it  is  managed,  I  believe 
that  a  barrel  not  exceeding  the  one  or  less 
than  the  other  of  these  dimensions,  is  the 
most  eligible  :  the  caliber  of  thirty-six  should 
be  small  five-eighths;  the  caliber  of  thirty-  nine 
should  be  full  five-eighths  ;  the  weight  of  the 
barrel  three  pounds  and  a  half,  and  when 
full  mounted,  it  should  weigh  six  pounds 
and  a  half,  at  the  least 

OF  THE  STOCK,  LOCK,  &c. 

Upon  the  other  parts  of  a  fowling-piec^ 
there  is  little  required  to  be  said,  as  they  are 
varied  according  to  the  fancy  of  the  work* 
man,  or  the  whim  of  the  purchaser,  without 
any  advantage  or  detriment  to  the  piece. 
The  wood  which  is  most  commonly  used  for 
the  stock,  and  which  appears  best  for  the 
purpose,  is  walnut ;   and  the  only  choice  in 


CaURSINO,  ETC.  g09 

it  is  that  the  grain  be  even  and  close,  and  as 
free  as  possible  from  knots  and  burrs,  which, 
tliough  they  may  add  to  the  beauty  of  the 
stock,  seldom  fail  to  take  away  its  strength, 
unless  they  are  confined  entirely  to  the  but 
part ;  as  to  the  curvature,  no  particular  de- 
gree  can  be  assigned  as  a  standard ;  different 
persons  requiring  different  degrees,  according 
to  the  length  of  their  necks,  and  to  the  man- 
ner in  which  they  hold  their  heads  whilst 
taking  aim;  this  therefore,  as  well  as  the 
length  of  but,  depends  partly  upon  the  cir- 
cumstances just  mentioned,  but  chiefly  upoD 
the  length  of  the  arm,  which  can  be  deter- 
mined with  great  accuracy  by  the  gun-smith, 
from  his  observing  the  manner  that  the  shoot- 
er presents  his  piece  and  takes  his  aim* 

With  regard  to  the  lock  I  have  nothing 
material  to  offer ;  the  genius  and  industry  of 
the  English  w^orkmen  having  already  brought 
them  to  such  a  degree  of  elegance  and  per- 
fection, that  I  have  nothing  further  to  hope 
i&T  or  require.  The  real  improvements  are 
T  3 


210  OF    SHOOTING, 

not  confined  to  any  particular  maker,  and 
though  the  minutiae  peculiar  to  each,  may  de- 
termine tlie  purchaser  in  his  preference,  no 
person  need  fear  much  disappointment  in  the 
essential  qualities  of  a  lock,  provided  he  goes 
to  a  good  price  :  it  is  of  more  consequence 
to  the  excellence  of  a  lock,  that  the  springs 
be  proportioned  to  each  other,  than  that 
they  should  be  made  very  strong ;  a  moderate 
degree  of  force  is  sufficient  to  produce  the 
.required  effect,  and  whatever  exceeds  this, 
proves  detrimental,  .by  rendering  the  trigger 
difficult  to  draw,  or  throws  the  piece  from 
the  direction  in  which  it  was  pointed.  Some 
gunsmiths  contend,  that  a  barrel,  in  order  to 
throw  its  shot  close,  ought  to  have  its  caliber 
narrower  in  the  middle  than  at  either  the 
breech  or  muzzle ;  whilst  others  insist  that 
the  caliber  ought  to  contract  gradually  from 
the  breech  to  the  muzzle :  with  respect  to 
these  circumstances  I  shall  only  observe,  that 
both  are  admirably  calculated  to  make  the 
piece  recoil  much.  Of  all  the  contrivances 
V^hich  have  been  mentioned,  not  one  appears 


COURSING,  ETC.  211 

to  answer  the  end  intended;  the  greater 
part  of  gunsmiths  are  sensible  of  this,  and 
therefore  very  seldom  practise  them,  unless 
to  indulge  the  whim  of  their  customers.  As 
far  as  reason  and  experience  are  sufficient 
for  enabling  me  to  determine  upon  the  matter, 
I  would  reject  all  the  expedients  that  have 
hitherto  been  proposed,  and  give  a  decided 
preference  to  the  barrels  as  they  are  usually 
made,  namely,  those  whose  caliber  is  very 
smooth  and  perfectly  cylindrical  throughout : 
barrels  of  this  sort  have  long  supported  their 
credit  amongst  the  best  sportsmen.  Would 
they  only  forbear  to  determine  upon  the 
merits  or  defects  of  their  pieces,  until  they 
had  given  them  a  patient  and  impartial  trial, 
by  varying  the  quantity  of  powder  and  shot 
in  different  ways,  I  am  inclined  to  think 
there  would  be  fewer  complaints  made  of  the 
modern  fowling-pieces.  Within  my  know- 
ledge several  great  sportsmen  have  hastily 
parted  with  their  pieces,  and  thrown  a  cen- 
sure upon  the  maimer,  which,  after  experi- 
ence, proved  to  be  undeserved.     The  chief 


212  <5F   SHOOTING, 

source  of  this  error  appears  to  be  overcharge 
ing,  and  it  is  by  correcting  this  tliat  the  bad 
opinion  so  entertained  of  many  pieces  might 
be  removed :  every  barrel,  according  to  its 
caliber  and  weight,  should  have  a  suitable 
quantity  of  powder  and  the  like  of  shot, 
which  will  be  attended  with  greater  certainty 
and  effect  than  any  others,  and  these  must 
be  determined  by  repeated  trials.  If  the 
sportsman  increases  the  quantity  of  shot  a- 
bove  this,  he  lessens  the  force  of  the  discharge, 
and  at  the  same  time  increases  the  recoil ; 
and  if  he  increases  the  powder,  that  of  the 
shot  remaining  the  same,  he  also  increases 
the  recoil  and  disperses  the  shot  much  more 
than  before.  In  every  kind  of  fire-arms, 
large  charges  of  powder  are  foiind  to  dis- 
perse the  shot  very  much,  whilst  with  smaller 
charges  than  are  generally  used  it  is  thrown 
more  even  and  close;  if  the  object,  therefore, 
the  sportsman  is  about  to  shoot  at  is  at  too 
great  a  distance  for  the  shot  to  take  effect, 
and  it  may  happen  that  he  cannot  approach 
nearer  to  it,   he  ought  not  to  increase  the 


I 


COVUSiNG,  ETC.  213' 

^  quantity  of  powder  with  a  view  to  the  shot 
being  thereby  thrown  farther,  as  by  so  doing 
the  increase  of  the  range  will  be  very  trifling, 
whilst  the  dispersion  of  the  shot  will  be 
greatly  increased  ;  the  only  expedient,  in  this 
case,  is  to  use  shot  of  a  larger  size ;  the  quan- 
tity of  it  and  the  powder  being  kept  the  same 

as  has  been  found  best  to  suit  the  piece. 

a: 

I  have  at  different  times  compared  barrels 
of  all  the  intermediate  lengths  between  thirty- 
four  and  forty  inches,  of  nearly  the  same 
caliber,  viz.  from  five-eighths  to  five -eighths 
and  a  half,  and  these  were  fired  from  the 
shoulder,  and  over  a  rest  quite  firm,  at  an 
equal  distance,  and  with  equal  weight  of 
powder  and  the  same  of  shot ;  to  avoid 
every  error,  the  quire  of  paper  at  which  I 
fired  was  fixed  against  planks  of  wood;  from 
these  trials,  frequently  repeated,  I  found  the 
shot  pierced  an  equal  number  of  sheets, 
whether  it  was  fired  from  a  barrel  thirty-four, 
thirty-six,  thirty-eight,  or  forty  inches  m 
length; 


214  OF   SHOOTING, 

I  have  compared  two  barrels  of  nearfy  the 
same  cahber,  one  thirty-nine  inches  and  a- 
nother  fifty-two  inclies  long,  by  repeatedly 
firing  tliem  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
others,  at  different  distances,  from  fifty,  sixty, 
seventy,  and  eighty  paces,  the  result  of  which 
was  nearly  the  same :  the  barrel  of  thirty- 
nine  inches  drove  its  shot  through  as  many 
sheets  of  paper  as  the  barrel  of  fifty-two : 
the  conclusion  of  all  this  is,  that  the  differ- 
ence of  eight  inches  in  the  length  of  the  bar- 
rel, which  seems  to  me  to  be  more  than  is 
ever  insisted  upon  among  sportsmen,  pro- 
duces no  sensible  difference  in  the  range  of 
the  piece;  and  therefore  every  one  may 
please  himself  in  the  length  of  his  barrel, 
without  either  detriment  or  advantage  to  the 
range.  The  circumstance  of  a  duck-gun 
killing  at  a  greater  distance  than  fowling- 
pieces,  is  not  owing  to  its  length,  but  its 
greater  weight  and  thickness,  allowing  the 
charge  of  pow^der  to  be  doubled  or  trebled  ; 
which  cannot  be  done  in  a  fowling-piece 
though  strongly  reinforced;  for  a  barrel  oC 


COURSINO,  ETC,  215 

five  feet  and  a  half,  such  as  that  of  a  common 
duck-gun,  weighing  six  or  seven  pounds,  the 
whole  piece  fourteen  or  sixteen  pounds^  may 
be  fired  with  a  very  large  charge  without 
recoiling  so  much  as  to  hurt  the  shooter,  its 
weight  being  sufficient  to  resist  the  violent 
impulse  occasioned  by  the  increase  of  the 
powder :  but  in  a  fowling-piece  of  three  feet 
three  inches  barrel,  sufficiently  strong  to 
withstand  such  a  charge,  and  when  its  weight 
does  not  exceed  six  pounds  and  a  half,  the 
recoil  would  be  insupportable  ;  besides  they 
not  only  double  or  treble  the  powder  in  a 
duck-gun,  but  they  put  in  a  much  greater 
quantity  of  shot  than  is  ever  used  in  a  fowl- 
ing piece.  All  such  guns  as  are  employed 
for  wild-geese  and  wild-ducks,  should  be  bent 
a  little  upwards  about  four  inches  from  the 
muzzle,  which  makes  them  throw  their  shot 
farther  than  if  they  were  perfectly  straight. 
rT©  obtain  therefore  from  a  piece  of  ordinary 
length,  the  same  effects  as  from  a  duck-gun, 
nothing  more  is  necessary  than  to  have  the 
barrel  sufficiently  strong  to  admit  of  the 


216  OF    SHOOTING, 

charge  being  doubled  as  required,  and  the 
whole  piece  heavy  enough  to  render  the  re- 
coil supportable.  I  have  already  observed 
that  an  increase  of  powder,  above  the  charge 
generally  used,  does  not  produce  a  propor- 
tionable increase  of  range  in  the  shot;  thus 
a  double  charge  of  powder  will  not  throw  the 
ball,  or  shot,  to  twice  the  distance  the  single 
charge  does ;  this  may  be  ascertained  on  a 
still  sheet  of  water,  three  hundred  yards  long, 
or  upon  snow* 

INSTRUCTIONS  for  the  CHOICE 

OF  GUNPOWDER,  SHOT, 

WADDING,  &c. 

By  far  the  most  certain  method  of  deter- 
mining the  quality,  is  by  drying  some  of  it 
very  well,  and  then  trying  how  many  sheets 
of  paper  it  will  drive  the  shot  through^  at  the 
distance  of  fifteen  or  twenty  yards.  In  the 
trial,  the  shooter  should  be  very  careful  to 
use  the  same  sized  shot  in  each  experiment, 
the  quantity  of  the  shot  and  powder  bemg  re- 


COURSING,   ETC.  217 

gulated  by  exact  weight,  otherwise  he  cannot, 
even  in  this  experiment,  arrive  at  any  cer- 
tainty, in  comparing  the  different  strength  of 
powders,  or  of  the  same  powder  at  different 
times.  Powder  ought  to  be  kept  very  dry, 
as  every  degree  of  moisture  injures  it :  good 
gunpowder  however  does  not  readily  imbibe 
moisture ;  and  perhaps  there  is  no  greater 
proof  of  the  bad  quality  of  powder,  than  its 
growing  damp  quickly  when  exposed  to  tiie 
air ;  this  readiness  to  become  moist,  depends 
on  the  saltpetre  used  in  the  composition  not 
having  been  freed  from  the  common  salt  it 
contained  in  its  crude  state,  and  which  in 
consequence  has  a  very  strong  attraction  for 
watery  particles :  powder  may  acquire  a 
small  degree  of  dampness,  and  be  freed  from 
it  again  by  drying,  without  much  injury  to  its 
quality ;  but  if  the  moisture  is  considerable, 
the  saltpetre  is  dissolved,  and  the  intimate 
mixture  of  the  ingredients  thereby  entirely  de- 
stroyed. Drying  powder  with  too  greut  a 
heat  also  injures  it ;  for  there  is  a  degree  of 
heat,  which  although  not  sufficient  to  fire  the 

U 


218  OF    SHOOTING, 

powder,  will  yet  dissipate  the  sulphur  and 
impair  the  composition  by  destroying  the 
texture  of  the  grains ;  the  heat  of  the  sun  is 
perhaps  the  greatest  it  can  with  safety  be  ex- 
posed to,  and  if  properly  managed  is  suffici- 
cient  for  the  purpose ;  when  this  cannot  be 
had,  the  heat  of  a  fire  regulated  to  the  same 
degree  may  be  used  ;  for  this  end  a  heated 
tin,  or  a  pewter  plate,  is  perhaps  as  good  as 
any  thing,  because  they  retain  so  moderate 
a  heat,  that  there  can  be  little  danger  of  spoil- 
ing the  powder  by  producing  the  consequen- 
ces before-mentioned.  The  sportsman  should 
be  very  particular  in  the  mode  of  keeping 
his  powder ;  I  would  recommend  him  always 
to  air  it  and  his  flask  before  he  takes  the  field, 
and  carry  it  in  his  breeches'- pocket,  in  order 
to  keep  it  from  any  kind  of  damp. 

Flasks  made  of  copper,  or  tin,  are  much 
better  for  keeping  powder  in,  than  those 
made  of  leather. 


COURSING,   ETC.  219 

OF  THE  SHOT. 

The  choice  of  shot  is  highly  worthy  of  the 
sportsman's  care  ;  it  should  be  equally  round 
and  void  of  cavities,  the  patent  milled  shot  is 
at  this  time  preferred  to  all  other  sorts,  and 
is  in  general  use.  It  is  extremely  important 
for  the  success  of  the  sportsman,  that  he 
should  proportion  the  size  of  his  shot,  as 
well  to  the  particular  species  of  game  he 
means  to  pursue,  as  tp  the  season  of  killing 
it.  In  the  first  month  of  moor-game  shoot- 
ing, shot  No.  1  should  be  used,  till  about  the 
first  of  September,  after  that  No,  2.  No.  1 
should  also  be  used  for  partridge-shooting  all 
the  month  of  September,  after  that,  No.  2 
for  the  whole  of  October ;  after  which  time 
the  birds  get  full  feathered  and  strong,  also 
hares  get  better  covered  with  fur,  therefore 
it  will  be  necessary  to  use  No.  3  all  the  sea- 
son (except  for  snipes)  ;  this  size  seems  to  be 
the  best  of  any,  it  preserves  a  proper  medium 
between  shot  too  large,  and  that  which  is  too 
U  2 


220  OF    SHOOTINO, 

small,  and  will  kill  a  hare  from  the  distance 
of  thirty-five  to  forty-five  paces,  and  par- 
tridges at  nearly  fifty,  provided  the  powder 
be  good.  But  if  the  sportsman  proposes  to 
shoot  wild  ducks,  or  hares,  he  had  better  use 
No.  4  or  5  ;  and  in  any  case  where  large 
shot  is  required,  No.  5  will  be  found  better 
than  any  other,  for  its  size  is  not  so  large  as 
to  prevent  it  from  sufficiently  garnishing,  or 
being  equally  spread  in  the  circle,  and  it  will 
at  the  same  time  perform  in  effect  all  that 
larger  sized  shot  can  do,  which  garnishes 
but  very  little,  if  at  all. 

THE  PROPORTIONS  OF  POWDER 
AND  SHOT  IN  THE  CHARGE. 

To  find  the  charge  that  gives  the  longest 
range  in  fowling-pieces  of  different  dimensi- 
ons, must  be  allowed  to  be  a  discovery  of  infi- 
nite importance  to  every  sportsman.  Every 
barrel  has  a  particular  load,  not  a  measure 
estimated  by  any  rules,  to  be  drawn  from  a 
comparison  made  between  the  proportions 


COURSING,    ETC.  221 

of  the  caliber,  and  the  length  of  the  barrel, 
with  which  it  will  shoot  much  more  at  a  cer- 
tainty, and  with  more  effect.  It  cannot  be 
doubted  but  the  sportsman  will  make  some 
experiments  with  his  own  barrels  in  order  to 
attain  this  end  :  it  is  certain,  that  by  using 
small  charges  at  the  first,  and  increasing  the 
quantity  of  powder  by  degrees,  the  range  will 
increase  to  a  certain  point ;  after  which,  if 
the  charge  be  augmented,  it  will  progressively 
diminish,  as  in  consequence  of  overloading 
with  shot,  the  powder  has  not  sufficient 
strength  to  throw  it  to  its  proper  distance ; 
for  if  the  object  fired  at  be  distant,  one  half 
of  the  pellets  composing  the  charge,  by  their 
too  great  quantity  and  weight,  will  strike 
against  each  other,  and  be  flattened  and  fall 
by  the  way ;  and  those  that  reach  the  mark 
will  have  [small  force,  and  produce  but  little 
or  no  effect ;  therefore  to  overload  is  but 
the  strange  fancy  of  some  sportsmen,  who 
imagine  they  cannot  kill  unless  they  put  an 
ounce  and  a  half,  or  more,  of  large  shot  into 
the   piece;    it  is  true  that  they  destroy  a 

U  3 


Q22  OF    SHOOTING, 

quantity  of  game,  but  in  some  measure  they 
are  punished  by  the  severe  strokes  they  re- 
ceive on  the  cheek,  in  consequence  of  the 
excessive  recoil. 

OF  THE  WADDING. 

Most  sportsmen  pique  themselves  with  the 
idea  that  card-paper  and  hat  wadding  is  much 
the  best  of  any,  and  pretend  it  to  be  a  great 
secret  among  them  ;  however  I  can  only  say 
that  having  made  use  of  card  and  hat  wad- 
ding near  fifty  years  ago,  I  differ  from  their 
opinion,  as  1  have  used  all  kinds  of  wadding. 
I  never  found  any  yet  equal  to  fine  tow, 
chopped  short  to  about  half  an  inch,  and 
rolled  into  round  balls  to  fit  the  caliber, 
giving  it  four  or  five  presses  with  the  ram-rod 
lightly,  which  will  mould  the  wadding  of  tow 
close  to  the  barrel ;  and  over  the  shot,  soft 
brown  paper,  such  as  the  battle  powder  is 
lapt  in,  and  rubbed  very  soft  with  your  hand, 
is  the  best  wadding ;  it  combines  suppleness 
with  consistence;   and  moulds  itself  to  the 


COURSING,  ETC.  223 

barrel :  it  must  also  be  observed,  that  such 
wadding  never  falls  to  the  ground  in  less 
than  ten  or  twelve  yards  from  the  muzzle  of 
the  piece,  if  properly  placed  on  the  powder 
and  shot,  and  makes  the  piece  shoot  closer 
and  much  stronger  than  any  other  kind  of 
wadding,  except  that  made  of  the  best  velvet 
cork.  A  cork  wadding  I  have  found  by  re- 
peated trials  to  be  the  best  of  any  for  in- 
creasing the  range  and  closeness  of  shot. 

I  have  made  several  experiments  in  regard 
to  a  cork  wadding,  which,  if  adapted  to  the 
caliber  of  the  piece,  produces  greater  effect 
than  either  hat  or  card-paper,  in  these  re- 
spects, that  by  stopping  the  barrel  more  her- 
metically, it  prevents  the  elastic  fluid,  pro- 
duced by  the  explosion  of  the  powder,  from 
escaping  between  the  partition  of  wadding 
and  the  charge,  and  preserves  all  its  force 
to  the  mouth  of  the  piece,  thereby  rendering 
the  effect  of  the  powder  greater. 


224  OF    SHOOTING, 

METHOD  OF  LOADING  A 
FOWLING-PIECE. 

Some  attention  is  requisite  thereto ;  the 
powder  should  only  be  slightly  rammed 
down,  for  which  purpose  it  is  sufficient  to 
press  the  ram-rod  four  or  five  times  on  tlie 
w^adding,  in  order  to  mould  it  to  the  barrel. 
The  usual  practice  is  to  ram  down  the  wad- 
ding by  main  force,  which  is  wrong,  for  by 
compressing  the  powder  in  this  violent  man- 
ner, some  of  the  grains  will  be  so  bruised 
that  the  explosion  will  not  be  quick,  and  the 
shot  wdll  be  spread  wide :  in  pouring  the 
charge  of  pow^der  into  the  barrel,  care  should 
be  taken  to  hold  the  measure  as  much  as 
possible  in  a  perpendicular  line,  that  the 
pow  der  may  more  readily  fall  to  the  bottom ; 
it  is  even  of  service  to  strike  the  but-end  of 
the  gun  gently  on  the  ground,  in  order  to  de- 
tach those  grains  of  powder  which  in  falling 
down  adhere  to  the  sides  of  the  barrel.  The 
shot  should  never  be  rammed  down  so  tight 


COURSING,  ETC.  225 

as  the  powder ;   after  having  given  a  stroke 
on  the  ground  with  the  but-end  of  the  gun  in 
order  to  settle  it  the  same  as  for  the  powder, 
the  wadding  should  then  be  gently  pu  t  do  vvn,  but 
not  so  close  as  that  over  the  powder,  because 
when  the  shot  is  wadded  too  tight  it  spreads 
wide,  and   the  piece   will  recoil.     In   this, 
therefore,  as  well  as  in  every  other  mode  of 
loading,    the  sportsman  should  never  carry 
his  gun  under  his  arm  with  the  muzzle  inclin- 
ed to  the  ground,  as  that  practice  at  all  times 
loosens  the  wadding  and  charge  too  much, 
and  sometimes  occasions  the  loss  of  the  shot. 
When  the  piece  is  fired,  it  should  be  reload- 
ed  immediately  while  the  barrel  is   warm, 
lest,  by  delaying  it,  a  certain  moisture  should 
be  formed  in  the  barrel,  which  would  retain 
a  part  of  the  powder  when   pouring  in   the 
charge,  and  hinder  it  from  falling  to  the  bot- 
tom.    Powder,    as  already  mentioned,   will 
imbibe  moisture  from  the  air,  and  therefore 
it  is  of  additional  advantage  to  reload    the 
piece  whilst  the  barrel  is  warm,  because  some 
part  of  the  moisture  will  be  thereby  evaporat- 


226  OF    SHOOTING, 

ed.  For  the  same  reason,  the  sportsman 
should  fire  off  a  little  powder  before  he  loads 
the  first  time,  as  it  has  been  found,  even  in 
the  driest  seasons,  that  the  coldness  of  the 
barrel,  and  perhaps  some  little  moisture  con- 
densed in  its  cavity,  has  sensibly  diminished 
the  force  of  the  powder  in  the  first  discharge. 
Some  sportsmen  prime  before  they  load  ; 
this  may  be  proper  when  the  touch-hole  is 
enlarged,  because  in  that  case  if  the  piece  is 
not  first  primed  it  will,  in  loading,  prime  it- 
self, which  diminishes  the  charge  ;  but  when 
the  touch-hole  is  of  its  proper  size,  the  piece 
C^^ould  never  be  primed  until  after  it  is  load- 
ed, for  then  it  will  be  known  from  tlie  few 
grains  of  powder  which- usually  make  their 
way  into  the  pan,  that  the  touch-hole  is  clear 
and  unobstructed  ;  and  on  the  contrary  if  no 
grains  come  through,  that  it  will  be  proper 
to  strike  the  but-end  of  the  gun  smartly  with 
your  hand,  and  to  prick  the  touch-hole  till 
they  appear.  But  whether  the  practice  is  to 
prime  before  or  after  loading  the  piece,  it  is 
highly  proper  after  every  discharge  to  prick 


COURSING,  ETC,  22f 

the  touch-hole  ;  and  what  is  still  better,  to 
guard  against  all  remains  of  fuze,  by  inserting 
into  the  touch-hole  the  feather  of  a  par- 
tridge's wing,  which  not  only  will  clear  all 
those  dangerous  remains,  but  if  the  piece  is 
delayed  to  be  recharged  will  take  away  all 
humidity  that  may  be  contracted. 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SHOOTING 
WELL. 

Every  sportsman  has  his  own  manner  of 
bringing  up  his  gun  to  his  shoulder  and  tak- 
ing aim,  and  each  follows  his  own  fancy  with 
respect  to  the  stock  of  his  fowling  piece,  and 
its  shape  ;  some  like  it  short,  others  long,  one 
prefers  it  straight,  another  bent;  and  al- 
though there  are  some  who  shoot  equally  well 
with  pieces  stocked  in  diiferent  ways  and 
shapes,  yet  certain  principles  may  be  laid 
down,  as  well  upon  the  proper  length  as 
upon  the  proper  degree  of  bend  that  the 
stock  of  a  gun  should  have  ;  but,  in  the  ap- 
plication, those  principles  are  frequently  and 


228  OF    SHOOTING, 

more  commonly  counteracted  by  the  idea  of 
the  particular  convenience  of  the  shooter  ; 
however  it  is  certain,  that  for  a  tall  long- 
armed  man,    the  stock  of  a  gun  should  be 
longer  than  for  one  of  a  less  stature   and 
shorter  arm  ;  that  a  straight  stock  is  proper 
for  him  who  has  high  shoulders  and  a  short 
neck,  for  if  it  bent  much  it  would  be  very 
difficult  for  him,  especially  in  the  quick  mo- 
tion required  in  shooting  at  a  flying  or  run- 
ning object,  to  place  the  but-end  of  the  gun- 
stock  firmly  to  the  shoulder,  the  upper  part 
alone  w  ould  in  general  be  fixed,  which  would 
not  only  raise  the  muzzle  and  consequently 
shoot  high,    but  make  the  recoil  be  much 
more  sensibly  felt  than  if  the  whole  end  of 
the  stock  was  firmly  placed  on  the  shoulder  : 
besides,   supposing  the  shooter  to  bring  the 
but  home  to  his  shoulder,  he  w^ould  scarcely 
be  able  to  level  his  piece  at  the  object ;  on 
the  contrary,  a  man  with  low  shoulders  and 
a  long  neck,  requires  a  stock  more  bent,  for 
if  it  is  straight  he  will,  in  the  act  of  lower- 
ing his  head  to  that  place  of  the  stock  at 


COURSING,   ETC.  229 

which  his  cheek  should  rest  ia  taking  aim, 
feel  a  constrauit  that  he  never  would  experi- 
ence ;  when  by  the  effect  of  the  proper  degree 
of  bend,  the  stock  affords  him  some  assist- 
ance, and  as  it  were  meets  his  aim  half  way. 
However  I  would  advise  the  sportsman  in 
the  choice  of  a  fowling-piece,  to  have  a  long 
stock  in  preference  to  a  short  one,  and  at 
the  same  time  to  have  it  more  bent  than 
usual ;  for  a  long  stock  sits  more  firm  to  the 
-shoulder  than  a  short  one,  and  particularly 
so,  when  the  shooter  is  accustomed  to  place 
his  left  hand,  which  principally  supports  the 
piece,  above  half  way  to  the  entrance  of  the 
ramrod  into  the  stock  ;  the  practice  of  placing 
that  hand  near  the  bridge  of  the  guard  is  un- 
doubtedly a  bad  one,  the  aim  is  never  so 
sure,  nor  has  the  shooter  such  a  ready  com- 
mand over  his  piece,  as  when  he  places  his 
hand  above  half  way  to  the  entrance  of  the 
ramrod,  and  at  the  same  time  grasps  the 
barrel  instead  of  resting  it  between  his  fore- 
finger and  thumb,  as  is  the  general  custom ; 
it  may  therefore  be  depended  upon,  that  a 
X 


230  6v  sHOotlNCf, 

stock  bent  a  little  more  than  oixlinary  is  bet- 
ter for  shooting  true  thail  one  too  straight ; 
because,  the  latter  in  coming  up  to  the  aim 
is  subject  to  the  inconvenience  of  causing 
the  sportsman  to  shoot  too  high.  I  also 
would  advise  him  to  have  his  fovvling-pie(:;e 
a  little  elevated  at  the  tnnzzle,  and  the  sight 
fethail  and  flat  ;  for  the  experienced  well 
know  that  it  is  more  usual  to  shoot  low  than 
high  ;  it  is  therefore  of  service  that  a  piece 
should  shoot  a  little  high,  and  then  the  more 
flat  the  sight  the  better  the  line  of  aim  will 
Coincide  with  that  of  the  fire,  and  in  conse- 
quence the  gun  will  be  less  liable  to  shoot 
low.  The  method  to  avoid  missing  a  cross- 
^hot,  whether  it  be  flying  or  running,  is  not 
only  to  take  aim  before  the  object,  but  like- 
wise not  involuntarily  to  stop  the  motion  of 
the  arms  at  the  moment  of  pulling  tiie  trig- 
ger, for  the  instant  the  hand  stops  in  ordet 
to  fire,  although  the  space  of  time  is  almost 
imperceptible,  the  object  of  a  bird  gets  be- 
yond the  line  of  aim,  and  the  shot  will  fly 
behind  it :  if  a  hare  is  shot  at  in  this  man- 


COURSING,  ETC.  231 

Tier  whilst  running,  and  especially  if  at  a 
distance,  the  animal  will  only  be  slightly 
struck  in  the  buttocks,  and  go  away  with 
the  shot :  when  a  bird  however  is  flying  ia 
a  straight  line  from  the  shooter,  this  fault 
can  do  no  harm,  the  object  can  scarcely 
escape  if  the  piece  be  but  tolerably  well  di- 
rected ;  unless  indeed  it  is  fired  at  the  mo- 
misnt  the  game  springs,  and  before  the  bird 
has  taken  an  horizontal  flight ;  in  that  case^ 
if  t}^  h^pd  should  stop  ever  so  little  at  the 
instant  of  firing,  the  sportsman  will  shoot 
low  and  miss  the  bird.  It  becomes  there- 
fore extremely  essential  to  accustom  the  hand 
in  taking  aim  to  follow  the  object  without  sus- 
pending the  motion  in  the  least  degree, 
which  is  a  capital  point  towards  acquiring 
the  art  of  shooting  well ;  but  the  contrary 
habit,  which  is  difficult  to  correct  when  once 
contracted,  prevents  that  person  from  attain- 
ing perfection  in  the  art,  who  in  other  respects 
nmy  eminently  possess  quickness  of  sight  and 
steadiness  of  aim.  Nor  is  it  less  essential  ia 
a  cross  shot,  to  aim  before  the  object,  in 
X  2 


232  OF    SHOOTING, 

proportion  to  its  distance  at  the  time  of  fir- 
ing. Tlie  same  rule  will  nearly  hold  in  the 
case  of  shooting  hares,  partridges,  pheasants, 
quails,  woodcocks,  snipes,  or  even  wild- 
ducks  :  v/hen  a  hare  runs  in  a  straight  line 
from  the  shooter,  he  should  take  his  aim 
along  the  back  to  her  ears,  otherwise  he  will 
run  the  hazard  either  of  missing,  or  at  least 
of  not  kilHns  her.  Practice  soon  teaches 
the  sportsman  tiie  proper  distance  at  which 
he  should  shoot,  and  w^ould  infallibly  kill  any 
kind  of  game,  with  patent  shot  No.  3  ;  pro- 
vided the  aim  be  w^ell  taken  from  twenty- 
five  to  thirty-five  paces  for  the  footed,  and 
from  thirty-five  to  forty-five  and  fifty  paces 
for  the  winged  game  ;  beyond  this  distance, 
even  to  fifty-five  paces,  partridges,  pheasants, 
and  hares,  are  sometimes  killed,  but  in  ge- 
neral the  hares  are  slightly  wounded  and 
carry  away  the  shot ;  and  partridges,  at  that 
distance,  present  so  small  a  surface  that  they 
frequently  escape  untouched  between  the 
vacant  spaces  of  the  circle ;  yet  it  does  not 
follow  that  partridges  may  not  be  killed  witli 


^.. 


^33 

No.  3  patent  shot  at  sixty  paces  distant;  but 
sucli  sliots  are  very  rare ;  I  have  indeed 
heard  some  persons  say  that  they  have  killed 
partridges  and  pheasants  with  the  same  bar- 
rel and  shot  as  mentioned,  at  from  sixty  to 
one  hundred  and  twenty  paces ;  this  I  leave 
to  the  judgment  of  the  experienced  sports- 
man. 

As  the  means  of  attaining  the  art  of  shoot- 
ing flying,  many  young  beginners  shoot  at 
sw^allows ;  but  I  think  it  a  bad  method,  and 
that  no  mode  is  so  advantageous  as  the  actual 
practice  of  shooting  at  the  game,  wdiereby 
that  trepidation  and  alarm  w^hich  most  men 
feel  upon  the  rising  the  covey,  will  sooner 
be  conquered,  for  while  these  are  possessed, 
even  in  the  most  trifling  degree,  no  one  will 
attain  to  be  a  steady  and  good  shot.  A  fowl- 
ing-piece should  not  be  fired  more  than 
eighteen  or  twenty  times  without  being  wash- 
ed ;  as  a  barrel,  when  foul,  neither  shoots  so 
ready  nor  carries  the  shot  so  far  as  when 
clean.     The  flint,  pan,  and  hammer,  should 


234  OF    SHOOTING, 

be  well  wiped  after  each  shot ;  this  contri- 
butes greatly  to  make  the  piece  go  oif  quick- 
er :  the  flint  should  be  frequently  changed, 
without  waiting  till  it  misses  fire.     A  gun 
should  never  be  fired  with  the  prime  of  the 
preceding  day ;    it  may  happen  that  an  old 
priming  will  sometimes  go   off  well,  but  it 
will  more  frequently  contract  moisture  and 
fuzz  in  the  firing,    in  which  case  the  object 
will  most  probably  be  missed,  and  that  be- 
cause the  piece  was  not  fresh  primed. 

A    FEW    GENERAL    INSTRUCTIONS  TO  THE 
YOUNG  SPORTSMAN,    FOR  HIS  CON- 
DUCT  IN   THE   PURSUIT  OF 
GAME. 

In  the  first  place,  he  should  pay  attention 
to  the  difference  of  seasons,  and  the  weather, 
to  the  temperature  of  the  air,  and  even  to 
those  hours  of  the  day  which  are  more  or  less 
favourable  for  shooting.  In  warm  weather 
he  should  hunt  for  game  in  plains  and  open 
grounds,  at  the  same  time  bearing  in  mind, 
that  during  the  heat  of  the  day  the  birds 


COURSING,   ETC.  235 

frequent  moist  places  and  marshes,  where 
there  is  Httle  water  and  high  grass,  the  sides 
of  brooks,   ponds,   and  hills  exposed  to  the 
north  ;  but  in  cold  weather  they  will  be  com- 
monly found  on  little  hills  exposed  to  the 
south,  along  hedge-rows  among  the  heath,  in 
stubbles,  and  in  pastures  where  there  is  much 
furze  and  fern ;   in  hard  frosts  they  get  into 
thickets,    low   places,   and   marshes,    where 
they  seek  to  shelter  themselves  from  the  cold, 
as  they   do  from  the  heat,  in  different  sea- 
sons.    The  greater  part  how^ever  of  these 
rules,  will  only  apply  when  the  weather  is 
extremely   hot   and  severely  cold;   at  both 
which  times  the  hares,  partridges,  and  phea- 
sants, almost  totally  desert  the  plains  and 
open  grounds ;   the  game  is  more  easily  ap- 
proached, and  lies  better,  in  covert  than  in 
open  places ;  a  double  advantage  is  therefore 
obtained  by  hunting  for  them  in  the  former. 
The  sportsman  should  at  all   times  of  the 
shooting  season  go  out  in  the  morning  before 
the  dew  is  off*;  at  that  time  the   shepherds 
and  their  flocks  have  not  entirely  spread 


236 

over  the  fields,  and  have  9.s  yet  sprung  but 
a  small  quantity  of  game  ;  the  scents  of  the 
preceding  night  will  also  be  more  warm,  and 
the  dogs  will  hit  them  off  the  better ;  besides 
if  he  is  not  eai^y,  he  loses  such  opportuni- 
ties of  shooting  as  he  will  not  meet  with 
again  during  the  remainder  of  the  day.— 
The  colour  of  his  dress,  all  the  season 
throughout,  should  be  a  mixture  of  green 
and  grey .;  as  by  constant  wearing  it  the  green 
:H^iIl  change  to  a  fallow  colour,  or  that  re- 
sembling the  dead  leaf.  It  is  best  to  hunt 
as  much  as  possible  with  the  wind,  not  only 
to  prevent  the  game  from  perceiving  the  ap- 
proach of  the  sportsman  and  his  dog,  but 
also  to  enable  the  latter  to  scent  the  game  at 
a  greater  distance.  The  shooter  cannot  a;l- 
ways  keep  the  advantage  of  the  wind,  when 
therefore  it  is  proposed  to  hunt  any  particu- 
lar tract  of  country,  in  which  game  is  ex- 
pected to  be  found,  it  is  highly  necessary 
to  take  the  wind  ;  and  it  behoves  the  shooter 
to  range  and  quarter  Ins  ground  in  such 
manner  and  direction,  as  to  preserve  it  in 


COURSING,  ETC.  -     237 

his  favour.  The  shooter  should  never  be 
discouraged  from  hunting  and  ranging  the 
same  ground  over  and  over  again,  especially 
in  places  covered  with  heath,  brambles,  high 
grass,  or  young  coppice-wood ;  a  hare,  par- 
tridge, or  pheasant,  wall  frequently  suffer  him 
to  pass  several  times  w  ithin  a  few  yards  with- 
out getting  up ;  he  should  be  still  more  pa- 
tient wh^n  he  has  marked  partridges  into 
such  places,  for  it  often  happens,  that  after 
the  birds  have  been  sprung  many  times,  they 
lay  so  dead  that  they  suffer  him  almost  to 
tread  upon  them  before  they  will  rise.  He 
should  always  keep  a  sharp  eye,  and  care- 
fully look  about  him,  never  passing  a  bush 
or  tuft  of  grass  without  examination;  it  is 
also  proper  to  stop  now  and  then  ;  this  fre- 
quently determines  the  game  to  spring,  w^hich 
would  otherwise  have  suffered  him  to  pass. 
So  soon  as  he  has  fired  he  should  call  in  his 
dog,  and  make  him  lie  down  until  he  has  re- 
loaded his  piece ;  for  without  this  precaution, 
he  will  frequently  have  the  mortification  to 
see  the  game  rise  when  he  cannot  shoot. 


2,28  OF    SHOOTING, 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  TRAINING 
POINTERS. 

Three  species  of  clogs  are  capable  of  re- 
ceiving proper  instruction^  and  of  bei|f]g  trailer 
ad  to  the  game  :  tliese  are,  the  smooth  point- 
er, the  spaniel,  and  the  rough  pointer ;  the 
last  is  a  dog  with  long  curled  hair,  and  seems 
to  be  Q,  mixed  breed  of  the  water-dog  ^pd 
epanieL  The  smooth  pointer  is  active  ape} 
iively  enough  in  his  range,  but  in  general  is 
proper  only  for  an  open  country  ;  the  great-^ 
est  part  of  these  dogs  are  afraid  of  water^ 
brambles,  and  thickets,  but  the  spanieji  apd 
the  rough  pointer  are  easily  taught  to  take 
ike  water,  evep  in  the  coldest  weathej',  ^ncj 
to  range  the  w'oods  and  rough  places  as  wiell 
as  the  plains ;  greater  dependence  may  tiiercr 
fore  be  had  on  the  two  last  species  of  dogs, 
than  on  the  smooth  pointer.  Before  yoij 
begin  to  break  in  a  dog,  it  will  be  proper 
when  he  his  only  si:^  of  seven  months  old,  to 
teach  him  to  fetcfa  m^i  c%rry,  yvhick  jmay  ea~ 


cotjftSiNd,  Etc.  359 

feily  be  done  without  going  out  of  the  house, 
by  means  familiar  to  every  one,  with  pati- 
ence and  gentle  treatment.  If  the  dog  is  of 
a  good  breed  and  disposition,  he  will  acquire 
the  habit  easily;  but  much  gentle  usage  is 
necessary  at  this  time,  and  if  the  dog  Should 
be  obstinate  in  learning  his  lessons,  severity 
and  correction  should  be  carried  only  to  a 
certain  point ;  therefore  as  you  perceive  him 
to  be  disheartened  let  him  rest,  bestow  ca- 
resses on  him,  and  return  to  the  task  ano- 
ther time. 

If  however  this  task  <rannot  be  accom- 
plished by  mild  treatment,  you  must  wait 
until  the  dbg  is  of  a  proper  age  to  be  regu- 
larly trained:  for  then,  in  case  of  great 
obstinacy,  he  will  be  able  to  bear  the  strong 
collar,  and  those  other  modes  of  discipline 
which  will  be  hereafter  described.  It  will, 
at  the  same  time  that  you  teach  the  dog  td 
fetch  and  carry,  also  be  proper  to  give  him 
the  first  principles  of  obedience,  which  may 
be  accomplished  by  \Valking  with  him  a  little 


240  .  OP    SHOOTING, 

distance  from  the  house,  and  there  learning 
him  to  come  in  when  he  runs  too  far  off, 
and  to  go  behind  when  he  returns,  using  in 
the  first  case  the  words  here,  come  in,  and  in 
the  latter  back  or  behind.  It  is  also  neces- 
sary to  accustom  the  dog,  at  this  period,  to 
be  tied  up  in  a  kennel,  or  stable,  where  you 
should  be  careful  to  renew  his  straw  fre- 
quently ;  but  in  these  first  essays  he  should 
not  be  kept  tied  up  too  long,  in  considera- 
tion of  his  tender  age,  which  seems  to  re- 
quire some  indulgence ;  he  should  therefore 
be  let  loose  in  the  morning  and  fastened  up 
again  in  the  evening :  it  is  also  of  importance 
that  the  person  who  intends  to  train  him 
should  alone  speak  to  and  command  him, 
and  that  none  other  should  interfere  with  his 
education,  or  give  him  his  food. 

When  the  dog  has  attained  the  age  of  ten 
or  twelve  months,  it  will  be  high  time  to  take 
him  into  the  field  for  the  purpose  of  regular 
training.  At  the  first  you  may  let  him  do  as 
he  likes,  without  requiring  any  thing  of  him, 


COURSING,  ETC*  241 

the  first  step  being  only  to  make  him  know 
his  game ;  he  will  at  this  time  run  after  every 
thing  that  he  sees,  crows,  pidgeons,  thrushes, 
small  birds,  partridges,  hares,  &c.  tliis  eager- 
ness being  somewhat  abated,  he  will  end  by 
only  pursuing  the  partridges  and  hares,  to 
the  former  of  which  his  natural  instinct  will 
particularly  attach  him,  and  being  soon  tired 
with  following  those  in  vain,  he  will  be  con- 
tent, after  having  flushed  the  birds,  to  follow 
them  with  his  eyes;  he  will  not  however  do 
the  same  with  the  hares,  for  seeing  that  they 
have  but  legs  like  himself,  and  do  not  leave 
the  ground  as  partridges,  he  perceives  that 
there  is  more  equality  with  himself,  and  will 
not  relinquish  the  hope  of  overtaking  them ; 
for  this  reason  he  will  continue  the  practice 
of  running  after  hares,  until  corrected  by 
education ;  and  even  then  it  is  very  difficult 
to  prevent  the  most  crafty  and  best  trained 
dog  from  pursuing  tliem. 

All  young  dogs  are  subject  to  rake,  that  is 
to  hunt  with  their  noses  close  to  the  ground. 


242  OF    SHOOTING, 

a  habit  which  you  should  not  suffer  them  to 
contract,  and  of  which  you  should  effectually 
break  them  betimes,  if  it  is  possible  to  be 
done,  for  a  dog  that  raises  with  his  nose  and 
follows  the  game  by  the  track,  will  never 
make  a  good  pointer,  nor  find  half  so  much 
game  as  one  that  hunts  with  his  nose  high ; 
whenever,  therefore,  you  perceive  that  your 
young  dog  is  following  the  track  of  partridges 
down  wind,  call  to  him  with  an  angry  tone 
hold  up^  he  will  then  grow  uneasy  and  agitat- 
ed, going  first  on  one  side  and  then  on  the 
other  until  the  wind  brings  him  the  scent  of 
the  birds.  He  will  only  have  to  find  the 
birds  seven  or  eight  times  this  way,  when  he 
will  take  the  wind  of  himself,  and  hunt  with 
his  nose  high.  Yet  there  are  dogs  which  it 
is  impossible  almost  to  break  of  this  fault, 
and  such  are  worth  training.  The  best  me- 
thod to  be  used  with  a  dog  of  that  description 
is,  to  put  the  puzzle-peg  upon  him,  that  is 
an  instrument  of  a  very  simple  construction, 
being  no  other  than  a  piece  of  lance  wood, 
or  red  deal  inch  board,  one  foot  in  lengtl> 


COURSIN'G,  ETC.  243 

-and  an  inch  and  a  half  in  breadth,  tapering 
a  little  to  one  end;  at  the  broader  end  are 
two  holes  running  longitudinally,  through 
which  the  collar  of  the  dog  is  put,  and  the 
whole  is  buckled  round  his  neck ;  the  piece 
of  wood  being  projected  beyond  his  nose, 
is  then  fastened  with  a  piece  of  leather 
thong  to  his  under  jaw ;  by  this  means,  the 
peg  advancing  seven  or  eight  inches  beyond 
his  snout,  the  dog  is  prevented  from  putting 
his  nose  to  the  ground  and  raking.  This 
instrument  is  also  proper  for  any  dogs  that 
tear  their  game;  and  sometimes  has  been 
found  to  make  a  dog  that  is  too  eager,  and 
possessing  the  bad  habit  of  running  up  to  the 
foremost  dog  in  the  point,  stand  better  in 
company. 

Partridges  lay  much  better  to  dogs  that 
wind  them,  than  those  that  follow  by  the 
track.  The  dog  that  winds  the  scent  ap- 
proaches the  birds  by  degrees,  and  that  more 
or  less  as  he  finds  them  either  shy  or  lay 
well,  which  he  is  enabled  to  know  by  the 
Y  2 


544  OF    SHOOTING^ 

scent  they  emit  when  uneasy  ;  and  notwith- 
standing they  see  him  hunt  round  about 
them,  they  wdll  not  be  alarmed,  because  they 
do  not  perceive  that  he  is  footing  them. 

Nothing^  disturbs  the  birds  more  than  see- 
ing  a  dog  tracing  their  footsteps,  and  keeping 
the  same  course  that  they  are  taking  to  steal 
off ;  and  when  a  dog  follows  them  in  this 
manner  down  wind,  it  most  commonly  hap- 
pens that  he  flushes  them  ;  or  if  by  accident 
he  makes  a  point,  it  will  probably  be  much 
too  near  the  birds ;  for  in  going  down  wind 
he  cannot  take  the  scent  until  he  is  almost 
upon  them,  and  then  they  will  not  lay.  As 
soon  as  the  young  dog  knows  his  game,  you 
must  bring  him  under  complete  subjection 
and  command ;  if  he  is  naturally  tractable, 
and  has  profited  from  the  instructions  you 
have  given  him  before  he  has  been  taken  into 
the  field,  it  w  ill  be  easy  to  accomplish  it  ; 
but  if  he  is  stubborn  and  unruly,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  make  use  of  the  trash  cord. — 
This  is  done  by  only  fastening  to  the  collar 


COURSING,  ETC.  245 

of  the  dog  a  rope,  or  cord,  of  about  fifteen 
or  twenty  fathom  in  length,  and  then  lettincp 
him  range  about  with  this  dragging  on  the 
ground  ;  by  the  help  of  this  cord  you  will  be 
able  to  keep  him  in  whenever  you  call  to  him, 
which  you  should  never  do  but  when  you  are 
within  reach  of  it ;  and  then,  if  he  should 
continue  to  run  forward,  you  must  check  him 
smartly  with  the  cord,  which  will  often  bring 
him  upon  his  haunches,  and  sometimes  on 
his  back ;  when  you  have  repeated  this  a  few 
times,  he  will  not  fail  to  come  in  immediate- 
ly upon  being  called ;  you  should  then  caress 
him,  and  give  him  a  bit  of  bread,  and  continue 
to  do  so  whenever  he  comes  in  on  beins^ 
called  to.  After  this,  in  order  to  accustom 
him  to  cross  and  range  before  you,  turn 
your  back  to  him  and  walk  on  the  opposite 
side ;  when  he  loses  sight  of  you,  he  will 
come  to  find  you,  and  be  agitated  and  afraid 
of  losing  you;  and  will,  in  ranging,  turn  his 
head  from  time  to  time  to  observe  where- 
about yon  are:  ten  or  twelve  days  practice 
of  this  manoeuvre  will  make  him  ranii;c  on 
Y  3 


M6  of  shooting, 

whatever  side  you  please,  by  only  giving  iiim 
a  sign  with  the  hand.  When  the  dog  is  ar- 
rived at  this  point  of  instruction  be  careful 
to  keep  him  constantly  tied  up,  never  unchain 
hiin  but  when  you  give  him  his  food,  and  not 
always  then,  but  at  tliose  times  only  when  he 
has  done  something  to  deserve  it.  The  next 
^tep  will  be  to  throv/  down  a  piece  of  bread 
on  the  ground,  at  the  same  moment  taking 
Tiold  of  the  dog  by  the  collar,  calling  out  to 
kim  take  heed,  softly  ;  after  having  held  him 
in  this  manner  for  some  space  of  time,  say 
to  him  seize,  lay  hold,  if  he  is  impatient  to 
lay  hold  of  the  piece  of  bread  before  the  sig- 
nal is  given,  correct  him  gently  with  a  small 
whip ;  repeat  this  lesson  until  he  takes  heed 
well,  and  no  longer  requires  to  be  held  fast 
to  prevent  him  from  laying  hold  of  the  bread. 
When  he  is  well  accustomed  to  this  manage, 
turn  the  bread  with  a  stick,  holding  it  in  the 
manner  you  do  a  fowling-piece,  and  having 
done  so,  cry  seize.  Never  suffer  the  dog 
to  eat  either  in  the  house  or  field,  without 
having  first  bid  him  take  heed  in  this  manner. 


COURSING,  ETC.  247 

Then  in  order  to  apply  this  lesson  to  the 
game,  fry  small  pieces  of  bread  in  hog's  lard, 
with  the  dung  of  grouse,  partridge,  or  phea- 
sant, take  these  in  a  linen  bag  into  the  fields, 
stubbles,  ploughed  ground,  and  pastures,  and 
there  put  the  pieces  in  several  different 
places,  marking  the  spots  with  little  cleft 
pickets  of  wood,  which  will  be  rendered 
more  distinguishable  by  putting  pieces  of  pa- 
per, or  card,  in  the  niches ;  this  being  done, 
cast  off  your  dog  and  conduct  him  to  these 
places,  always  hunting  in  the  wind ;  after  he 
has  caught  tlie  scent  of  the  bread,  if  he  ap- 
proaches too  near  and  seems  eager  to  fall 
upon  it,  cry  to  him  in  a  menacing  tone  take 
heedj  and  if  he  does  not  stop  immediately, 
correct  him  with  the  whip  ;  he  will  soon  com- 
prehend what  is  required  of  him,  and  stand. 
At  the  next  lesson,  take  your  gun,  charged 
only  with  powder,  walk  gently  round  the 
piece  of  bread  once  or  twice,  and  fire  instead 
of  crying  seize.  The  next  time  of  practising 
this  lesson,  walk  round  the  piece  of  bread 


248  OF    SHOOTING, 

four  or  five  times,  but  in  a  greater  circle 
than  before,  and  continue  to  do  this  until  the 
dog  is  conquered  of  his  impatience,  and  will 
stand  without  moving  until  the  signal  is  giv- 
en him.  When  he  keeps  his  point  well,  and 
stands  steady  in  this  lesson,  you  may  carry  him 
to  the  birds ;  if  he  runs  in  upon  them,  or  barks 
when  they  spring  up,  you  must  correct  him ; 
and  if  he  continues  to  do  so,  you  must  re- 
turn to  the  fried  bread ;  but  this  is  seldom 
necessary  if  the  dog  be  of  a  good  temper. 

There  are  many  dogs  that  will  point  the 
first  day  they  are  taken  out;  and  there  are 
others  that  will  both  point  and  back  the  first 
time  by  natural  instinct;  but  to  make  the 
dog  staunch,  you  should  endeavour  to  kill  a 
few  birds  on  the  ground  before  him,  and 
should  not  shoot  flying  until  he  is  well  train- 
ed and  steady:  this  however  can  only  be 
done  when  the  dog  is  broke  in  during  the 
shooting  season.  The  spring  is  the  best 
time   for   training  dogs,   because  the  birds 


COURSIXG,  ETC.  249 

being  then  paired,  lay  better;  and  being 
sprung  more  seldom,  and  in  fewer  numbers, 
the  dog  is  not  so  subject  to  be  eager,  and  is 
kept  under  command  with  greater  ease ;  but 
as  this  season  scarcely  allows  time  to  make 
the  dog  perfect  and  staunch,  you  must  re- 
sume his  lessons  in  the  month  of  August, 
and  kill  five  or  six  old  grouse,  or  moor-game 
cocks,  on  the  ground  before  him,  which  will 
soon  complete  him  against  the  first  of  Sep- 
tember for  partridge  shooting. 

To  make  a  dog  back  and  stand  in  com- 
pany, you  should  hunt  him  with  an  old 
staunch  dog,  and  then,  with  a  small  applica- 
tion of  the  principles  of  training,  you  will 
easily  effect  this  necessary  qualification. — 
Young  dogs,  for  the  most  part,  love  to  run 
after  poultry,  and  some  after  sheep ;  those 
are  faults  which  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to 
correct  betimes :  as  to  poultry,  if  you  can- 
not make  your  dog  leave  oft^  the  custom  of 
chasing  them,  by  virtue  of  the  whip,  the  fol- 
lowing method  will  do  it :  take  a  small  sticky 


250  OF    SPIGOTING, 

cleft  at  one  end  sufficiently  wide  to  admit  of 
the  tail  of  the  dog,  which  being  introduced, 
tie  the  cleft  end  with  a  piece  of  twine  tight 
enough  to  make  him  feel  pain ;  at  the  other 
end  of  the  stick  tie  a  fowl  by  the  wing,  then 
after  a  little  time  let  the  dog  loose,  at  the 
instant  giving  him  a  few  heavy  strokes  with  a 
whip,  the  dog  will  then  run  as  fast  as  he  can, 
by  reason  of  the  pain  in  his  tail,  w^hich  he 
imagines  is  caused  by  the  fowl ;  by  dint  of 
dragging  the  fowl  he  will  kill  it,  and  spent 
with  running  he  will  stop,  and  afterwards 
hide  himself  in  some  hole ;  then  take  off  the 
stick,  and  beat  him  about  tlie  mouth  and 
head  with  the  dead  fowl. 

If  the  dog  runs  after  sheep,  and  you  can- 
not break  him  of  the  custom,  couple  him 
with  a  ram,  and  in  letting  them  loose,  whip 
the  dog  as  long  as  you  can  follow  him ;  his 
cries  will  at  first  alarm  the  ram  who  will 
run  with  all  his  speed,  and  drag  the  dog 
along  with  him ;  but  he  will  soon  take  cou- 
jrage,   and   end  w^ith   butting  the  dog  most 


COURSING,   ETC.  251 

severely.  When  you  think  the  dog  has  re- 
ceived sufficient  correction,  uncouple  him, 
and  I  conceive  he  will  never  run  after  sheep 


agani. 


OF  (G-AME, 


THE  HARE. 

According  to  naturalists,  the  hare  lives 
seven  or  eight  years,  and  attains  its  full 
growth  in  one ;  from  the  first  year  it  engen- 
ders almost  at  all  seasons,  and  has  no  par- 
ticular time  for  coupling  with  the  female; 
yet  it  is  observable,  that  from  the  month  of 
December  to  the  month  of  March  the  buck 
seeks  the  doe  more  frequently,  and  about 
that  time  the  greatest  number  of  leverets  are 
found :  the  doe  goes  with  young  thirty-one 
days,  and  brings  forth  one,  two,  three,  and 
j  sometimes  four^  young  ones,  which  she  kin- 


252 . 

dies  in  a  tuft  of  grass,  or  heath,  or  in  a  little 
bush,  without  any  preparation  whatever. — • 
When  there  are  several  leverets  at  a  birtli, 
they  are   invariably  marked  with  a  star  on 
the  forehead,  and  when  there  is  but  one  it 
never  has   this  mark.     The   sportsman,   to 
distinguish  the  male  from  the  female,  will 
observe,  that  the  head  of  tlie  male  is  more 
short  and  round,    the  wdiiskers  longer,   the 
shoulders  more  ruddy,   and  the  ears  shorter 
and  broader  than  those  of  the  female,   the 
head  of  which  is  long  and  narrow,   the  ears 
long,  and  sharp  at  the  tip,    the  fur  of  the 
back  of  a  grey  colour  inclining  to  black,  and 
in  point  of  size  is  longer  than  the  male. — • 
The  male  hare,  or  buck,  when  he  is  hunted 
with  hounds,  after  making  one  or  two  rings 
generally  runs  straight  forwards ;  he  goes  a 
great  way  and  makes  a  long  chase :  the  doe 
runs  less,  she  dodges  about  the  place  she  in- 
habits, and  doubles  more  frequently.    When 
a  hare  is  espied  on  the  form,  if  the  manner 
in  which  the  ears  lie  is  observed,  it  may  be 
known  whether  it  is  a  buck  or  a  doe ;   if  a 


I 


COURSING,  ETCt  £53 

buck,  the  ears  will  be  drawn  close  upon  the 
shoulders  one  against  the  other,  but  if  a  doc 
the  ears  will  be  open  and  distant  on  each 
side  of  the  neck  and  shoulders. 

Two  species  of  hares  may  be  distinguish 
ed ;  those  of  the  wood,  and  tliose  of  the 
plain.  The  hares  of  the  wood  are  in- general 
much  larger  than  those  of  the  open  ground ; 
they  are  not  of  so  dark  a  colour,  and  better 
covered  with  fur  ;  they  are  also  swifter  in  the 
chase,  and  their  flesh  is  of  a  better  flavour. 
Among  the  hares  of  the  plains,  those  may  be 
distinguished  which  inhabit*  the  marshes: 
they  are  not  so  swift  of  foot,  are  less  cover- 
ed with  fur,  and  their  flesh  is  not  so  fine  and 
delicate, 

A  young  hare,  that  has  attained  its  full 
growth,  is  known  from  an  old  one  by  feeling 
the  knee  joints  of  the  fore  legs  with  the 
thumb-nail :  when  the  heads  of  the  two 
bones  which  form  the  joint  are  contiguous, 
and  little  or  no  space  to  be  perceived  be- 
Z 


254  OF    SHOOTING, 

tween  them,  the  hare  is  old;  if,  on  the  con- 
trary, th€re  is  a  perceptible  separation  be- 
tween the  two  bones,  the  hare  is  young  ;  and 
is  more  or  less  so,  as  the  two  bones  are  more 
or  less  separated.  But  as  shooting,  or  other- 
wise destroying  hares,  although  an  amuse- 
ment much  admired  by  the  sportsmen  of 
other  countries,  yet  in  this  is  practised  only 
fey  poachers,  and  is  even  doubted  by  some 
to  be  permitted  by  the  existing  game-laws, 
I  shall  purposely  omit  all  description  on  that 
head,  and  be  content  with  giving  one  hint  on 
4he  subject :  if  the  sportsman  wants  to  come 
near  a  hare  when  es^pied  upon  the  form,  he 
must  not  go  forwards  in  a  straight  line,  but 
approach  circularly,  otherwise  she  will  start 
up. 

THE  PARTRIDGE. 

These  birds  pair  in  the  spring,  but  at  an 
earlier  or  later  period,  in  proportion  as  the 
season  is  more  or  less  mild  ;  should  the  days 
prove  warm  and  exhaling,  even  in  the  month 


COURSING,  ETC.  255 

of  January,  they  are  found  in  pairs,  but  then 
if  the  cold  weather  returns  they  again  form 
in  covics.  The  hen  partridge  lays  her  eggs 
during  the  whole  month  of  May  and  the  be- 
ginning of  June ;  her  nest  is  made  upon  the 
ground,  and  consists  only  of  a  few  blades  of 
grass  constructed  without  art,  either  at  the 
edge  of  a  corn-field,  in  a  meadow,  heath, 
&c.  She  lays  from  fourteen  to  twenty-two 
eggs,  the  earliest  birds  begin  to  fly  towards 
the  latter  end  of  June.  From  this  state  of 
growth  their  plumage  undergoes  a  variety  of 
changes,  until  the  period  arrives  when  the 
red  and  blackish  feathers  begin  to  form  the 
horse-shoe  upon  the  breast,  which  is  very 
conspicuous  on  the  male,  but  less  distin- 
guishable on  females.  This  mark  takes 
place  about  the  beginning  or  the  middle  of 
October,  and  it  is  not  until  that  is  perfect 
that  they  can  be  properly  called  partridges. 

In  the  next  place  it  will  be  proper  to  con- 
sider their  haunts,   which   are   not  certain 
like  the  pheasant's,  but  various  :  any  covert 
Z  2 


i5€  OF   "SHOOTING, 

»viil  serve  their  turn,  and  sometimes  none  at 
all.  The  places  they  most  delight  in  are 
cora-f3clds,  especially  whilst  the  corn  grows, 
for  under  that  covert  they  shelter,  engender, 
and  breed ;  neither  are  these  places  un- 
frequented by  them  when  the  corn  is  cut 
down,  by  reason  of  the  grain  they  find  there- 
m,  especially  wheat-stubble,  and  they  delight 
in  the  height  thereof,  it  being  to  them  a  co- 
vert or  shelter.  Now  when  the  wheat-stub- 
ble is  much  trodden  by  men  or  beasts,  then 
they  take  themselves  to  the  barley-stubble, 
provided  it  be  fresh  and  untrodden  ;  and 
they  will  in  the  furrows  amongst  the  clods, 
brambles,  and  long  grass,  hide  both  them- 
selves and  covies  w'hich  are  sometimes  twen- 
ty in  nuniber.  After  the  winter  season  is 
come,  and  the  stubble-fields  plowed  up,  or 
over  soiled  with  cattle,  then  do  the  par- 
tridges resort  to  the  upland  meadows,  and 
lodge  in  the  dead  grass  or  fog  under  the 
tiedges,  amongst  mole-hills,  or  under  the 
roots  of  trees  ;  sometimes  they  repair  to 
copses  and  under-woods,   especially   if  anj 


COURSING,  etc:  257 

corn-fields  are  adjacent,  or  where  grows 
broom,  brakes,  fern,  or  any  covert  what- 
soever. In  the  harvest  time,  when  every 
field  is  full  of  men  and  cattle,  then  you  may 
find  them  in  the  day-time  on  the  fallows  next 
adjoining  to  the  corn-fields,  where  they  lie 
lurking  till  the  evening,  when  they  feed 
amongst  the  shocks  or  sheaves  of  corn  ;  and 
so  they  do  likewise  early  in  the  morning. 

When  you  know  their  haunts  according 
to  the  situation  of  the  country  and  season  of 
the  year,  your  next  care  must  be  to  find 
them  out  in  those  haunts,  which  is  managed 
several  ways :  some  do  it  by  the  eye  only, 
and  this  art  can  never  be  taught,  but  must 
be  learnt  by  frequent  practice ;  distinguish- 
ing thereby  the  colour  of  the  partridge  from 
that  of  the  earth,  and  perceiving  how  and 
in  what  manner  they  lodge  and  couch  to- 
gether ;  for  which  purpose  you  may  come 
near  enough  to  them,  as  they  are  a  very 
lazy  bird,  and  so  unwilling  to  take  the  wing, 
that  you  may  even  set  your  foot  upon  them 
Z  3 


258  OF    SHOOTING, 

before  they  will  stir,  provided  you  do  not 
stand  and  gaze  on  them,  but  be  in  continual 
motion,  otherwise  they  will  spring  up  and 
begone.     There  is  another  way  to  discover 
them,  and  that  is  by  going  to  their  haunts 
early  in  the  morning,    or  the  close  of  the 
evening,  which  is  called  the  juking  time,  and 
there  listen  for  the  call  of  the  cock  partridge, 
which  will  be  very  loud  and  earnest,  and  after 
some  calls  the  hen  will  answer,  and  by  this 
means  they  meet  together,  which  you  will 
know  by  their  rejoicing  and  chattering  one 
■with  another ;  then  take  your  range  about 
them,    drawins;  nearer  and  nearer  to   the 
place  where  you  heard  them  juke  in,  casting 
your  eye  towards  the  furrows  of  the  lands, 
and  so  take  them  as  your  fancy  shall  lead 
you. 

The  best,  safest,  and  easiest  way  of  find- 
ing partridges,  is  by  the  call ;  having  first 
learned  the  true  and  natural  notes  of  the 
partridge,  knowing  bow  to  tune  every  note 
in  its  proper  key,  and  applying  them  to  their 


COURSING,   ETC.  259 

due  times  and  seasons.     Being  perfect  there- 
in, either  mornings  or  evenings,  (all  other 
times  being  improper)  go  to  their  haunts, 
and   having  conveyed   yourself   into    some 
secret  place,   where  you  may  see  and  not  be 
seen,  listen  awhile  if  you  can  hear  the  par- 
tridges call ;  if  you  do,  answer  them  again 
in  the  same   note,  and  as  they  change  or 
double  their  notes,  so  must  you  in  like  man- 
ner, thus  continue  doing  till  they  draw  nearer 
and  nearer  to  you.     Having  them  in  view, 
lay  yourself  on  your  back,    and  lie  as  if  you 
were  without  motion,    by   w^hich  you   may 
count   their  numbers:  in  this   method  the 
sportsman  will  always  find  most  game,    and 
save  himself  and  dogs  much  trouble  in  the 
search  of  it. 

SETTING. 

Hoxv  to  take  partridges,  pheasants^  moor" 

game,  quails,    S^x.  with  a  setting-- 

dog  and  net. 

There  is  no  art  of  taking  partridges,   &c. 
so  excellent  and  pleasant  as  by  the  help  of  a 


260  OF   SHOOTING, 

setting-dog  ;  therefore,  before  we  proceed 
to  the  sport,  we  shall  give  you  an  account 
what  the  setting-dog  is.  You  are  to  under- 
stand, that  a  setting-dog  is  a  certain  lusty 
land  spaniel,  taught  by  nature  to  hunt  the 
partridge  niore  than  any  chase  whatever, 
running  the  fields  over  with  such  alacrity  and 
nimbleness,  as  if  there  was  no  linnit  to  his 
fury  and  desire,  yet  by  art  under  such  ex- 
cellent command,  that  in  the  height  of  his 
career,  by  a  hem  or  sound  of  his  master's 
voice,  he  shall  stand,  gaze  about  him,  look 
his  master  in  the  face,  and  observe  his  direc- 
tions, whether  to  proceed,  stand  still,  or 
retire ;  nay,  when  he  is  even  just  upon  his 
prey,  that  he  may  take  it  up  in  his  mouth : 
yet  his  obedience  is  so  framed  by  art,  that 
presently  he  shall  either  stand  still  or  fall 
down  flat  on  his  belly,  without  daring  to 
make  any  noise  or  motion  till  his  master 
comes  to  him,  and  then  he  will  proceed  in 
all  things  to  follow  his  directions. 

Having  a  dog  thus  quahfied  by  art  and 


COURSING,  ETC.  26l 

nature,  take  him  with  you  where  partridges 
haunt ;  there  cast  off  your  dog,  and  by  some 
word  of  encouragement  which  he  is  acquaint- 
ed with,  engage  him  to  range,  but  never  too 
far  from  you ;  and  see  that  he  beats  his 
ground  justly  and  even,  without  casting 
about,  or  flying  now  here,  now  there,  which 
the  mettle  of  some  will  do  if  not  corrected 
and  reproved  :  and  therefore  when  you  per- 
ceive this  fault  you  must  call  him  in  with  a 
hem,  and  so  check  him  that  he  dare  not  do 
the  like  again  for  that  day,  and  will  range 
afterwards  with  more  temperance,  ever  and 
anon  looking  in  his  master's  face,  as  if  he 
would  gather  from  thence  whether  he  did 
well  or  ill. 

If  in  your  dog's  ranging  you  perceive  him 
to  stop  on  a  sudden  or  stand  still,  you  must 
then  make  up  to  him,  for  without  doubt  he 
hath  set  the  partridges,  and  as  soon  as  you 
come  to  him,  command  him  to  go  nearer, 
but  if  he  goes  not,  lies  still,  or  stands  shak^ 
inghis  tail,  and  now  and  then  looks  baqk^ 


262  OF    SHOOTING, 

then  cease  from  urging  him  farther,  and  taki. 
your  circumference  walking  fast,  with  a  care- 
less eye  looking  straiglit  before  the  dog,  and 
thereby  see  how  the  covey  lies,  whether 
close  or  straggling.  Then  commanding  the 
dog  to  lie  still,  draw  forth  your  net  and  prick 
one  end  to  the  ground,  and  spread  your  net 
all  open,  and  so  cover  as  many  of  the  par- 
tridges as  you  can,  which  done,  make  in 
with  a  noise  and  spring  up  the  partridges, 
and  they  will  no  sooner  rise  than  be  en- 
tangled in  the  net.  If  you.  let  go  the  old 
cock  and  hen,  it  will  not  only  be  the  act  of  a 
fair  sportsman,  but  also  a.  means  to  increase 
your  own  pastime  by  preserving  the  breed, 

THE  PHEASANT, 

Is  of  the  size  of  a  common  dunghill- cock, 
and  a  superb  bird  in  his  plumage,  with  a 
proud  and  noble  gait.  This  of  course  is  on- 
ly to  be  understood  as  relating  to  the  male, 
for  the  plumage  of  the  female  has  litde  splen- 
dor,  and  resembles  the  quail,,  which  makes 


COURSIXG,  ETC,  gjSS 

them  easy  to  be  distinguished  in  shooting, 
and  prevents  the  killing  adien. instead  of  a 
cock.  These  birds  generally  lay  their  eggs 
in  the  woods,  the  number  of  which  is  com- 
monly ten  or  twelve ;  the  season  of  the  young 
pheasants  nearly  corresponds  with  that  of  the 
partridges. 

The  pheasant  in  the  first  year  is  marked 
in  the  wing  like  a  partridge.  The  young 
cock^  whose  plumage  is  completed  the  first 
year,  is  in  like  manner  known  by  his  spurs, 
which  are  round  and  blunt,  Jbut  long  and 
sharp  in  the  old  ones ;  the  hen  has  also  a 
small  spur  on  the  hinder  part  of  the  leg, 
which  is  very  small  in  those  that  are  young, 
and  more  larg€  and  prominent  in  a  greater 
or  less  degree,  in  proportion  to  tiie  age  of 
the  bird;  besides,  in  young  ones,  the  spurs 
are  each  surrounded  with  a  small  black  cir- 
cle, which  does  not  disappear  till  the  second 
-hatching.  The  legs  of  those  that  are  very 
.old,  that  is  to  say,  such  as  have  attained  five 
or  six  years,  are  more  wrinkled  and  of  a 


264  OF    SHOOTING, 

darker  colour  than  those  of  the  young  ones 
in  the  first  year  :  the  crystal  of  the  eye  in  the 
former  is  also  more  yellow,  whilst  that  of  the 
young  ones  of  the  first  and  second  year  is 
white.  But  all  these  marks  and  signs  are 
not  without  many  exceptions. 

To  find  the  pheasants  you  must  first  un- 
derstand their  haunts,  which  are  never  in 
open  fields,  but  in  thick  young  copses  well 
grown,  and  not  in  old  high  woods.  Having 
thus  found  out  their  coverts,  which  must  be 
solitary  and  untraced  by  men  or  cattle,  the 
next  thing  will  be  to  find  out  the  eye  or 
brood  of  pheasants. 

The  first  way  is  by  going  into  those  young 
copses,  and  carefully  viewing  them,  search- 
ing every  where,  and  by  that  means  finding 
%vhere  they  run  together,  as  chickens  after  a 
hen :  or,  secondly,  you  must  rise  early  in 
the  morning,  or  come  late  in  the  evening, 
and  observe  how  and  when  the  old  cock  and 
hen  call  their  young  ones  to  them,  and  how 


COURSING,  ETC.  26*5 

the  young  ones  answer  back  unto  them  again, 
and  so  from  that  sound  direct  your  path  as 
near  as  you  can  to  the  place  where  they  are, 
lying  down  so  close  that  you  may  not  be  dis- 
cerned, by  which  means  you  will  know 
where  they  meet. 

But  the  most  certain  means  of  findinij 
them  out,  is  to  have  a  natural  pheasant's 
call,  which  you  must  learn  how  to  use,  un- 
derstanding all  their  notes,  and  how  to  apply 
them  ;  for  they  have  several  notes,  and  all 
dijfferent :  one  to  cluck  them  together,  ano- 
ther to  chide  them  when  they  straggle  too 
far,  a  third  to  call  them  to  meat  when  she 
hath  found  it,  a  fourth  to  make  them  look 
out  for  food  themselves,  and  a  fifth  to  call 
them  about  her  to  sport  withal.  You  use 
your  call  in  the  morning  early,  at  which 
time  they  straggle  abroad  to  find  provender ; 
or  in  the  evening  just  about  the  sun-setting, 
which  is  their  time  likewise  for  feeding. 

Now  although  these  are  the  best  times  to 
Aa 


266  6F    SHOOTING, 

use  your  call,  yet  you  may  call  them  toge- 
ther at  any  other  time  of  the  day,  only  al- 
tering your  note ;  just  at  or  before  sun-rising 
ypur  note  must  be  to  call  them  to  feed,  and 
so  at  sun-set;  but  in  the  fore  and  afternoon 
your  note  must  be  to  cluck  them  together,  or 
brood,  or  to  chide  them  for  straggling,  or  to 
give  them  notige  of  some  approaching  dan- 
ger. Knowing  your  notes,  and  how  to  ap- 
ply them  where  the  pheasants  haunt,  ^  which 
you  will  know  by  the  strength  of  the  under- 
growth, obscureness,  darkness,  and  solitari- 
ness of  the  place  ;  you  must  then  lodge  your- 
self as  close  as  possible,  and  call  at  first 
very  softly,  Icbt  the  pheasants  being  lodged 
very  near  should  be  affrighted  at  a  loud 
note;  but  if  nothing  replies,  rise  your  note 
higher  and  higher,  till  you  extend  it  to  the 
uttermost  compass,  and  any  pheasant  with- 
in hearing  will  answer  it  in  a  note  as  loud  as 
your  own,  provided  it  be  not  untuneable, 
forthat  will  spoil  all.  As  soon  as  you  hear 
this  answer,  if  it  be  from  afar  and  from  one 
single  bird,  creep  nearer  and  nearer  unto  it, 


COURSING,  ETC.  26/ 

Still  calling,  but  not  so  loud ,   and  as  you 

approach  nearer  to  it,  so  will  the  pheasant 

to  you ;   and  as  you  alter  your  note,   so  will 

the  pheasant,   which  in  all  points  you  must 

endeavour  to  imitate.     In  the  end  you  will 

'get  sight,   either  on  the  ground  or  percli, 

'Where  you  rnay  have  a  good  shot,  or  taEe  it 

as  fai^cy  leads  you .     At  sun-set  the  greatest 

*^part  of  them  fly  up  into  the  long  branches  of 

|6Uk  trees,  in  order  to'  roost  air  night,  and' at 

the  time  they  do  this  they  invariably  make  a 

noise,  which  is  called  cocketiingj  and  that 

in  a  greater  degree  durihg  the  winter  seasoh, 

'so  that  poachers  w^ho  lie  in  wait  for  them  in 

*  the  evening,  are  warned  by  the  noise  of  the 

^place' where  they  are  perched,  and  when  the 

night  is  advanced  repair  under  those   trees 

which  the  birds  have  chosen,  and  shoot  them 

with  the  greatest  ease,  for  at  this  time  the 

^ph6asant  will  -permit  them  to  cOme  as  near 

as  they  please. 


A  a  2 


2()8  OF   SHOOTING, 

rilE  GROUSE,    MOOR-GAME,   OR 
MUIR-GAME, 

Are  found  in  some  parts  of  the  northern 
counties  of  England,  and  in  some  parts  of 
Wales,  but  in  neither  of  the  countries  are 
they  at  this  day  very  numerous.  In  Scot- 
land, however,  and  particularly  in  the  vici- 
nity of  the  Grampian  mountains,  they  abound 
in  such  sort,  that  I  have  seen  from  thirty  to 
forty  brace  a  day  killed  for  the  first  fortnight 
of  the  season,  provided  the  weather  was 
favourable.  An  excursion  therefore  into 
that  country  in  the  grouse  season,  for  three 
weeks  or  a  month,  will  afford  the  sportsman 
a  noble  entertainment. 

This  species  of  sport  is  so  perfectly  similar 
in  all  its  operations  to  that  of  partridge 
shooting,  that  it  will  be  unnecessary  to  say 
more  on  the  subject,  than  to  subjoin  a  short 
description  of  the  bird,  and  some  of  its  ha- 
bits.  The  grouse  is  larger  than  the  partridge, 


COUWlNG,  Etfc.  qBQ 

aMWeigTis  from  eighteen  to  twenty  ounces^ 
tlie  pluma^ge  is  a  mixture  of  red,  black,  and 
wMtfe';  and  the  tail  is  nearly  similar  to  that 
6f  a  partridge,  but  a  little  larger.  The  legs 
are  clothed  with  feathers  to  the  very  toes, 
and  the  outermost  and  inner  toes  are  connect- 
ed to  the  first  joint  of  the  middle  toe  by  a 
small  membrane.  The  bill  is  short,  arched, 
and  of  a  blackish  colour ;  and  the  eyes  are 
encircled  with  two  large  red  eye-brows, 
which  are  composed  of  a  fleshy  membrane, 
round  and  pinked  on  the  upper  part,  and 
extending  beyohd  the  crown  of  the  head. 

The  plumage  of  the  hen  has  less  of  the  red 
and  more  of  the  white  than  the  cock.  The 
tiiembrane  of  the  eye-brow  is  less  projected, 
less  pinked,  and  of  a  less  lively  red.  She 
makes  her  nest  on  the  ground,  and  lays  from 
seven  to  ten  eggs. 

The  principal  food  of  grouse  in  the  sum- 
mer season,  is  the  black  wortle-berry  and  the 
red  wortle-berry,   also  the  common  heath- 

Aa  3 


J270  OF    SHOOTING 


berries;  but  their  food  is  nothing  more  than 
the  seeds  that  grow  on  the  tops  of  the  young 
heath  or  heather,  and  small  pebbles  all  the 
winter  and  till  the  next  berry  season.  By 
opening  the  part  that  contains  the  food,  the 
sportsman  will  find  it  is  so,  and  the  fragrance 
very  fine.  The  young  birds  for  the  first 
year  are  called  poults. 

The  grouse  inhabit  those  mountains  and 
moors  which  are  covered  with  heath  or 
heather,  and  seldom  or  ever  descend  into 
the  lower  grounds.  They  fly  in  packs  con- 
sisting in  general  of  four  or  five  brace  ;  and- 
they  love  to  frequent  mossy  places,  particu- 
larly in  the  middle  of  the  day,  and  w^hen  the 
weather  is  warm.  The  old  cock  is  known  by 
the  cocking  noise  he  makes,  and  when  the 
dogs  point  at  a  brood,  he  is  commonly  the 
first  bird  that  goes  off. 

In  pursuing  this  game,  if,  when  the  dogs 
are  set,  the  shooter  perceives  the  birds  to 
erect  their  heads  and  run,  he  may  be  pretty 


COURSING,  ETC.  271 

certain  they  will  not  lie  very  well  during  the 
the  course  of  that  day ;  and  the  only  mode 
by  which  he  will  be  able  to  get  at  them,  is  to 
make  a  circle  of  about  sixty  or  seventy  yards 
round  them,  with  a  careless  eye,  and  the  dogs 
standing  staunch  all  the  time,  till  you  get  a 
head  of  the  birds  ;  when  they  perceive  you 
before  them  and  the  dogs  behind  them,  they 
will  squat  to  the  ground,  and  lie  close ;  when 
you  observe  this,  step  gently  towards  the 
dogs  and  the  birds  in  a  straight  line ;  between 
you  and  the  dogs  they  will  lie  till  you  get 
within  twenty- five  or  thirty  yards  of  them, 
by  which  means  you  are  certain  of  a  shot ; 
when  by  following  them  up  with  the  dogs 
and  running,  not  once  in  ten  times  you  get 
within  shot,  and  at  the  same  tune  make  the 
birds  much  wilder  the  remainder  of  the  day. 

As  the  season  for  shooting  this  game  com- 
mences in  hot  weather,  and  the  birds  when 
shot  are  subject  to  become  putrid  in  a  short 
space  of  time,  it  is  highly  proper,  especially 
if  they  are  wanted  to  be  sent  a  distance,  that 


$172  OlP   SHOOTINC?, 

tlfey  should  be  drawn  caiiefally,  aftd  extreiiiS^ 
ly  clean,  the  very  instant  they  are  shot,  ahxl 
immediately  afterwards  stuffed  with  dry 
heather ;  and  if  the  plumage  happtens  to  bfe 
whetted  by  the  fall  to  the  ground  when  the 
bird  is  shot,  it  hiust  at  tlite  same  time  b6 
wiped  as  dry  a$  possible,  before  it  is  put  into 
the  game-bag»  Before  the  birds  are  packed 
tip  to  be  sieht  off,  it  is  dlso  proper  to  lay  them 
m  the  isun  half  ah  hbtiir,  in  ordeir  to  rfender 
them  more  dry. 

HEATH  FOWL. 

Therti  ate  also  ihhurherable  quantities  of 
ihe  black  cocky  or  coriiihonl^  cklled  hedth- 
fowl,  and  a  grieat  hurriber  of  thfe  tariiiigah, 
found  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Gratnpian  moan- 
tains,  at  the  dukes  of  Athol,  Gordon,  Ar- 
gyll, diiA  the  fearl  6f  Bredalbaine's,  which  af- 
ford excellent  diversidn  tcl  th^  sportsman, 
file  same  as  that  of  the  grouse,  and  their 
shooting  season  the  same.  The  heath-fowl 
lays  from  eight  to  ten  eggs,  she  makes  her 


COURSING,   ETC.  £7S^ 

nest  on  the  ground  like  the  grouse;  they 
generally  breed  in  the  heath  or  heather,  and 
near  the  edge  of  woods  ;  when  her  young  is 
hatched  about  three  or  four  days,  the  hen 
leads  them  into  the  woods  in  order  to  find 
out  provender  for  her  young,  such  as  ants, 
their  eggs,  &c.  here  they  will  remain  three 
weeks  ;  afterwards  they  will  straggle  up  into 
the  moors,  two  miles  or  more,  in  order  to 
get  food.  They  at  this  time  feed  on  the 
black  wortle-berry,  also' the  red  wortle-ber- 
ry,  and  all  the  other  common  heath-berries ; 
their  food  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  grouse  all 
the  year  :  there  you  will  find  them  in  broods, 
when  ranging  for  moor-game,  and  they  af- 
ford equal  sport  with  the  grouse. 

The  black  cock  is  much  more  esteemed 
for  its  flavour  than  the  moor-game,  and  is 
as  black  as  a  raven,  and  after  the  second 
year  there  appears  a  white  feather  in  each 
winii.  The  legs  are  clothed  with  feathers  to 
the  very  toes,  the  same  as  the  grouse ;  the 
bill  short,  arched,   and  of  a  black  colour  ; 


.1274  ^€F  SHOOTING, 

and  the  eyes  encircled  with  two  large  red 
eye-brows,  like  the  grouse,  but  twice  as 
large.  The  plumage  of  the  hen  is  much  the 
same  as  that  of  the  hen  grouse,  but  some- 
thing more  white.  The  black  cock  weighs 
from  thirty  to  near  forty  ounces. 

<rHE  PTARMIGAN,  OR  TARMIGAN, 

*I^in  shape  and  form  a  species  of  grouse, 
and  only  differs  a  little  in  its  size  and  colour* 
The  colour  is  mottled  black  and  white, 
something  like  the  grey  feather  in  the  mal- 
lard; the  eyes  are  encircled  with  redeye- 
brows,  but  not  so  large  nor  so  pinked  as 
that  of  the  grouse;  the  legs  clothed  with 
feathers  to  the  very  toes ;  and  the  bill  short, 
arched,  and  of  a  dark  greyish  colblir.  ^She 
makes  her  nest  on  the  top  of  the  highest  and 
barest  part  of  the  mountains,  among  the 
small  loose  stones,  which  she  fills  up  with 
moss,  and  lays  teven  or  eight  eggs.  The 
time  of  shooting  them  the  sahie  as  grouse  and 
black-game.     They  fly  in^p&clcs  like  grouse, 


COpllSING,  Exe.r  2^5 

but  are  rather  a  foolish  bh'd,  as  they  will 
run  before  you   on   the  bare  ground  like  j 
chickens,  so  that  the  shooter  may  kill  one> 
half  of  the  pack  on  the  ground  at  one  shot. 
The  tarmigan  weighs  from  fifteen  tQ.  seveU'^ 
teen  ounces.  . 

THE    WOODCOCK, 

Is  a  bird  of  passage,  and  commonly  ar- 
rives in  this  country  about  the  latter  end  of 
October,     The  passage  in  different  seasons^ 
is  more  or  less  advanced  or  retarded,  ac* 
cording  as  the  wind  and  weather  happens  to 
be  at  the  beginning  of  the  autumn :    the  east 
and  north-east  winds,    and  especially  when 
they  are  accompanied  with  fogs,  bring  them 
over  in  the  greatest  numbers.     At  their  ar- 
rival on  the  first  flight  they  drop  any  where^,. 
as  well  under  high  trees   as  in  copses,  in ;- 
hedge-rows,  or  among  heath  and  brambles; 
afterwards  they  take  up  their  abode  in  copses 
of  nine  or  ten  years'  growth,  and  some tirnqs^j; 
in  tliose  little  rows,  which  having  been  cut, 


27^  OF    SHOOTING, 

are  left  to  grow  for  timber ;  for  it  is  but  sel- 
dom that  a  woodcock  is  found  in  a  young 
copse  of  more  than  three  or  four  years' 
growth.  When  it  is  said  they  take  up  their 
abode,  it  must  not  be  understood  to  mean 
that  they  remain  in  the  same  wood  during  the 
whole  of  the  winter,  for  it  is  observed  that 
they  do  not  stay  more  than  sixteen  or 
eighteen  days  in  one  place. 

This  bird  rises  heavily  from  the  ground, 
and   makes  a  considerable  noise  when  he 
wings.     When  he  is  found  in  an  open  field, 
in  a  hedge-row,  or  in  the  pass  of  a  wood,  he 
frequently  only  skims  the  ground,  and  then 
his  flight  not  being  rapid,  he  is  easily  shot. 
But  when  he  is  sprung  io  a  tall  wood,  where 
he  is  obliged  to  clear  the  tops  of  the  trees  be- 
fore he  can  take  an   horizontal  flight,   he 
sometimes  rises  very  high,   and  with  great 
rapidity ;  in  this  case  it  is  difficult  to  seize 
the  moment  of  shooting,   by  reason   of  the 
turnings  and  twistings  which  he  is  obliged  to 
make  in   order  to  pass  through  the  trees. 


COURSING,   ETC.  277 

The  woodcock  walks  clumsily,  as  all  birds 
are  observed  to  do  which  have  great  wings 
and  short  legs.  His  sight  is  also  very  bad, 
and  particularly  in  the  day-time,  it  is  said 
hovvever  that  he  sees  better  in  the  dusk. 

Shooting  woodcocks  is  very  pleasant 
amusement  in  woods  which  are  not  too 
thick,  and  if  they  are  cut  through  in  several  ■ 
places  it  renders  it  more  easy  to  shoot  them 
in  their  passage,  when  they  spring  in  the 
wood,  and  also  to  mark  them  with  greater 
certainty.  There  is  a  species  of  spaniels  ^ 
which  give  tongue  when  the  cock  springs,  or 
when  they  get  upon  his  haunt ;  these  dogs 
are  extremely  useful,  as  they  warn  the  sports- 
man to  be  upon  his  guard.  In  this  sport  it 
is  very  material  to  have  two  or  three  good 
markers ;  with  this  assistance,  if  the  wood 
is  not  too  large,  it  will  be  difficult  for  a  cock 
to  escape  from  a  good  shot.  I  have  seen  it 
frequently  happen  that  he  will  suffer  himself 
to  be  sprung  and  shot  at  two  or  three  times, 
before  he  will  leave  the  wood  to  go   to  a 

Bb  ;. 


278  OF   SHOOTING^ 

hedge-row.  During  the  day  time  the  wootl- 
cock  remains  in  those  parts  of  the  woodsi 
where  there  are  void  places  or  glades,  pick- 
ing up  earth-worms  and  grubs  from  among 
the  fallen  leaves ;  when  night  coaies  on  he 
goes  to  drink,  and  if  it  is  frost  and  snow 
will  feed  there  all  night,  and  at  the  break  of 
day  return  to  the  wood :  the  sportsman  may 
therefore  advantageously  watchat  some  open- 
ing, or  cut,  which  runs  through  the  wood,  and 
shoot  him  in  his  passage  to  and  from^  it  in  the 
morning  or  evening.  It  is  in  these  openings* 
that  nets  are  spread,  to  take  the  woodcocks 
in  their  morning  and  evening  flights.  They 
may  also  be  watched  with  advantage  in  the 
morning  and  evening  flights,  at  those  nar- 
row passes  and  valleys,  on  the  edges  of  the 
woods,  which  lead  to  springs  or  heads  of 
waters. 

Those  who  know  the  custom  that  the 
woodcock  has  of  going  in  the  evening  to  the 
springs  that  adjoin  the  woods,  practice  ano* 
ther  method  of  killing  them;  which,  is  by. 


COURSING,  ETC.  279 

ivatching  near  those  springs  in  the  dusk  of 
the  evening,   in  order  to  shoot  them  as  they 

alight. 

Woodcocks  remain  in  this  country  until 
the  middle  of  March,  and  may  be  found  all 
the  winter  season,  if  the  weather  is  not  too 
severe  ;  but  if  frosts  happen  which  last  for 
some  time,  they  will  almost  totally  disap- 
pear at  that  interval,  and  a  few  will  only  be 
found  by  hazard  in  certain  places  where  ther^ 
are  springs  which  do  not  freeze. 

A  month,  or  thereabouts,  before  their 
departure,  it  is  common  to  see  them  in  pairs 
at  the  morning  and  evening  flights  ;  and  to 
hear  them  when  flying  make  a  piping  noise, 
although  at  other  times  they  are  quite  mute. 

As  they  are  found  in  greater  numbers  in 
the  month  of  March,  than  in  the  middle  of 
winter,  it  is  certain  that  they  assemble  at 
that  time  in  order  to  go  abroad.  Wood- 
cocks are  fattest  from  the  middle  of  Novem- 
Bb  2 


CSO  .  OF    SHOOTING, 

ber,  till  about  the  first  of  February :  when 
they  begin  to  pair,  to  the  time  of  their  de- 
parture, they  are  much  leaner.  It  is  said 
the  female  may  be  distinguished  from  the 
male,  by  a  narrow  stripe  of  white  along  the. 
lower  part  of  the  exterior  web  of  the  outer- 
most feather  of  tiie  wing:  the  same  part  in 
the  outermost  feather  of  the  male,  is  elegantly 
and  regularly  spotted  with  black  and  reddish 
white;  in  the  bastard  wing  of  each  sex  is  a 
small  pointed  narrow  feather,  very  elastic, 
and  much  sought  after  by  painters  as  a 
pencil. 

SNIPES, 

Make  their  appearance  here  in  autumn, 
and  remain  until  the  spring.  It  is  generally 
supposed  that  they  return  into  Germany  and 
Switzerland  to  breed ;  nevertheless  a  great 
number  remain  with  us  during  the  summer, 
and  breed  in  marshes,  where  they  lay  their 
eggs,  in  the  month  of  June,  to  the  number 
of  four  or  five.     Snipes  are  scarcely  worth 


COURSIN'G,  ETC.  281 

shooting  until  the  middle  of  October,  or 
when  the  first  frost  sets  in  :  in  November 
they  grow  very  fat.  These  birds  when  they 
abound  afford  very  excellent  sport.  It  is 
remarked  that  snipes  always  fly  against  the 
wind,  which  is  also  the  case  with  woodcocks  ; 
for  this  reason  it  is  best  to  hunt  for  them  as 
much  as  possible  with  the  wind  to  the  back, 
because  they  then  fly  towards  the  sportsman 
and  present  a  fairer  mark. 

The  snipe  is  generally  esteemed  difficult 
to  shoot,  by  reason  of  the  many  turnings  and 
twistings  which  it  makes  on  being  sprung  : 
but  this  difficulty  exists  only  in  the  minds  of 
inexperienced  sportsmen,  as  there  are  many 
birds  more  difficult  to  shoot  flying.  When 
once  the  shooter  can  accustom  himself  to  let 
the  snipe  fly  away,  without  his  being  in  haste 
or  alarmed,  he  will  find  that  the  flight  is  not 
much  more  difficult  to  follow  than  that  of  the 
quail ;  and  it  is  better  to  let  him  fly  some 
distance,  because  the  smallest  grain  of  shot 
will  kill  him,  and  he  will  fall  to  the  ground  if 
Bb  3 


282  OF    SHOOTING, 

struck  ever  so  slightly.  Among  the  common 
snipes  some  are  larger  than  others  ;  these  are 
thought  to  be  the  males  :  snipes  however  are 
sometimes  found,  which,  from  their  extraor- 
dinary size,  must  necessarily  be  of  a  different 
species,  but  those  are  so  rare,  that  they  do 
not  here  require  a  particular  description, 

WILD  DUCKS. 

This  race  of  birds  which  have  the  shape 
ax\d  form  of  the  tame  duck,  are  extremely 
numerous,  and  tliere  is  no  other  bird  which 
affords  so  many  different  species  as  this ;  but 
of  these  only  the  common  wild  ducks  are 
found  in  considerable  numbers  in  Great- 
Britain.  I  shall  therefore  confine  the  des- 
cription to  them  alone. 

Wild  ducks  are  also  birds  of  passage,  and 
arrive  here  in  great  flights  from  the  northern 
countries,  in  the  winter;  still,  however,  a 
great  many  remain  in  our  marshes,  fens, 
lakes,  &c,  and  there  breed.     They  pair  in 


COURSING,  ETC.  283 

spring,  and  lay  from  twelve  to  sixteen  eggs. 
The  duck  commonly  constructs  her  nest  at 
the  edge  of  the  water,  upon  some  tuft  of 
rushes,  amongst  grass  or  furze,  or  large 
swamps  and  lakes  on  the  moors,  and  begins  to 
lay  about  the  middle  of  March ;  her  incuba- 
tion is  about  thirty  days,  and  young  ones  are 
most  commonly  hatched  ia  May  The 
growth  of  their  wings  is  very  slow,  and  they 
attain  more  than  half  of  their  size  before 
they  are  able  to  fly,  which  happens  about  the 
beginning  of  August,  near  three  months  after 
the  time  of  being  hatched. 

The  wild  duck  differs  little  in  plumage 
from  the  tame  duck,  but  it  is  easily  distin- 
guished by  its  size,  which  is  less ;  the  neck 
being  more  slender,  as  also  the  foot  smaller ; 
the  nails  are  more  black,  and  above  all,  the 
web  of  the  foot,  which  is  finer  and  softer  to 
touch. 

In  the  summer  season,    w^hen  it  is  known 
that  a  team  of  young  ducks  are  in  a  particu- 


284  OF    SHOOTING, 

lar  piece  of  water,  and  just  beginning  to  fly, 
the  sportsman  is  sure  to  find  them  early  in 
the  morning,  dabbling  at  the  edge  of  the 
pool,  and  amongst  the  long  grass,  and  then 
he  may  get  very  near  to  shoot  them. 

By  the  means  of  a  little  boat  they  may  be 
shot  at  any  time  of  the  day  ;  and  this  method 
succeeds  admirably  well  on  small  pieces  of 
water,  as  by  the  help  of  it  they  may  all  be 
killed.  It  will  be  still  more  easy  to  effect 
tiriis,  if  the  sportsman  can  contrive  to  kill  the 
old  duck ;  in  that  case  he  may  tie  a  tame 
duck  by  the  leg,  with  a  piece  of  pack-thread, 
to  a  pin  of  wood  drove  into  the  ground,  at 
the  edge  of  the  water  :  this  may  be  done  in 
a  manner  that  the  duck  may  be  able  to  swim 
a  little  way  into  the  water.  He  must  then 
conceal  himself  within  gun-shot ;  she  will 
soon  begin  to  quack,  and  so  soon  as  the 
young  ones  hear  her,  they  will  come  out  to 
her  thinking  it  to  be  their  mother.  By  these 
means  the  sportsman  may  kill  half  of  the 
team  at  one  shot ;  but  if  he  wishes  to  take 


COURSING,  ETC.  285 

them  alive,  he  has  only  to  throw  into  the 
water,  near  to  the  duek,  a  few  fish-hooks 
tied  upon  pieces  of- twine,  and  baited  with 
pieces  of  the  lights  of  a  calf.  The  lines  must 
be  fastened  to  pickets  placed  at  the  edge  of 
the  water,  and  if  there  be  a  dozen  young 
ducks  he  will  get  them  all,  if  he  has  hooks 
enough. 

In  shooting  wild  ducks,  &c.  observe  al- 
ways to  shoot  with  the  wind,  if  possible  ;  and 
rather  sideways  or  behind  the  fowl  than  full 
in  their  face. 

Next  observe  to  choose  the  most  conveni- 
ent shelter  you  can  find,  either  hedge,  bank, 
tree,  or  any  thing  else  which  may  hide  you 
from  the  view  of  the  fowls.  And  be  sure  to 
have  your  dog  at  your  heels,  under  good 
command,  not  daring  to  stir  till  you  bid  him, 
having  first  discharged  your  piece  ;  as  some 
dogs  ill-taught  will,  upon  the  snap  of  the 
cock,  presently  rush  out  and  spoil  all  the 
sport. 


Q86  OF    SHOOTING, 

If  you  have  not  shelter  enough,  by  reason 
of  the  nakedness  of  the  banks  and  want  of 
trees,  you  must  creep  upon  your  hands  and 
Jknees  under  the  banks,  and  lying  flat  upon 
your  belly,  put  the  nose  of  your  piece  over 
the  bank  and  take  your  level :  for  a  fowl  is 
so  fearful  of  man,  that  though  an  hawk 
were  soaring  over  her  head,  yet  at  the  sight 
of  him  she  would  take  the  wing  and  run  the 
risk  of  that  danger.  But  sometimes  it  so 
happens,  that  the  fowls  are  so  shy,  there  is 
no  getting  a  shot  at  them  without  a  stalking- 
horse,  which  must  be  some  old  jade  trained 
up  for  the  purpose,  who  will  gently,  and  as 
you  please,  walk  up  and  down  in  the  water, 
flodding  and  eating  the  grass  that  grows 
therein.  You  must  shelter  yourself  and  gun 
behind  his  fore  shoulders,  bending  your  body 
down  low  by  his  sides,  and  keeping  his  body 
still  full  between  you  and  the  fowls  ;  being 
w^ithin  shot,  take  your  level  from  before  the 
fore  part  of  the  horse,  shooting  as  it  were  be- 
tween the  horse's  neck  and  the  w^ater,  which 
is  much  better  than  shooting  under  his  belly^ 


CdURSlS^  ETC.  2^7 

being  more  secure  amd  less  perceivable.  To 
supply  the  v^ant  of  a  stalking  hoise,  which 
will  take  up  a  great  deal  of  tiaie  to  instruct 
arid  maJlce  fit  for  this  exercise,  you  may  make 
one  of  any  piece  of  old  canvass,  and  shape  it 
into  the  form  of  a  horse,  with  the  head 
bending  downwards  as  if  he  grazed,  and  stuff 
it  with  any  light  matters ;  but  do  not  forget 
to  paint  it  the  colour  of  a  horse,  of  which 
brown  is  the  best ;  and  let  a  staff  be  fixed 
in  the  midst,  with  a  sharp  iron  at  the  end, 
to  stick  into  the  ground  as  you  may  see  oc- 
casion, standing  fast  till  you  take  your  level. 
It  must  be  made  so  portable  that  you  may 
bear  it  with  ease  in  one  hand,  moving  it  so 
that  it  may  seem  to  graze  as  you  go.  Let 
the  stature  of  your  artificial  stalk-horse  be 
neither  too  low  nor  too  high,  for  the  one  will 
not  hide  your  body,  and  the  other  will  be  apt 
to  frighten  the  fowls.  Instead  of  this  stalk- 
ing-horse, you  may  fashion  out  of  canvass 
painted,  an  ox  or  a  cow  ;  and  this  change  is 
necessary,  when  you  have  so  beaten  the  fowl 
with  your  stalking-horse  that  they  begin  to 


288  OF    SHOOTING, 

find  your  deceit,  and  will  no  longer  endure  it, 
as  it  frequently  falls  out,  then  you  may  stalk 
with  an  ox  or  cow  till  the  stalking-horse  be 
forgotten,  and  by  this  means  make  your  sport 
continual. 

There  are  other  dead  engines  to  stalk 
withal ;  as  an  artificial  tree,  shrub,  or  bush, 
which  may  be  made  of  small  wands,  and  with 
painted  canvass,  into  the  shape  of  a  willow, 
poplar,  or  such  trees  as  grow  by  river  or 
watersides,  for  these  are  best.  If  you  stalk 
with  a  shrub  or  bush,  let  them  not  be  so  tall 
as  your  tree,  but  much  thicker  ;  w^hich  you 
may  make  either  of  one  entire  bush,  or  of 
divers  bushes  interwoven  one  with  another, 
either  with  small  withy-wands,  cord  or  pack- 
thread, that  may  not  be  discerned ;  and  let 
not  your  bush  exceed  the  height  of  a  man, 
but  thicker  than  three  or  four  men,  with  a 
spike  at  the  bottom  to  stick  into  the  ground 
whilst  you  take  your  level. 

Another  good  way  to  shoot  ducks  in  win- 


COURSING,  ETC.  289 

ter,  and  especially  in  frost  at  their  evening 
flight,  at  which  time  they  fly  about  and  are 
more  in  motion  than  at  any  other  time,  is  to 
watch  for  them  in  the  dusk  of  the  evening  at 
the  margins  of  little  pools  and  springs  where 
they  come  to  feed ;  then  they  may  either  be 
shot  whilst  on  the  wing,  or  at  the  moment  in 
which  they  alight  on  the  water :  when  tlie 
frost  is  very  severe,  and  the  pools  and  rivers 
are  frozen  up,  they  must  be  watched  for  in 
places  where  there  are  warm  springs  and  wa- 
ters which  do  not  freeze.  The  sport  is  much 
more  certain,  because  the  ducks  are  confined 
to  those  places  in  order  to  procure  herbs^ 
which  are  almost  the  only  food  that  remains 
for  them  at  this  period. 

HOW  TO  TRAIN  A  WATER-DOG, 
AND  THE  USE  THEREOF. 

I  shall  begin  with  his  colour,  and  although 
some  attribute  much  to  that,  yet  experience 
lets  us  know  they  are  uncertain  observations. 
Your  dog  may  be  any  colour  and  yet  ^xceU 

Cc 


890  OF   SHOOTING, 

lent,  but  choose  him  of  hair  long  and  curled, 
not  loose  and  shaggy ;  his  head  round  and 
curled ;  his  ears  broad  and  hanging ;  eyes 
full,  lively,  and  quick  ;  his  nose  very  short, 
and  lip  like  a  hound;  the  chaps  with  a  full 
set  of  strong  teeth,  and  neck  thick  and  short; 
his  breast  sharp,  and  shoulders  broad ;  his 
fore  legs  straight,  chine  square,  and  but- 
tocks round ;  his  belly  gaunt,  and  thighs 
brawny,  &c. 

For  the  training  of  this  dog  you  cannot 
begin  too  soon,  and  therefore  as  soon  as  he 
can  lap  you  must  teach  him  to  couch  and  lie 
down,  not  daring  to  stir  from  that  posture 
without  leave.  In  his  first  teaching  let  him 
eat  nothing  till  he  deserves  it,  and  have  no 
more  teachers,  feeders,  or  correctors  but 
one,  and  do  npt  alter  that  word  you  first  use 
in  his  information,  as  the  dog  will  take  notice 
of  the  sound,  not  the  language. 

When  you  have  made  him  acquainted  with 
the  word  suitable  to  his  lesson,  you  must 
then  teach  him  to  know  the  word  of  repre- 


COURSING,  ETC.  2^1 

hension,  which  at  first  should  be  used  with- 
out a  jerk,  and  also  use  words  of  cherishing 
to  give  hiin  encouragement  w^hen  he  does 
well ;  and  in  all  these  words  you  must  be 
constant,  and  let  them  be  attended  with  spit- 
ting in  his  mouth,  or  cherishing  with  the 
hand.  There  is  also  a  word  of  advice,  in* 
structing  him  when  he  does  amiss. 

Having  made  him  understand  these  several 
words,  then  teach  him  to  lead  in  a  string  or 
collar  orderly,  not  running  too  forward  nor 
hanging  backward ;  after  this  teach  him  to 
come  close  at  your  heels,  without  leading,  as 
he  must  not  range  by  any  means,  unless  it  be 
to  beat  the  fowl  from  their  coverts,  or  to  fetch 
the  wounded. 

In  the  next  place  teach  him  to  fetch  and 
carry  any  thing  you  throw  out  of  your  hands, 
and  first  try  him  with  a  glove,  shaking  it 
over  his  head  and  making  him  snap  at  it ; 
sometimes  letting  him  hold  it  in  his  mouth, 
and  strive  to  pull  it  from  him ;  at  last  throw 

Cc  2 


292  OF    SHOOTING, 

it  a  little  way  and  let  him  worry  it  on  the 
ground,  and  so  by  degrees  make  him  bring 
it  to  you  wherever  you  throw  it ;  from  the 
glove  you  may  teach  him  to  fetch  cudgels, 
bags,  nets,  &c.  If  you  use  the  dog  to  carry 
dead  fowl  it  will  not  be  amiss,  for  by  that 
means  he  will  not  tear  or  bruise  what  fowl 
you  shoot.  Having  perfected  this  lesson, 
drop  something  behind  you  which  the  dog 
does  not  see,  and  being  gone  a  little  way 
trom  it  send  him  back  to  seek  it,  by  saying 
back^  I  have  lost ;  if  he  seems  amazed,  point 
with  your  finger  urging  him  to  seek  out, 
and  leave  him  not  till  he  has  done  it ;  then 
drop  something  at  a  greater  distance  and 
make  him  find  that  too,  till  you  have  brought 
him  to  go  back  a  mile :  you  may  now  train 
up  for  your  gun,  making  the  dog  stalk  after 
you  step  by  step,  or  else  couch  and  lie  close 
till  you  have  shot. 


The  last  use  of  the  water-dog  is  in  moult- 
ing time,  when  wild  fowl  cast  their  feathers 
and  arc  unable  to  flv,  which  is  between  sum- 


COURSING,    ETC.  293 

nier  and  autumn;  at  this  time  bring  your 
dog  to  their  coverts  and  hunt  them  out  into 
the  stream,  and  there,  with  your  gun  and  nets, 
surprise  them,  driving  them  into  them,  for 
at  this  time  sheep  will  not  drive  more  easy. 
Though  some  may  object  that  this  sickly  time 
is  unseasonable,  yet  if  they  consider  what 
excellent  food  these  fowls  will  prove,  the  tak- 
ing of  them  may  be  excusable.  I  have  eat 
of  them  after  they  have  been  fed  awhile  with 
livers  of  beasts,  barley  paste,  scalded  bran, 
and  such  like  food,  they  have  proved  exceed- 
ing fat,  and  have  tasted  not  so  fishy  as  they 
do  by  their  natural  feeding,  but  exceeding 
sweet,  and  deserve  preference  to  any  fowl 
whatever. 

As  the  language  of  sportsmen  possesses  a 
great  number  of  specific  names  peculiar  to 
themselves,  when  speaking  of  the  various  ob- 
jects of  their  pursuit,  it  may  not  be  improper 
to  notice  them  in  this  place,  and  give  such 
terms  as  are  proper. 

Cc  3 


294  OF    SHOOTING,    &C. 

Covey  of  partridges. 

Nide  of  pheasants,  commonly  called 

a  Ni. 
Pack  of  grouse,  or  brood. 
Pack  of  tarmigan. 

Brood  of  black  game,  or  heath  fowl 
Wisp,  or  vvhisp,  of  snipes. 
Wing  of  plover. 
Flock  of  geese. 
Bevy  of  quails. 
Flight  of  woodcocks^ 
Trip  of  dotterel. 
Team  of  ducks. 
Flock  of  bustards. 


OF    THE 


FOMEST  OF  BJLAIR. 


JLhE  Forest  of  Blair,  in  Perthshire,  be- 
longing to  his  grace  the  Duke  of  Athol,  is  one 
of  the  largest  and  finest  in  Great-Britain ; 
intersected  with  beautiful  rivers,  and  abound- 
ing with  red  and  roe-deer,  but  of  rein-deer 
there  are  very  few  or  none  remaining.  It 
stretches  for  near  thirty  miles  by  the  side  of' 
the  Grampian  mountains ;  adjoining  it  are 
two  other  very  large  forests,  the  property  of 
the  Duke  of  Gordon,  and  the  Earl  of  Fife, 
and  throughout  them  all  there  is  venison  in 
the  greatest  plenty. 

During  the  months  of  July  and  August, 


296  FOREST    O^    BLAIR. 

the  aged  harts  feed  and  lie  on  the  tops  and 
sides  of  high  Iiills,  in  order  to  have  the  ad- 
vantage of  tlie  wind,  being  very  fearful  of 
men  and  dogs  ;  the  hinds  are  mostly  in  the 
valleys  with  their  calves,  and  a  few  straggling 
harts  among  them, 

I  had  the  honour  to  attend  the  Duke  of 
Athol  on  an  excursion  into  his  extensive  forest 
in  August,  1 805,  and  shall  here  attempt  to 
describe  the  manner  of  his  grace's  sport: 
when  he  first  alights  from  his  horse  the  ser- 
vants present  him  with  telescopes,  by  the 
use  of  which,  looking  on  the  mountains' 
sides,  or  in  the  valleys,  it  is  easy  to  distin- 
guish every  hart,  hind  or  calf;  and  I  may 
venture  to  say  that  in  eight  hours  not  fewer 
have  been  perceived  than  from  three  to  four 
thousand  head,  young  and  old,  in  a  corner 
of  the  forest ;  and  were  it  possible  to  go  over 
it  in  one  day,  I  am  confident  a  man  might 
see,  at  least,  ten  thousand  deer. 

When   his  grace  espies  the   harts  lying 


FOREST    OF    BLAIR.  297 

down,  or  grazing,  he  uses  all  methods  to 
gain  the  wind  of  them,  approaching  with  the 
utmost  caution  till  within  a  hundred  or  six 
score  yards,  he  fires  from  a  rifle  gun,  and 
being  a  capital  marksman  seldom  misses  his 
aim ;  as  the  herd  passes  by  his  servants  sup- 
ply him  with  a  second  and  third  piece,  and 
he  frequently  kills  a  hart  at  each  shot.— 
When  they  are  not  to  be  come  at  in  the  wide 
and  open  valleys,  his  men  are  sent  round  in 
all  directions  where  the  deer  can  catch  the 
wind  of  them,  and  on  sight,  or  winding  of 
them,  the  deer  return  down  wind,  where  his 
grace,  taking  advantage  of  the  track  with  the 
wind  in  his  favour  in  the  time  they  drive  by 
him,  can  fire  the  three  rifle  guns  in  one 
minute,  and  will  hit  them  on  full  speed  from 
one  hundred  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards 
distance.  When  the  deer  is  wounded,  in  a 
general  w^ay,  he  leaves  the  herd,  or  rather  the 
other  harts  force  him  out  as  soon  as  he  begins 
to  bleed  freely.  The  man  who  leads  the  grey- 
hounds, by  a  signal  from  his  grace's  hand,  un- 
couples one  or  both  of  them,  when  they  come 


298  FOHEST    OF    BLAIR. 

to  his  grace,  or  the  forester,  the  dog  or  dogs 
are  laid  to  the  slot,  or  track ;  if  the  deer  has 
not  broke  from  the  herd,  the  greyhounds 
will  single  him  out  from  the  others  if  there 
be  a  thousand  of  them  together,  and  will  not 
look  at  any  other  but  that  deer  which  is 
wounded  :  sometimes  he  will  run  a  mile  or 
two  before  the  dogs  bring  him  to  bay,  there 
they  will  keep  him  till  the  forester  comes  up 
and  cuts  the  deer's  throat,  and  the  dogs'  re- 
ward is  the  hot  blood,  which  makes  them 
eager  and  keen. 

The  deer  thus  killed  is  paunched  and  laid 
across  a  horse  and  tied  on ;  his  grace  has 
always  two  or  three  of  those  horses  and  men 
following  at  a  distance  in  order  to  carry  home 
the  slain  of  the  day.  Some  days  he  kills 
from  four  to  six  harts,  weighing  from  twenty  to 
twenty-five  stone  English  weight,  viz.  fourteen 
pounds  to  the  stone  ;  and  I  have  seen  seve- 
ral brought  home  to  Blair-castle  that  cut  on 
the  haunches  three  inches  and  more  of  solid 
fat. 


FOREST    OF    BLAIR.  2^9 

For  grouse,  black  game,  and  tarmigan, 
this  place,  in  my  opinion,  has  not  its  equal. 
The  mountain  hare  is  also  peculiar  to  the 
forests  of  this  country,  and  considerably  lar- 
ger than  the  wold  hares,  and  weighs  from 
eleven  to  fourteen  pounds ;  in  the  beginning 
of  October  they  cast  their  summer's  coat  of 
the  common  colour,  and  become  perfectly 
white  by  Christmas,  except  the  black  mark 
at  the  back  of  the  scut.  They  are  generally 
shot,  or  killed  with  greyhounds,  but  by  the 
last  method  chiefly,  when  the  snow  is  deep, 
as  there  are  many  holes  and  crevices  among 
the  rocks  and  mountains  where  they  rua  in 
and  out  like  rabbits. 

All  round  Blair-castle,  and  his  grace^s  seat 
at  Dunkeld  on  the  Tay,  there  is  excellent  sal- 
mon and  trout  fishing,  and  in  as  deliglitful 
a  country  as  any  part  of  tlie  kingdom.  A 
most  elegant  bridge  is  now  erecting  by  his 
grace  across  the  river  Tay,  in  the  centre  of 
the  town  of  Dunkeld,  on  the  high  road  frora 
Edinburgh  to  Towerness*    At  the  inns  arc 


300  OF    DEER. 

good  accommodations  for  gentlemen  and 
travellers,  who  wish  to  take  a  tour  through 
the  country,  and  the  roads  are  all  exceed- 
ingly good. 

OF  THE  DEER. 

Though  this  volume  does  not  profess  to 
treat  of  hunting,  it  will  be  necessary  for  me 
to  give  a  short  account  of  the  nature  of  deer, 
and  the  method  of  slotting  and  harbouring 
them,  as  pursued  by  forest  sportsmen,  which 
introduces  itself  properly  in  tliis  place  be- 
tween the  chapters  of  shooting  and  coursing, 
as  guns  and  greyhounds  are  both  used  for 
killing  of  venison. 

The  hart  is  called  the  first  year  a  hind,  or 
calf,  the  second  a  brocket,  the  third  a  spayd, 
or  spayade,  the  fourth  a  staggard,  the  fifth  a 
stag,  and  the  sixth  a  hart ;  and  when  he  is 
past  his  sixth  year  he  is  called  a  hart  of  ten, 
and  afterwards,  according  to  the  increase  of 
his  head,   is  named  chroched,  palmed,  or 


OF    DEER*  3<M. 

crowned.  A  hind  has  these  three  degrees ; 
the  first  year  she  is  called  a  calf,  the  secoiid 
a  brocket's  sister,  and  the  third  year  a  hind. 

The  buck  is  called  the  first  year  -a  fawn, 
the  second  a  pricket,  the  third  a  sorel,  the 
fourth  a  sore,  the  fifth  a  buck  of  the  first 
head,  and  the  sixth  year  a  great  buck.  The 
doe  the  first  year  is  called  a  fawn,  the  second 
a  pricket's  sister,  and  the  third  year  a  doe. 
The  roe  is  called  the  first  year  a  kid,  the 
second  a  gurle,  the  third  a  henusev  the  fourth 
a  roe-buck  of  the  first  vhead,  and  ttie  fifth 
year  a  fair  roe-buck.  The  next  thing  to  ue 
considered  is  the  proper  appellatiQU  >qf  the? 
excrement  of  the  several  &orts  of  deer,  called 
the  fewmishings,  which,  is  very  necessary^ 
since  their  dung  is  the  principle  guide  where- 
by good  foresters  and  woodmen  know  and 
observe  the  place  of  their  haunt  and  chiefest 
resort. 

The  footing  of  a  hart  is  called  slot,  of  a 
buck,  and  all  fallow  deer,  a  vew ;  that  of  a 
Dd 


deer  is  called  foiling,  if  on  the  grass,  where 
tiie  impression  of  the  foot  is  hardly  visible. 

The  tail  of  a  hart  hath  no  other  appella- 
tion ;  but  that  of  a  buck,  roe,  or  any  other 
deer,  is  called  the  single.     The  fat  of  all 
Sorts  of  deer  is  called  suet,  but  the  fat  of  a 
roe  and  hart  is  called  bevy-grease.     The 
foresters  expressions  are,    to  harbour  and 
nnharbour  a  hart,  or  he  lieth  in  his  hair ;  to 
lodge  and  touse,  or  dislodge  a  buck  ;  to  seek 
and  find  the  roe,  and  he  beddeth :  the  open* 
ing  is  called  to  break  a  deer.     Terms  to  be 
used  in  generation  are  these :  a  hart,  or  buck, 
goeth  to  rut,  the  roe  goes  to  tourn.     Terms 
for  the  voice  and  sound  of  deer :    the  hart 
belloweth,  the  buck  groaneth,  the  roe  belleth. 
Where  there  are  more  deer  than  one,   the 
ilikilful  forester  terms  them  thus :   a  herd  of 
harts,  hinds,  bucks,  and  does  ;  a  bevy  of  roes. 
And  note,  that  twenty  is  the  least  number 
which  maketh  a  herd  of  any  deer^  except  the 
ioe,  which  is  sit. 


OF    DEER.  303 

The  deer  make  their  abode  all  day  in  the 
valleys,  and  on  high  mountains  and  hills, 
^vhere  they  may  see  round  about  them  afar 
off  for  prevention  of  danger,  being  very  ti- 
morous ;  and  at  night-time,  when  all  things  are 
quiet  and  still,  they  resort  to  the  corn-fields 
fqr  food  and  relief. 

Lastly,  Let  vae  speak  somewhat  of  the  at- 
tire of  deer,  red  or  fallow :  the  round  roll 
next  the  head  is  called  the  burr ;  the  main 
horn,  the  beam  ;  the  lowest  antler,  the  brow 
antler ;  next  above  thereunto,  bizantlers ;  next 
above  that,  the  royal ;  and  the  upper  part  of 
all,  the  surroyal  top  :  in  the  buck  it  is  thus, 
the  burr,  beam,  braunch,  advancers,  palm, 
and  spellers.  If  the  croches  on  the  top  grow 
in  the  form  of  a  rnan's  hand,  it  h  thm  called 
a  palmed  he^d  ;  bead^  bearing  not  abovo 
three  or  four,  the  croches  being  placed  aloft 
all  of  one  height,  are  called  heads  of  so  many 
croches  ;  heads  having  doubling  croches  are 
called  forked  heads,  because  the  croches  are 
planted  on  the  beam  like  forks. 
Dd  2 


304  OF    DK£R. 

A  hart  can  naturally  swim  a  great  way,  in- 
somuch that  I  have  heard  of  some  so  sore 
hunted  in  forests  next  the  sea,  that  they  have 
planjred  into  it,-  and  have  been  killed  by  fish- 
ermen six  miles  from  land.  It  is  reported  of 
them  when  they  go  to  rut,  and  must  for  that 
purpose  cross  some  great  river,  or  arm  of  the 
sea,  they  assemble  in  large  herds, the  strongest 
goes  in  first,  and  the  next  in  strength  follows 
him,  and  so  one  after  the  other,  relieving 
themselves  by  staying  their  heads  on  the  but- 
tocks of  each  other.  When  they  mew,  or 
cast  their  heads,  it  is  said  they  hide  them  in 
the  earth  so  cunningly  that  no  one  w^as  ever 
yet  heard  of  that  had  been  found. 

The  hart  goes  to  feed  in  a  copse,  and  al- 
ways takes  the  wind,  endeavouring  thereby 
to  scent  out  some  person  he  fears  may  an- 
noy him. 

The  hhid  commonly  carries  her  calf  about 
nine  months,  which  usually  falls  in  May,  al- 
though sometimes  later ;  some  of  them  have 


OF    DEER-  305 

two  at  once :  they  always  eat  up  the  skia 
which  the  calf  laid  in.  As  the  calf  grows  up 
she  teaches  it  to  run,  leap,  and  the  way  it 
must  keep  to  defend  itself  from  the  hounds, 
&c.  Harts  and  hinds  are  very  long  lived, 
commonly  a  hundred  years  and  upwards. 
The  time  of  rutting  is  about  the  middle  of 
September,  and  continues  tw^o  months ;  the 
older  they  are  the  hotter,  and  the  better  be- 
loved by  the  hinds,  and  therefore  they  go  to 
rut  before  the  young  ones ;  and  being  very 
fiery  will  not  suffer  any  of  tliem  to  come 
near  the  hinds  till  they  have  satisfied  their 
venery.  But  the  young  ones  are  even  witii 
the  old,  for  when  they  perceive  the  old  ones 
are  grown  -w^eak  by  excess  of  rutting,  tlie 
young  will  frequently  attack  them  and  make 
them  quit  the  place,  that  they  may  be  masters 
of  the  sport. 

They  are  easily  killed  in  rutting  time,  as 
they  follow  the  scent  of  the  hind  with  such 
greediness,  laying  tlieir  noses  to  the  ground, 
tliat  tbey  mind  notliing  else;  they  are.  such 

Dd  3 


306  OF    BEER. 

lovers  of  the  spoit  that  it  is  very  dangerous  for 
any  man  to  come  near  them  at  this  season, 
-for  then  they  will  make  at  any  living  creature 
of  a  different  kind. 

The  time  of  harts  mewing,    or  casting  the 
]]cad  :   the  old  hart  casteth  her  head  sooner 
than  the  young ;    and  the  time  is  from  about 
die  middle  of  February  and  all  March.     If 
you  geid  a  hart  before  he  hath  a  head  he  will 
never  bear  any ;  and  if  you  geld  him  when  he 
has  a  velvet  head  he  will  never  mew,  or  cast 
iti without  fraying   or>  burnishing.     Having 
cast  their  heads  they  instantly  withdraw  into 
the  thickets,   hiding  themselves  in  such  con- 
venient places  where  they  may  have  good 
water  and  strong  feeding,  near  some  ground 
where  wheat  or   peas,  &c.  are   sown ;   but 
young  harts  never  betake  themselves  to  the 
thickets  till  they  have  borne  their  head,  which 
is  in  the  fourth  year.     After  they  have  mew- 
ed, they  will  begin  to  button  in  March  and 
April,  and  as  the  sun  grows  strong,  and  the 
season  of  the  year  puts  forward  the  crop  of 


OF    DEER.  307 

the  earth,  so  will  their  heads  increase  in  all 
respects ;  therefore,  in  the  middle  of  June, 
their  heads  will  be  summed  as  much  as  they 
will  bear  all  the  year, 

OF  THE  COAT  AND  COLOUR  OF 
HARTS. 

The  coats  of  harts  are  of  three  sorts, 
brown,  red,  and  fallow.  Of  brown  harts 
there  are  some  great,  long,  and  hairy,  bearing 
a  high  head,  red  of  colour,  and  well  beamed, 
who  will  stand  before  hounds  very  long,  being 
longer  of  breath  and  swifter  of  foot  than 
those  of  a  shorter  stature.  There  are  ano- 
ther sort  of  brown  harts  which  are  little,  short, 
and  well  set,  bearing  commonly  a  black 
mane,  and  are  fatter  and  better  venison  than 
the  former,  by  reason  of  their  better  feeding 
in  young  copses. 

They  are  very  crafty,  especially  when  in 
grease,  and  will  be  hardly  found,  because 
they  know  they  are  most  inquired  after  ;   be- 


308  OF    DEEK. 

sides  they  are  very  sensible  they  cannot  stand 
long  before  the  hounds. 

The  fallow  harts  bear  their  heads  high, 
and  a  whitish  colour,  their  beams  small^  their 
antlers  long,  slender,  and  ill  grown  ;  having 
neither  heart,  courage,  nor  force :  but  those 
of  a  lively  red  fallow,  having  a  black  or 
brown  list  down  the  ridge  of  the  back,  are 
strong,  bearing  fair  and  high  heads  well  fur- 
nished and  beamed. 

How  to  know  an  old  hart  by  the  $lot^  entries^ 

abatures  andjoils^  fewniets,  gait, 

walkSy  and  fraying'Stocks. 

I  shall  proceed  in  order,  and  first  of  the 
slot.  You  must  carefully  look  on  the  tread- 
ings  of  the  hart's  foot ;  if  you  find  the  tread- 
ings  of  two,  the  one  long  and  the  other  round, 
and  both  of  one  bigness,  yet  shall  the  long 
slot  declare  the  hart  to  be  much  larger  than 
the  round ;  moreover  the  old  harts  hind  foot 
doth  never  over-reach  the  fore  foot,   the 


OF    DEER.  309 

young  ones  do  ;  but  above  all  take  this  ob- 
servation, when  you  are  in  the  wood,  and 
have  found  the  slot  of  a  hart,  mark  what 
manner  of  footing  it  is,  whether  worn  or 
sharp ;  and  accordingly  observe  the  country, 
and  thereby  judge  how  either  may  be  occa- 
sioned ;  as  harts  bred  in  mountainous  and 
stony  countries  have  their  toes  and  sides  of 
their  feet  w^orn,  by  reason  of  their  continual 
climbing  and  resting  themselves  thereon, 
and  not  on  the  heel ;  whereas  in  the  other 
places  they  stay  themselves  more  on  the 
heel  than  toes;  for  in  soft,  or  sandy  ground, 
they  slip  upon  the  heel  by  reason  of  the 
weight,  and  by  frequent  staying  themselves 
thereon  it  makes  the  heel  grow  broader 
and  greater ;  and  thus  you  may  know  the 
age  of  a  hart  by  his  slot,  or  treading.  The 
next  thing  to  be  considered  is  the  fewmishing, 
and  this  is  to  be  judged  of  in  April  or  ]\lay. 
If  the  fewmets  be  great,  large,  and  thick, 
they  signify  the  hart  to  be  ten ;  in  the  mid^ 
die  of  June  and  July  they  make  their  few- 
mets, or  fewmishing,  in  great  crotusses,  very 


giO  OF    DEEK^ 

soft,  and  from  that  time  to  the  end  of  August 
they  make  tliem  large,  long,  and  knotty, 
anomted  and  gilded,  tallmg  them  but  lew 
and  scattered.  In  September  and  October 
there  is  no  longer  judging  by  reason  of  the 
rut. 

Thirdly^  If  you  would  know  the  height  and 
thickness  of  the  hart,  observe  his  entries  into 
the  thickets,  and  M^hat  boughs  he  hath  over* 
stridden,  and  mark  from  thence  the  height 
of  his  belly  from  the  ground ;  his  greatness 
is  known  by  the  sides  of  the  brakes  or  twigs 
where  his  body  has  passed,  and  there,  by 
some  broken  stick,  take  his  dimensions. 

Fourthly,  Take  notice  of  his  gait,  by  which 
you  may  know  whether  the  hart  be  great, 
and  stand  long  before  the  liounds,  or  not ; 
for  all  harts  which  have  a  long  step,  will 
stand  up  very  long,  being  swift,  light,  and 
well  breathed ;  but  if  he  leave  a  great  slot 
ha  will  never  stand  long  when  he  is  chased* 


OP    DEEft.  311 

Lastly,  The  older  the  hart  is,  the  sooner  he 
goeth  to  fray,  and  the  greater  the  tree  is  he 
seeketh  to  fray  upon,  and  such  as  he  cannot 
bend  with  his  head,  and  mark  the  height 
where  the  end  of  his  crotches,  or  palm,  hath 
reached,  and  thereby  know  the  height  of  the 
hart's  head ;  and  if  you  perceive  at  the  high- 
est of  his  fraying  tiiere  are  left  four  marks 
altogether,  of  one  height,  you  may  tlien  con- 
clude him  to  be  a  hart  which  beareth  a 
crowned  top,  croched  at  the  least.  In  like 
mantier,  if  you  see  tliree  antlers  which  touch- 
ed three  branches  of  equal  height,  and  two 
others  that  have  left  their  marks  somewhat 
lower,  you  may  then  judge  he  beareth  a 
palmed  head. 

Him  to^seek  n  hart  in  Ms  haunts,  or  feeding 
places,  according  to  the  season  of  the  year. 

All  harts  change  their  manner  of  feeding 
^very  month,* and  therefore  I  shall  treat  or- 
derly of  every  one  through  the  year,  beginning 
with  the  month  wi^h  is  the  conclusion  of 


ri 


S12-  OP    DEER. 

their  rutting  time,  viz.  November ;  in  that 
month  tiiey  feed  on  heaths  and  broomy 
places. 

In  December  they  herd  together,  and 
withdraw  themselves  into  the  strength  of  the 
forests  to  shelter  from  the  cold  winds,  snows, 
and  frosts ;  and  feed  on  elm-trees,  elder- trees, 
brambles,  and  whatsoever  green  thing  they 
can  find  ;  and  if  it  snows  they  will  skin  the 
trees  like  goats. 

In  January  they  leave  herding,  but  will 
keep  five  or  six  in  company,  and  in  the  cor- 
ners and  hollow  places  of  the  forest  will 
feed  on  the  winter  pasture,  sometimes  mak* 
ing  their  incursions  into  neighbouring  corn- 
fields, if  they  can  perceive  the  blades  of  wheat, 
rye,  or  such  like,  appear  above  ground. 

In  February  and  March  they  frequent 
corn-fields  and  meadows,  and  in  these  months 
mew  and  cast  their  heads,  looking  out,  after 
that,  for  places  more  obscure,   where  they 


OF    DEEU,  3l3 

may  abscond,  being  ashamed  and  afraid  to 
be  seen,  having  lost  both  their  beauty  and 
defence. 

In  April  and  May  they  rest  in  their  thick- 
ets and  most  retired  parts  of  the  forest,  or 
amongst  other  bushy  and  shady  places  during 
that  season,  and  stir  very  little  till  ruttlng- 
time,  unless  they  are  disturbed.  Some  harts 
are  so  cunning  that  they  will  have  two  lairs 
to  harbour  in,  a  good  distance  apart,  and 
will  frequently  change  (their  greatest  securi- 
ty) from  the  one  to  the  other,  taking  still 
the  benefit  of  the  wind.  In  these  months 
they  go  not  to  the  soil  by  reason  of  the 
moisture  of  the  spring,  and  the  dew^  that 
continually  overspreadeth  th^  grass. 

In  June,  July,  and  August,  they  are  in 
their  pride  of  grease,  and  then  resort  to 
ispring  copses  and  corn  fields,  but  seldom  go 
where  barley  grows. 

In  September   and   October  ttiey   leave 
Ee 


314-  OF    DEER. 

their  thickets  and  go  to  rut,  during  which 
season  they  have  no  certain  place  either  for 
food  or  harbour. 

In  what  manner  the  huntsman  should  draw 
the  springs  to  find  the  hart. 

Let  him  not  come  too  early  into  the 
springs,  or  haunts,  where  he  thinks  the  hart 
feeds,  and  is  at  his  relief,  as  they  usually  go 
to  their  lairs  in  the  spring3,  and  if  they  ar6 
old  crafty  deer  they  will  return  to  the  bor* 
der  of  the  copse,  and  there  listen  whether 
they  can  hear  any  approaching  danger ;  and 
if  they  chance  to  scent  the  huntsmen,  or  tha 
hounds,  they  will  instantly  dislodge. 

Then  is  the  huntsman's  proper  time  to 
beat  the  outsides  of  the  springs,  or  thickets ; 
if  he  finds  the  track  of  a  hart,  or  deer,'  let 
him  observe  whether  it  is  new,  which  ho  may 
know  thus  :  the  dew  will  be  beaten  pfl^  the 
foil  fresh,  or  the  ground  broken,  or  printed 
ivith  other  tokens,  so  he  may  judge  his  g^me 
lately  went  that  way. 


OF    DEER.  315 

Having  found  the  slot,  or  treading,  and 
the  hound  sticking  well  upon  it,  let  him  hold 
him  short,  as  he  will  better  draw  being  so 
held  than  if  he  were  let  the  length  of  the 
lino,  and  thus  let  him  draw  till  he  is  come 
to  the  covert,  if  possible,   taking  notice  by 
the  way  of  the  slot,  foik,  entries,   and  the 
Hke,  till  he  hath  harboured  him  :  that  done, 
kt  him  plash,  or  stick  down  small  twigs,  some 
above  and  some  below,  as  he  shall  think  fit ; 
and  then,  whilst  the  hound  is  hot,  let  him 
beat  the  outsides  and  make  his  ring-walks 
twice  or  thrice  about  the  wood ;  one  while 
by  the  great  and  open  ways,   that  he  may 
help   himself  by   the  eye  ;     another  whik 
through  the  thick  and  covert,  lest  his  hound 
should  over  shoot  it,  having  still  better  scent 
in  tlie  covert  thq^n  highways.     If  he  doubts 
whether  the  hart  is  gone  out  of  the  ring- 
walks,  or  fears  he  hath  drawn  amiss,  then  let 
him  go  to  the  marks  which  he  plashed,  and 
draw  counter  till  he  may  take  up  the  feW'- 
met.     Let  him  mark  the  place  where  he  has 
fed,   and  the  subtleties  and  crafts  he  has 

Ee  2 


^16*  OF    DEER, 

made.;  as  thereby  he  shall  know  what  the 
hart  will  do  before  the  hounds  ;  for  if  in  the 
morning  he  hath  made  any  doubling  towards 
the  water,  or  else  in  his  way,  then  when  he 
begins  to  be  spent,  all  the  faults,  doublings, 
and  subtleties  that  he  will  use,  shall  be  in  the 
same  place,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as 
made  in  the  morning ;  which  observation  is 
of  great  advantage  to  the  huntsmen,  and  in 
this  manner  should  they  harbour  their  deer. 

OF  THE  BUCK. 

The  buck  is  fawned  about  the  latter  end 
of  May,  and  his  nature  and  properties  differ 
little  from  the  harts,  only  the  hart  goes  sooner 
to  rut,  and  is  sooner  in  grease.  There  is 
not  so  much  art  and  skill  required  in  lodging 
a  buck  as  in  harbouring  a  hart ;  neither  is 
tliere  so  much  drawing  after  him  necessary, 
you  are  only  to  judge  by  the  view,  and  mark 
what  grove  or  covert  he  enters,  for  he  will 
not  rove  and  wander  up  and  down  so  often 
as  a  hart,  nor  so  frequently  change  his  lair« 


OF    DEER.  817 

He  maketh  his  fewmishings  in  different  man-^ 
ners  and  forms,  as  the  bart  does,  according  to 
tlie  diversity  of  his  food,  but  ar^  mpst  con> 
monly  round. 

The  hart  and  buck  differ  in  their  methods 
in  endeavouring  to  elude  the  pursuit  of  the 
hunters ;  for  when  the  buck  is  hunted,  he 
betakes  himself  to  such  strong  holds  and 
coverts  as  he  is  most  acquainted  with,  not 
flying  far  before  the  hounds,  nor  crossing, 
doubling,  or  using  such  subtleties  as  the 
hart  is  accustomed  to  do.  The  buck  will 
be  at  a  brook,  or  river,  like  the  hart,  but  they 
must  not  be  so  deep ;  nor  can  stay  so  long 
at  soil  as  the  hart  will ;  he  leaps  lighter  at 
rut  than  the  hart,  and  groans  as  a  hart  bel- 
lows, but  with  a  low  voice  rattling  in  the 
throat ;  and  here  it  is  to  be  noted  that  they 
love  not  one  another,  nor  will  they  come 
near  each; others' lair. 

He  is  of  a  sweeter  scent  to  the^  hounds 
•than  the  hart;  but  according  to  the  judgment 

E  e  3 


318  OF    DEER. 

of  most,  the  roe  is  the  sweetest  chase  of  all. 
The  buck's  veaison  is  incomparable  food, 
and  is  dressed  like  hart  venison,  only  the 
last  may  be  preserved  longer  than  the  former : 
he  herds  more  than  the  hart,  and  lies  in  the 
driest  places ;  but  if  he  be  at  large,  and  un- 
confined  within  the  limitary  precincts  of  a 
park,  he  will  herd  but  little  from  May  to 
August,  because  the  flies  trouble  him.  He 
takes  great  delight  in  hilly  places,  but  the 
dales  please  him  most  to  feed  in. 

OF  THE  ROE. 

It  is  very  easy  to  shoot  or  hunt,  and  goes 
to  rut,  or  tower,  most  generally  in  October, 
the  extent  of  which  consists  of  fifteen  days, 
and  he  never  parts  with  the  doe  till  fawning- 
time.  The  doe  finding  herself  near  her 
time  secretly  departs  from  the  buck,  and 
fawns  as  far  from  him.  as  she  can,  for  could 
he  find  the  fawn  he  would  kill  it ;  but  when 
the  fawn  grows  big,  can  run  and  feed,  she 
then  lovingly  again  returns  to  the  buck.     So 


OF    DEEK.  319 

soon  as  the  roe-buck*  comes  from  rut  he 
casts  his  horns ;  and  there  are  few  after  two 
years  old  which  do  not  mew  at  Ail-hallows' 
tide,  but  their  heads  grow  quickly  again. 

The  venison  of  a  roe  is  never  out  of  season 
or  very  fat,  and  therefore  they  may  be  hunt- 
ed or  shot  at  any  time ;  yet  surely  some 
favour  ought  to  be  shown  the  doe  whilst  she 
is  big  with  fawn,  and  afterwards  till  her  fawn 
is  able  to  shift  for  itself.  They  make  an 
admirable  chase,  stand  long.,  and  fly  far  end- 
ways ;  they  see  not  very  welh 

When  they  are  hunted  they  turn  much,  and 
often,  and  come  back  upon  tlie  dogs  directly ; 
when  they  can  no  longer  hold  out  they  then 
take  soil  as  the  hart  does,  and  will  hang  by 
a  bough  in  such  a  manner  that  nothing  will 
appear  of  them  above  water  but  their  snout, 
and  thus  will  suffer  the  dogs  to  come  nearly 
upon  them  before  they  will  stir.  The  male 
is  not  called,  by  the  skilful  in  the  art  of 
hunting,  a  great  roe-buck,  but  a  fair  roe-buck : 


320  COURSING,:  ETC. 

the  herd  k  called  bevy  ;  and  if  there  be  not 
bevy-grease  on  his  tail  when  he  is  broken  up, 
he  is  not  fit  for  eating. 

The  hound  should  be  rewarded  widi  the 
bowels,  the  blood,  and  feet  slit  asunder, 
and  boiled  altogether. 

OF  COURSING  WITH  GREYHOUNDS. 

I  need  not  declare  the  excellencies  which 
are  contained  in  this  noble  exercise,  since  it 
is  so  well  known  to  all  gendemen  who  take 
delight  in  that  pleasant  and  healthy  pastime ; 
I  shall  therefore  only  treat  upon  the  breed 
of  greyhounds,  their  shape,  diet,  and  the 
laws  belonging  to  coursing  the  same,  accord- 
ing aS  they  were  commanded,  allowed,  and 
subscribed  by  the  Duke  of  Norfolk,  in  the 
reign  of  Queen  Elizabeth. 

First,  you  must  have  respect  to  the  country, 
which  should  be  champaign,  plain,  or  high 
•downs.     The  best  valleys  ar€  those  oi  Bel- 


COltRSING,  ETC.  321 

voir,  White-horse,  Evesham,  or  any  other 
where  there  are  no  coverts,  so  that  a  hare 
may  stand  forth  and  endure  a  course  of  two 
or  three  miles.  High  downs,  or  heaths,  are 
met  with  about  Marlborough,  Salisbury,  Ci- 
rencester, Lincoln,  and  Great  Driffield  in 
Yorkshire;  though  these  places  are  very 
commodious  for  the  breeding  and  training 
up  of  greyiiounds,  yet,  in  my  opinion,  the 
middle,  or  most  part  arable  grounds,  are  the 
best;  and  still  those  gentlemen  who  dwell  on 
downs  or  plain  grounds,  to  keep  up  the  repu- 
tation of  their  own  dogs,  affirm  that  they  are 
more  nimble  and  cunning  in  turning  than  the 
vale  dogs  are. 

It  is  a  received  opinion  that  the  greyhound 
bitch  will  beat  the  dog,  by  reason  she  excels 
him  in  nimbleness ;  but  if  you  consider  that 
the  dog  is  longer  and  stronger,  you  must  look 
upon  such  opinion  as  no  more  than  a  vulgar 
error.  As  to  the  breeding  of  your  greyhound, 
the  best  dog  upon  an  indifterent  bitch  will 
not  produce  so  good  a  whelp  as  an  indiffe- 


322  COURSING,   ETC. 

rent  dog  upon  the  best  bitch ;  observe  this 
rule  in  general  as  to  breeding,  let  your  dogs 
and  bitches,  as  near  as  you  can,  be  of  an  equal 
age,  not  exceeding  four  years  old ;  however 
to  breed  with  a  young  dog  and  an  old  bitch 
may  be  the  means  of  producing  excellent 
whelps,  the  goodness  whereof  you  will  know 
by  their  shape,  in  this  manner ;  to  be  raw* 
boned,  lean,  loose  made,  sickled  or  crook 
hocked,  and  generally  connected  in  every 
member,  are  the  proper  marks  of  excellent 
shape  and  goodness ;  but  if  after  three  or  four 
months  they  appear  round  and  close  thrust, 
felt,  straight,  and  not  full  summed,  and  kmK 
in  every  member,  they  never  prove  good, 
swift,  or  comely.  A  well  shaped  greyhound, 
after  a  year  and  a  half  old,  will  have  his  head 
lean  and  long,  with  a  sharp  nose,  rush  grown 
from  the  eye  downwards ;  a  full  clear  eye, 
with  long  eyelids  ;  a  sharp  ear,  short  and 
close  falling ;  a  long  neck  a  little  bending, 
with  a  loose  hanging  weasand,  abroad  breast, 
straight  fore  legs,  hollow  side,  straight  ribs^ 
a  square  flat  back,  short  and  strong  fillets,  ^ 


COURSIN'G,  ETC.  923 

broad  space  between  the  hips,  a  strong  stern, 
or  tail,  a  round  foot,  and  good  large  clefts/ 

The  dieting  of  greyhounds  consists  in  four 
things,  food,  exercise,  airing,  and  kennelling. 
Food  of  a  greyhound  is  two-fold;  general, 
that  is,  the  maintaining  of  a  dog  in  good 
bodily  condition,  and  particularly  when  diet- 
ed for  a  wager,  or  it  may  for  some  dis- 
temper he  is  afflicted  with* 

A  greyhound's  general  food  ought  to  be 
chippings,  crusts  of  bread,  soft  bones  and 
gristle;  your  cMppings  ought  to  be  scalded 
in  beef,  mutton^  veal^  or  venison,  broth,  and 
xvhen  it  is  indifferently  cool  then  make  your 
bre^d  floiat  with  good  milk,  and  give  it  youjr 
greyhounds  morning  and  evening,  and  tl^jB 
\vill  keep  ^hein  in^  a  good  state  of  body;         [ 

'  But  if  your  dog  be  poor,  sickly,  and  weak^ 
then  take  sheep's  heads,  wool  and  all,  clean 
washecl^>  afiwJ  having  broken  them  to  pieces 
put  them  into  a^pot^  and  when  it  boilB  skin) 


324  COURSING,  ETC, 

the  pot,  and  put  therein  a  good  store  of  oat- 
meal, and  such  herbs  as  pottage  is  usually 
made  of,  boil  these  till  the  flesh  is  very  ten- 
der ;  then  with  the  meal  and  broth  feed  your 
dogs  morning  and  evening,  and  it  will  recover 
them.     If  you  design  your  greyhound  for  a 
wager,  give  him  this^diet  bread  :   take  half  a 
peck  of  the  finest  and  driest  oatmeal,  and  a 
peck  of  good  wheat,    having  them  ground 
together,  bolt  the  meal,  and  scattering  an  in- 
different quantity  of  liquorice  and  anniseeds 
well  beaten  together ;    knead  it  up  with  the 
whites  of  eggs,  new  ale,  and  barm,  mixed 
together,  and  bake  it  in  small  loaves,  indiffe- 
rently hard ;  then  soak  it  in  beef,  or  any  of 
the  aforesaid  broths,  and  half  an  hour  after 
sunrising,  and  half  an  hour  before  its  setting, 
having  first  walked  and  aired  your  greyr 
hound,  give  it  him  to  eat.     This  will  not 
only  increase  his  strength,  but  enlarge  his 
wind. 

Having  thus  spoken  of  a  greyhound's  feed- 
ing, either  for  keeping  him^  in  healthy  or  re- 


COURSING,  ETC,  525 

storing  it  when  lost.     I  shall,    in  the  next 
place,  proceed  to  his  exercise. 

You  should  take  two  or  i  three  brace  of 
greyhounds,  or  as  many  as  you  mean  to  train, 
and  lead  them  in  slips  into  the  field  where 
you  exercise  your  horses  and  dogs,  and  in 
such  plnces    as  are  clear  from   flinta  and 
stones,  that  they  may  not  cut  their  feet ;  also 
be  well  mounted  on  a  horse  that  has  good 
speed,   having  a  piece  of  turf  that  is  about 
two   miles  straic^ht   forwards  :   let  the   do^ 
leader  hold  the  dogs  in  the  slips,  then  set  off 
in  a  canter  for  a  quarter  of  a  mile  and  begin 
to  halloo,  halloo,  halloo,  at  that  instant  the  dog 
leader  must  slip  all  the  dogs  at  once,  and  you 
hallooing,  the  dogs  will  conie  alter  you  with 
all  their  might,    thinking  there  is  a  hare  be- 
fore you ;  then  go  off  at  full  speed,    in  a 
straight  line,  for  two  miles,  and  on  the  dogs 
coming  up  to  you  make  a  circle  round,  hal- 
looing ;   come   the  same  way  back   as  you 
went,  till  you  come  to  the  dog  leader  agam. 
When  the  dogs  tumble  and  roll  tiiemseives 

Ff 


326  couRsiNd,  trt. 

on  the  ground,  take  each  dog  and  slip  hi* 
tail  two  or  three  times  through  your  hand, 
then  walk  them  about  for  a  quarter  of  an 
hour,  and  when  you  get  them  home,  wash 
their  feet  with  butter  and  beer,  then  kennel 
fhem ;  half  an  hour  after  feed  them.  With 
this  exercise,  and  coursing  them  twice  or 
thrice  a  week  with  hares,  they  will  be  as  fit, 
with  respect  to  feeding  and  training,  as  any 
dogs  in  the  kingdonj. 

As  to  the  first,  he  ought  to  be  coursed  two 
or  three  times  a  week,  in  such  manner  that 
you  usually  reward  him  with  blood,  which 
will  animate  and  encourage  him  to  prosecute 
his  game ;  but  be  not  unmindful  to  give  the 
hare  all  just  and  lawful  advantage,  so  that 
she  may  stand  long  before  the  greyhound, 
whereby  he  may  shew  his  strength  and  skill 
before  he  reaps  the  benefit  of  his  labour.  If 
he  kills,  suffer  him  not  to  break  the  hare, 
but  take  her  from  him,  and  having  cleansed 
his  chaps  from  the  wool  of  the  hare,  then: 
give  him  the  liver,  lights,  and  heart,  and  so 


COURSING,  ETC.  327 

take  him  up  in  your  leash,  lead  him  home 
and  wash  his  feet  with  some  butter  and  beer 
as  beforementioned,  and  then  put  him  into 
the  kennel,  and  feed  hnii  half  an  hour  after- 
wards. Upon  your  greyhound's  coursing 
days,  give  him  in  the  morning  before  you  air 
him,  a  toast  and  butter,  or  oil,  and  nothing 
else,  then  kennel  him  till  he  goes  to  his 
course.  The  reason  for  kennelling  your 
greyhounds  is,  that  it  breeds  in  the  dogs  lust, 
spirit,  and  nimbleness,  besides  it  prevents 
several  dangerous  casualties  and  keeps  the 
pores  from  spending  till  time  of  necessity ; 
and  therefore  do  not  permit  your  dog  to  stir 
out  of  the  kennel  but  in  the  hours  of  feed- 
ing, walking,  coursing,  or  other  necessary 
business. 

THE  LAWS  OF  THE  LEASH,    OR 
COURSING. 

Though  the  laws  of  coursing  may  alter  ac- 
cording to  some  men's  fancies,  yet  those  sub- 
scribed by  the  chief  of  the  gentry  were  ever 
Ff  2 


3^8  COURSIKG,  ETC. 

held  authentic :  take  them  thus  in  order, 
according  to  my  collection,  out  of  Mr.  Mark- 
hani;  the  first  greyhound  courser  in  England. 

1.  It  was  ordered  that  he  who  was  chosen 
fewterer,  or  letter-loose  of  the  greyhounds, 
should  receive  those  matched  to  run  together 
into  his  leash  as  soon  as  he  comes  into  the 
field,  and  follow  the  next  -to  the  hare-finder 
till  he  comes  unto  the  form  ;  and  no  horse- 
man, or  footman,  on  pain  of  disgrace,  to  go 
before  them,  or  on  any  side,  but  directly 
behind, -the  space  of  forty  yards,  or  therea- 
bouts.       ^ 

2.  Tliat  not  above  one  brace  of  grey- 
hounds do  course  a  hare  at  one  instant. 

3.  That  tlie  hare-finder  should  give  the 
hare  three  soho's  before  he  puts  her  from  her 
lair,  to  make  the  greyhounds  gaze  and  at- 
tend her  rising. 

-4.  That    the   fewterer   shall  give   twelve 


COURSING,  ETC.  329 

score  yards  law  ere  he  loose  the  greyhounds, 
except  it  be  in  danger  of  losing  sight 

5.  That  dog  which  giveth  the  first  turn, 
if  after  the  turn  be  given  there  be  neither 
coat,  slip,  nor  wrench,  extraordinary,  I  say, 
he  which  gives  the  first  turn  shall  be  .held  to 
win  the  wager. 

€.  If  one  dog  gives  the  turn,  and  the 
other  bears  the  haje,  that  which  bore  the 
hare  shall  win. 

7.  If  one  gives  both  the  first  and  last  turn, 
and  no  other  advantage  be  between  theni, 
^he  odd  turn  shall  win  the  wager. 

•"♦ 

8.  That  a  coat  shall  be  more  than  two 
turns,  and  a  go-by,  or  the  bearing  of  the  hare, 
equal  with  two  turns. 

9.  If  neither  dog  turn  the  hare,  then  he 
which  leadeth  last  at  the  cover,  shall  be  held 
to  win  the  wager. 

Ff  3 


330  COURSING,  ETC. 

10.  If  one  dog  turn  the  hare,  serve  him- 
self, and  turn  her  again,  these  two  turns 
shall  be  as  much  as  a  coat. 

11.  If  all  the  course  be  equal,  then  he 
which  bears  the  hare  shall  win  only;  and  if 
she  be  not  borne,  the  course  must  be  ad- 
judged dead. 

12.  If  he  which  comes  in  first  to  the 
death  of  the  hare,  takes  her  up  and  saves  her 
from  breaking,  cherisheth  the  dogs,  and 
cleanseth  their,  mouths  from  the  wool,  or 
other  filth  of  the  hare,  for  such  courtesy 
done  he  shall  in  right  challenge  the  hare; 
but  not  doing  it,  he  shall  have  no  right, 
privilege,  or  title,  therein. 

13.  If  any  dog  shall  take  a  fall  in  the 
course,  and  yet  perform  his  part,  he  chal- 
lenge the  advantage  of  a  turn  more  than  h^ 
giveth. 

14.  If  one  dog  turn  the  hare,  serve  him* 


COURSING,  ETC,  331 

self,  and  give  divers  coats,  yet  in  the  end 
stand  still  in  the  field,  the  other  dog  without 
turn  giving,  running  home  to  the  covert, 
that  dog  which  stood  still  in  the  field  shall  be 
adjudged  to  lose  the  wager. 

15.  If  any  man  shall  ride  over  a  dog,  and 
overthrow  him  in  liis  course,  though  the  dog 
were  the  worst  dog  in  opinion,  yet  the  party, 
for  the  offence,  shall  either- receive  the  dis- 
grace of  the  field,  or  pay  the  wager;  for  be- 
tween parties  it  shall  be  adjudged  no  course. 

16.  Lastly,  Those  who  are  chosen  judges 
of  the  leash,  shall  give  their  judgment  pre- 
sently, before  they  depart  from  the  field,  or 
else  he,  in  whose  default  it  lieth,  shall  pay 
the  wager  by  a  general  voice  and  sentence* 

Note,  That  it  lieth  in  the  power  of  him 
that  hath  the  office  of  the  leash  conferred  on 
him,  to  make  laws  according  to  the  custom 
of  countries,  and  the  rule  of  reason. 


Remedied^  and  their  hurts  healed,  according 

to  the  best  prescriptions  of  ancient 

and  modern  sportsmen^  and 

gamekeepers. 


OF  MADNESS  IN  DOGS, 

The  symptoms  of  the  maladies,  and  their  cure. 

There  are  properly  seven  sorts  of  mad- 
ness which  afflict  a  dog,  whereof  two  of  them 
are  incurable,  and  therefore  I  shall  say  but 
little  thereon,  only  so  much  as  may  give  you 
warning  to  shift  them  from  your  other  dogs, 
because  their  disease  is  infectious,  and  that 
you  may  be  aware  of  them  yourself,  lest  they 
injure  you,  as  their  biting  is  dangerous. 

The  first,  incurable,  is  called  the  hot  burn- 
ing madness*  and  is  known  by  these  symp- 


dogs'  diseases,  etc.  333 

toms :  first  when  they  run  they  raise  their  tails 
upright,  and  run  upon  any  thing  that  stands 
before  them,  having  no  respect  where,  nor 
which  way,  tliey  run ;  also  their  mouths  will 
be  very  black,  without  any  foam  in  or  about 
them.  They  will  not  continae  this  above 
three  or  four  days,  after  w^hich  time  they  die, 
their  pain  being  so  intolerable  ;  and  all  the 
dogs  they  have  bit,  and  drawn  blood  from, 
will  be  mad  in  like  manner. 

The  second  is  called  the  running  madness, 
and  is  less  dangerous,  however  incurable. 
The  dogs  that  are  troubled  with  this  mad- 
ness run  not  at  men,  but  dogs,  and  no  other 
beasts.  The  symptoms  are,  they  will  smell 
on  other  dogs,  and  having  smelt  them  will 
shake  and  bite  them,  yet  shaking  their  tails 
and  seeming  to  offer  no  harm. 

The  other  five  being  rather  sickness,  w^hich 
are  curable,  are  these. 

First,  The  dumb  madness,   is  known  by 


334  dogs'  diseases,  etc. 

the  dog  not  feeding,  but  holds  his  mouth 
%vide  open  continually,  putting  his  feet  to  his 
mouth  frequently,  as  if  he  bad  a  bone  in  hi§ 
throat. 

The  cure  is  this  :  take  four  ounces  of  the 
juice  of  spathala  putridse,  and  put  it  into  a 
pot;  then  take  the  like  quantity  of  the  juic^ 
of  black  hellibore,  and  as  much  of  the  juice 
of  rue  ;  having  strained  them  all  through  a 
fine  cloth,  put  them  into  a  glass  ;  then  take 
two  drams  of  scammony,  unprepared,  and 
having  mingled  it  with  the  former  juices,  put 
it  into  a  horn,  or  funnel,  and  convey  it  do\v;ii 
his  throat,  keeping  his  head  up  straight  lest 
he  cast  it  up  again ;  then  bleed  hirn  in  the 
mouth,  cutting  three  or  four  veins  in  his 
gums,  that  he  may  bleed  the  better,  and  in 
a  short  time  you  will  find  amendment :  or 
you  may  only  take  eight  drams  of  the  juice 
of  an  herb  called  hartshorn,  and  dog's  tooth; 
and  you  will  find  it  a  most  excellent  receipt 
against  any  kind  of  madness  whatsoever. 


dogs'  diseases,  etc.  335 

Of  the  falling  madness. 

The  second  is  so  called,  and  lieth  in  their 
heads,  which  makes  them  reel  as  they  go, 
and  then  fall.  For  the  cure,  take  four 
ounces  of  the  juice  of  piony,  with  the  like 
quantity  of  the  juice  of  briony,  the  like  of 
the  juice  of  cruciata,  and  four  drams  of 
stavesacre  pulverized  ;  mingle  these  together 
and  give  your  dog  as  aforesaid  ;  then  let  hina 
blood  in  the  ears,  or  the  two  veins  which 
come  down  the  shoulders,  and  if  he  is  not 
cured  at  first,  give  it  him  a  second  or  third 
time. 

Of  the  lank  madness » 

So  is  the  third  kind  of  madness  called,  by 
reason  of  the  leanness  of  their  bodies,  occa- 
sioned by  scummering.  The  cure  is,  first  to 
purge  your  dog  with  this  potion  ;  take  an 
Oiince  of  cassia  fistularis,  well  cleansed,  two 
drams  and  a  half  of  stavesacre  pulverized. 


336  dogs'  diseases,  etc. 

and  the  like  quantity  of  scammony,  prepared 
in  white  wine  vinegar,    and  four  ounces  of 
olive-oil,  temper  these,  and  warm  them  over 
the  fire,  and  give  it  your  dog  in  the  morning. 
Put  him  into  the  following  bath,    fasting; 
put  into  six  pails  full  of  water,  ten  handfuls 
of  mugwort,   of  rosemary,    of  red  sage,   of 
the  roots,  or  leaves,    of  marshmallows,  of 
the   roots,    or   leaves,    of  wallwort,    of  the 
roots,  or  stalks,  of  fennel,    of  the  leaves,  or 
Stalks,    of  elecampane,    balm,    rue,    sorrel^ 
bugloss,  and  melilot,   let  these  boil  together 
in  two  thirds  of  water  and  the  other  wine, 
until  one  third  be  consumed  ;  the  bath  being 
no  hotter  than  your  dog  can  endure  it,  bathe 
him  therein  for  an  hour,    then  take  him  out 
and  put  him  in  some  warm  place  for  fear  of 
catching  cold ;  do  this  four  or  five  times  in 
the  same  bath,  and  it  will  cure  him. 

Of  the  sleeping  madness. 

The  fourth  is  called  the  sleeping  madness, 
and  is  caused  by  some  little  worms  breeding 


docks'  diseases,  etc:        '  J^ 

in  the  mouth  of  the  stomach  from  corrupt^ 
humours,  the  vapours  and  fumes  wliereof 
ascending  into  the  head,  makes  the  dog  sleep- 
continually,  and  frequently  he  dies  sleeping. 
For  the  cure  you  must  take  five  ounces  of 
the  juice  of  wormwood,  with  two  ounces  of 
the  powder  of  hartshorn  burned,  and  two 
drams  of  agarick,  mingled  together,  and  if 
they  be  too  thick,  thin  them  with  white  wine, 
and  give  it  your  dog  to  drink. 

Of  rheumatic  7nadness. 

This  madness  is  so  called,  because  when  a 
dog  hath  got  it,  his  head  swells,  his  eyes  are 
as  yellow  as  saffron,  and  he  commonly  sla- 
vereth  at  the  mouth.  For  the  cure,  take  six 
ounces  of  the  juice  of  fennel  roots,  and  the 
like  quantity  of  the  juice  of  ivy,  four  ounces 
of  the  powder  of  the  roots  of  polypody,  boil 
them  in  white  wine  and  give  it  your  dog  to 
drink,  as  hot  as  he  can  bear  it. 

When  a  dog  hath  any  of  these  kinds  of 


S99  dogs'  diseases,  etc. 

madness,  he  will  have  no  desire  to  eat,  fre- 
quently fasting  eight  or  nine  days,  and  so 
starve  to  death  ;  indeed  if  they  are  troubled 
with  any  distemper^  they  will  refuse  their 
meat,  even  the  daintiest  bit  you  can  give 
them,  until  they  have  eaten  grass  and  cleared 
their  stomachs  of  what  offended  it,  and  they 
then  will  eat. 

^  remedy  against  the  mange. 

This  distemper  befals  a  dog  frequently  for 
want  of  fresh  water  to  drink  when  he  requires 
it;  and  sometimes  by  foul  kenneling;  and 
sometimes  by  foundering  and  melting  his 
grease.  To  cure  it,  take  two  handfuls  of 
wild  cresses,  the  like  oT  elecampane,  and  as 
much  of  the  roots  and  leaves  of  rheubarb 
and  sorrel,  and  two  pounds  of  the  roots  of 
frodels,  make  them  all  boil  well  in  lie  and 
vinegar ;  having  strained  the  decoction,  put 
therein  two  pounds  of  grey  soap,  and  when 
it  is  melted  therein,  then  rub  your  dogs  with 
it  four  oi-  five  days  together,  and  it  will  cure 
thern^ 


dogs'  diseases,  etc.  339 

A  most  excellent  receipt  to  killjieas^  lice, 

ticks,  or  any  other  ^vermin  in  dogs  ; 

also  hozo  to  keep  them  clean. 

Take  two  handfuls  of  the  leaves  of  white 
cresses,  as  much  of  wild  sorrel,  and  as  much 
of  mint,  with  two  ounces  of  stavesacre,  and 
boil  them  in  a  lie  made  of  vine  leaves  ;  when 
it  is  boiled  well,  strain  it,  and  in  the  decoc- 
tion put  two  ounces  of  soap,  and  one  ounce 
of  saffron,  with  a  handful  of  salt;  stir  these 
together  and  wash  your  dogs  therewith. 

For  a  bruise  in  a  dog. 

Make  a  plaister  of  the  roots  of  comfrey, 
pitch,  tar,  and  oil  of  turpentine,  in  equal 
quantities,  and  mingle  them  together ;  then 
spread  it  on  a  cloth  as  large  as  the  bruised 
places,  and  lay  it  thereon  as  hot  as  the  dog 
can  endure  it,  and  this  will  cure  him, 

G  g  2 


v340  dogs'  diseases,  etc. 

A  plaister  to  heal  a  foundered  dog. 

Take  twelve  yolks  of  eggs,  and  beat  them 
with  four  ounces  of  the  juice  of  mousear,  or 
with  vinegar  only;  being  well  beaten,  put 
therein  soot  pulverized;  mingle  all  these 
together  and  anoint  the  soles  of  your  dog's 
feet  therewith,  and  bind  a  linen  cloth  about 
them ;  after  this  let  him  rest  forty-eight  hours 
in  his  kennel. 

How  to  keep  a  hitch  from  growing  proud. 

Before  a  bitch  hath  had  whelps,  give  her 
every  morning,  nine  days  together,  nine 
grains  of  pepper  wrapt  up  in  her  meat,  whe- 
ther it  be  in  cheese,  bread,  &c. 

A  receipt  for  a  dog  that  ca?i7iot  "coid  his. 
urine. 

Take  a  handful  of  marshmallows,  the  like 
quantity  of  archangel,    the  roots  of  fennel, 


DOGS     DISEASES,    ETC.  341 

the  roots  of  brambles,  each  a  like  quantity, 
and  let  them  boil  together  in  white  wine 
till  a  third  part  be  consumed,  and  convey  it 
down  your  dog's  throat ;  but  if  this  will  not 
do,  take  a  piece  of  candle  three  or  four 
inches  long,  and  thrust  it  into  his  sheath  as 
far  as  you  can,  and  it  will  make  him  skummer. 

A  cure  for  tetters^  cankers,  and  ring- 
worms, in  dogs. 

Take  a  dram  of  the  powder  of  mercury 
sublimate,  and  beat  it  well  in  a  stone  mor- 
tar, with  the  juice  and  inward  substance  of 
cittron,  without  the  bark,  and  put  it  into  a 
little  water  and  vinegar ;  then  take  an  ounce 
of  alum,  and  as  much  soap,  incorporate 
these  together  and  let  them  boil  till  the  third 
part  be  consumed,  and  lay  this  decoction  on 
the  part  affected. 

For  any  zvoiind  in  a  dog. 

If  your  dog  be  wounded,  which  frequently 
Gg  3 


342  ELECTION    OF    DOGS,    ETC. 

happens  when  some  beasts  of  venery  do 
bay,  take  the  juice  of  red  coleworts,  and 
nothing  else,  and  pour  it  into  the  wounds, 
and  it  will  effect  the  cure. 

OF  THE  ELECTION  OF  DOGS  AND 
BITCHES  FOR  GOOD  WHELPS. 

Your  bitch  must  be  of  a  good  kind,  strong, 
and  well  proportioned  in  all  parts,  having 
her  ribs  and  flanks  great  and  large ;  let  the 
dog  that  lines  her  be  of  a  good  fair  breed, 
and  young,  if  you  intend  to  have  light  and 
hot  dogs ;  for  if  the  dog  be  old,  the  whelps 
will  participate  of  his  dull  and  heavy  nature. 
If  your  bitch  grows  not  naturally  proud  so 
.^oon  as  you  would  wish,   you  may  make  her 
so  by  taking  two  heads  of  garlic,   half  a  cas- 
tor's stone,   the  juice  of  cresses,  and  about 
twelve  Spanish  flies,  or  cantharides,  boil  them 
together  in  a  pipkin  which  holds  a  pint,  with 
some  mutton,  and  make  broth  thereof,   and 
give   it  to  the  bitch  twice  or  thrice.     The 
same  being  given  to  the  dog,  will  make  him 


ELECTION    OF    DOGS,    ETG.  343 

desirous  of  copulation.  Wlien  your  bitch 
is  lined,  and  with  puppies,  you  must  not  let 
her  hunt,  as  it  may  make  her  cast  the  whelps ; 
but  let  her  be  unconfined  and  at  large  ;  she 
will  then  be  impatient  for  food ;  you  should 
give  her  some  warm  broth  once  a  day. 

If  you  would  spay  your  bitch,  it  must  be 
done  before  she  has  had  a  litter  of  w^helps ; 
and  in  spaying  her,  take  not  away  all  the 
roots,  or  strings,  of  the  veins  ;  if  you  do,  you 
will  much  prejudice  her  reins  and  hinder  her 
swiftness  ever  after ;  but  by  leaving  some 
behind  it  will  make  her  much  the  stronger, 
and  more  hardy.  Whatever  you  do,  spay 
her  not  when  she  is  proud,  as  that  will  en- 
danger her  life ;  you  may  do  it  fifteen  days 
after ;  but  the  best  time  is,  when  the  whelps 
are  shaped  within  her. 


/ 


S44  HOW   TO    TAKE  BADGERS^ 


HOW  TO  TAKE  BADGERS,   FOXES, 

AND  OTHER  FOUR-FOOTED 

VERMIN,   BY  TRAIN- 

The  best  train  for  the  badger,  is  hog's 
flesh ;  as  by  taking  a  bit  of  pork  and  train 
over  a  badger's  burrow,  if  he  be  within  you 
will  soon  see  him  appear  without,  and  having 
a  spring-snare  placed  at  the  burrow's  mouth, 
the  moment  the  badger  gets  his  leg,  or  legs, 
in  the  snare,  he  will  spring  up  three  or  four 
feet  from  the  ground,  and  be  suspended ;  you 
may  then  bag  him  as  you  please.  When  the 
badger  forsakes  his  hole,  the  fox  frequently 
takes  possession  of  it,  wherein  he  will  de- 
fend himself  stoutly  against  a  terrier,  but  not 
so  vigorously  as  a  badger,  neither  is  the  biting 
so  dangerous.  If  it  is  a  bitch  fox,  and  should 
be  taken  in  clicketting  time,  cut  out  the  gut 
that  holds  her  sperm  together  with  her  stones, 
or  those  kidneys  which  gelders  take  from 


FOXES,    ETC.  345 

bitciies  they  have  spayed ;  cut  those  into 
pieces,  and  mingle  a  little  of  her  grease,  and 
as  much  as  you  can  save  of  the  urine,  with 
a  little  gummastic,  naturally  hot,  and  put  the 
mixture  in  a  glazed  earthen  bottle,  put  it  in 
the  sun,  or  near  a  slow  fire,  till  it  is  dissolved, 
then  stop  it  up  close  and  put  it  a  foot  or 
more  under  ground  till  you  want  to  use  it : 
by  keeping  it  this  way,  it  will  serve  for  years, 
and  the  least  matter  of  it  will  do. 

The  train  must  be  ordered  thus ;  take  the 
skin  of  bacon  and  lay  it  on  a  gridiron ;  when 
it  is  hot,  and  thoroughly  broiled,  anoint  it 
with  the  aforesaid  ingredients  contained  in 
your  bottle  ;  by  this  means,  if  there  be  a  fox 
near,  or  within  a  mile  or  so,  where  this  train 
was  drawn,  and  the  wind  fair,  the  fox  will 
follow  it;  but  he  that  draweth  the  train,, 
must  rub  the  soles  of  his  shoes  with  new 
cow-dung,  and  must  have  the  feet  of  two 
stockings  half  full  of  the  same  dung  to  slip  on 
his  shoes,  lest  tlie  fox  scent  his  feeting ;  and 
thus  you  may  train  a  fox  to  his  standing,  and 


340      HOW    TO    TAKE    BADGERS,    ETC. 

take  him  as  you  think  fit  with  spring- snare, 
box,  trap,  &c. 

All  four-footed  vermin  may  be  taken  in 
the  same  way» 


y-  Y-*,    T^-^r*'- 1 


!ETURN 


CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

202  Main  Library 


OAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2 

3 

[ 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

Renewals  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due  date. 

Books  may  be  Renewed  by  calling     642-3405. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


PR  14  1993 

AUIDDISCCIRC 

JAN  25-93 

ORM  NO.  DD6 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CA 
BERKELEY, 

LIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
CA  94720 

K^{ 


ry- 


YB   10247 


U  C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDMES733ME